Você está na página 1de 0

TEAM/FOCUS/EMPIRE

Version-7 (USA)
System Manual
Matrix Telecom Pvt. Ltd.
Corporate Office: Factory:
394-GIDC, Makarpura, 39-GIDC, Waghodia-391 760,
Vadodara-390 010, Dist. Vadodara,
Gujarat, India. Gujarat, India.
Phone: +91 265 2630555 Phone: +91 2668 263172/73
Fax: 2636598 Fax: 262631
E-mail: Info@MatrixTeleSol.com E-mail: Support@MatrixTeleSol.com
URL: www.MatrixTeleSol.com
June 2005
Documentation Information
This is a general documentation and it covers many models with different specifications. A particular product may not
support all the features and facilities described in the documentation.
Matrix Telecom reserves the right to revise information in this publication for any reason without prior
notice. Information in this documentation may change from time to time. Matrix Telecom makes no
warranties with respect to this documentation and disclaims any implied warranties. While every precaution
has been taken in preparation of this system manual, Matrix Telecom assumes no responsibility for errors or
omissions. Neither is any liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of the information contained
herein.
Matrix Telecom reserves the right without prior notice to make changes in design or components of the
equipment as engineering and manufacturing may warrant.
Neither Matrix Telecom nor its affiliates shall be liable to the purchaser of this product or third parties for
damages, losses, costs or expenses incurred by purchaser or third parties as a result of: accident, misuse or
abuse of this product or unauthorized modifications, repairs or alterations to this product or failure to strictly
comply with Matrix Telecoms operating and maintenance instructions.
All rights reserved. No part of this system manual may be copied or reproduced in any form or by any means
without the prior written consent of Matrix Telecom.
Contents
Section 1: Introduction
Welcome ............................................................................................................................................................. 9
Packing List ..................................................................................................................................................... 10
Introducing the System .................................................................................................................................... 11
Configuring the System ................................................................................................................................... 15
Protecting the System ...................................................................................................................................... 17
Installing the System........................................................................................................................................ 19
Getting Started ................................................................................................................................................ 21
Section 2: Features and Facilities
Abbreviated Dialing ......................................................................................................................................... 27
Alarms .............................................................................................................................................................. 32
Allowed and Denied Lists ................................................................................................................................ 36
Auto Call Back ................................................................................................................................................. 39
Auto Redial ...................................................................................................................................................... 41
Barge-In ........................................................................................................................................................... 43
Behind the PBX Applications ........................................................................................................................... 44
Boss Ring.......................................................................................................................................................... 46
Busy Hunting Group ........................................................................................................................................ 47
Call Budget ...................................................................................................................................................... 48
Call Cost Calculation (CCC) .......................................................................................................................... 50
Call Duration Control ...................................................................................................................................... 59
Call Follow-Me ................................................................................................................................................ 63
Call Forward ................................................................................................................................................... 64
Call Park ......................................................................................................................................................... 66
Call Pick Up .................................................................................................................................................... 67
Call Progress Tones ......................................................................................................................................... 69
Call Splitting .................................................................................................................................................... 72
Call Transfer .................................................................................................................................................... 74
Cancel Extension Features .............................................................................................................................. 76
Class Of Service (COS) .................................................................................................................................... 77
CLI Display ...................................................................................................................................................... 80
Communication Ports ...................................................................................................................................... 83
Computer Connectivity ................................................................................................................................... 85
Conference ....................................................................................................................................................... 90
Configuration Reports ..................................................................................................................................... 91
Continued Dialing............................................................................................................................................ 92
Conversation Recording .................................................................................................................................. 93
Department Group........................................................................................................................................... 94
Default the Configuration ............................................................................................................................... 96
Direct Inward Dialing (DID) ............................................................................................................................ 97
Direct Outward System Access (DOSA) ......................................................................................................... 100
Distinctive Rings ............................................................................................................................................ 105
Door Lock ...................................................................................................................................................... 106
Dynamic Lock ................................................................................................................................................ 109
Emergency Dialing.......................................................................................................................................... 111
Emergency Detection and Reporting ............................................................................................................. 112
Extension Parameters ................................................................................................................................... 113
External Call Forward (ECF) ....................................................................................................................... 116
External Music............................................................................................................................................... 120
Fax Homing ................................................................................................................................................... 121
Flash Timer .................................................................................................................................................... 123
Flexible Numbers ........................................................................................................................................... 124
Help Reports .................................................................................................................................................. 126
Hold ............................................................................................................................................................... 127
Hotel Applications ......................................................................................................................................... 128
Hotline ........................................................................................................................................................... 140
Interrupt Request ........................................................................................................................................... 142
Last Number Redial ....................................................................................................................................... 143
Maturity ......................................................................................................................................................... 144
Music on Hold ................................................................................................................................................ 147
Operator ........................................................................................................................................................ 148
Operator Console .......................................................................................................................................... 149
Paging (PAS) .................................................................................................................................................. 159
Port Number Identification ........................................................................................................................... 162
Power Down Mode ........................................................................................................................................ 163
Printer Port ................................................................................................................................................... 164
Privacy........................................................................................................................................................... 165
Programming the System............................................................................................................................... 166
Programming Using a Computer .................................................................................................................. 169
Programming Wizard ..................................................................................................................................... 171
Raid ................................................................................................................................................................ 178
Real Time Clock ............................................................................................................................................. 179
Relay Port ...................................................................................................................................................... 180
Remote Display Units .................................................................................................................................... 185
Remote Programming .................................................................................................................................... 186
Restart the System ......................................................................................................................................... 187
Selective Trunk Access ................................................................................................................................... 188
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) .................................................................................................... 189
System Parameters ........................................................................................................................................ 199
System Security (Passwords) ......................................................................................................................... 204
System Timers ................................................................................................................................................ 205
Time Table ...................................................................................................................................................... 208
Toll Control .................................................................................................................................................... 210
Trunk Access .................................................................................................................................................. 212
Trunk Landing ............................................................................................................................................... 214
Trunk Parameters .......................................................................................................................................... 216
Trunk Reservation.......................................................................................................................................... 219
User Security (User Password) ...................................................................................................................... 220
Virtual Extensions .......................................................................................................................................... 221
Voice Help ...................................................................................................................................................... 223
Voice Mail Integration ................................................................................................................................... 224
Voice Messages .............................................................................................................................................. 227
Walk-In Class of Service ................................................................................................................................ 234
Section 3: Appendices
Appendix A: Features at a Glance ................................................................................................................ 237
Appendix B: System Commands .................................................................................................................... 238
Appendix C: System Parameters ................................................................................................................... 240
Appendix D: Extension Parameters .............................................................................................................. 241
Appendix E: Trunk Parameters ..................................................................................................................... 242
Appendix F: Technical Specifications ............................................................................................................ 243
Appendix G: Troubleshooting ........................................................................................................................ 245
Glossary ......................................................................................................................................................... 246
Index.............................................................................................................................................................. 247
Notes and Programming Register ................................................................................................................ 252
Section 1: Introduction
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 9
Team/Focus/Empire
Welcome
Thanks for purchasing a Matrix product.
We want you to get the maximum performance from our product. If you run into technical difficulties, we are
here to help. But please consult this system manual first.
If you still cant find the answer, gather all the information or questions that apply to your problem and, with
the product close to you, call your dealer. Matrix dealers are trained and ready to give you the support you
need to get the most from your Matrix product. In fact, most problems reported are minor and can be easily
solved over the phone.
In addition, technical consultation is available from Matrix engineers every business day. We are always
ready to give advice on application requirements or specific information on installation and operation of our
products.
Please note that the words Extension , Extension line User are used synonymously.
The system manual is divided in following sections:
Section 1: Introduction
Section 2: Features and Facilities
Section 3: Appendices
We suggest the first time users to read this system manual in the following sequence.
Section 1
Section 2 (in the below given hierarchy)
Flexible Numbers
Distinctive Rings
Selective Trunk Access
Call Pick Up
Call Transfer
Last Number Redial
Abbreviated Dialing
Call Splitting
Hold
Power Down Mode
Default the Configuration
Programming the System
Programming Wizard
We have provided a couple of pages titled Notes and Programming Register. The user can use Notes
for making note of customers requirement and Programming Register for registering the programming
changes datewise. These could be used for future reference.
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 10
Team/Focus/Empire
Packing List
The table given below shows the standard sales package for Team, Focus and Empire. In case of short supply,
please contact the source from where you have purchased the system immediately.
Item Qty. Item Qty. Item Qty.
Team-208 1 Focus-416 1 Empire-428 1
System Manual 1 System Manual 1 System Manual 1
User's Guide 1 User's Guide 1 User's Guide 1
Quick Start 2 Quick Start 2 Quick Start 2
Mounting Template 1 Mounting Template 1 Mounting Template 1
Screw M 8/35 2 Screw Grip 4 PPM-4 2
Screw Grip 2 Screw M 3/4 2 Screw Grip 6
T. P. G. 1 Screw M 8/35 2 Screw M 8/35 2
Warranty Card Set 1 PPM-4 1 Screw M 3/4 4
Support Card 1 T. P. G. 1 Empire MDF 1
Telephone Message Pad 1 Warranty Card Set 1 T. P. G. 1
Matrix Logo Small 5 Support Card 1 Warranty Card Set 1
Telephone Message Pad 1 Support Card 1
Matrix Logo Small 5 Telephone Message Pad 1
Matrix Logo Small 10
Team/Focus/Empire CD - 1 No.
(Team/Focus/Empire System Manual, Team/Focus/Empire Quick Start, Team/Focus/Empire User's
Guide, DSS-45 User's Guide
Packing List
Team Focus Empire
The EL and EXT. cards are packaged separately if purchased.
=X=X=
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 11
Team/Focus/Empire
Introducing the System
Matrix offers four different models named Team-208S, Team-208P, Focus-416 and Empire-428. All these products
use a common software architecture.
The Team-208
The Team-208S/P is a 20 ports PBX system with maximum 8 trunk ports and maximum 20 extension ports. It can
be configured in any range from 0x20 to 8x12. The basic configuration offered by Matrix is 208. The Team-208S/P
is a wall mountable, expandable model with separate power supply. (The Linear Power Supply (LPS) or the
Switched Mode Power Supply (SMPS) with battery charging circuit).
The Team-208S offers all the basic features of the Matrix PBX whereas the Team-208P offers all the basic features
plus hi-tech features.
The Focus-416
The Focus-416 is a 40 ports PBX system with maximum 16 trunk ports and maximum 40 extension ports. It can be
configured in any range from 0x40 to 16x24. The basic configuration offered by Matrix is 416. The Focus-416 is a
wall mountable, expandable model with separate power supply. (The Linear Power Supply or the Switched Mode
Power Supply with battery charging circuit).
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 12
Team/Focus/Empire
The Empire-428
The Empire-428 is a 96 ports PBX system with maximum 16 trunk ports and 90 extension ports. It can be config-
ured in any range from 0x96 to 16x80. The basic configuration offered by Matrix is 428. The Empire-428 is a table-
top, expandable model with separate MDF and separate power supply. (The Linear Power Supply or the Switched
Mode Power Supply with battery charging circuit)
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 13
Team/Focus/Empire
Features of Version 7:
All the models work on 90V to 260V AC Power supply.
All the models support both tone and pulse dialing.
All the models support On-site programming as well as remote programming.
All the models are compatible with any type of telephone instrument.
All the standard models support basic features like:
Alarm
Auto Call Back
Barge-in
Internal Dialing
Hold/Toggle
Call Follow-Me
Call Forward
Call Park
Call Pick Up
Call Transfer
Class of Service
Distinctive ringing
Do Not Disturb
Executive-Secretary (Hotline)
Flexible Numbers
Hot line
Hunting schemes
Interrupt Request
Last Number Redial
Music on hold
On site programming
Power Down extensions
Programmable Feature Access
Pulse and DTMF dialing
The standard models supports advanced features like:
Abbreviated Dialing
Auto Redial
Auto Shut dynamic Lock
Boss Ring
Call Duration Control
Call Privacy
Conference
Continued Dialing
Department Group
DID
DOSA
External Call Forwarding
Programmable Timers
Programmable Trunk Access
Raid
Remote Alarm
Selective Trunk Access
SMDR
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 14
Team/Focus/Empire
Toll Control
Trunk Groups
Walk-in Class of Service
Voice Mail Integration
All the Premium models support basic features plus hi-tech features like:
Alarm - Daily
Alarm - Time
Automatic Day/Night Modes
Call Budget
Call Progress Tone Detection
Computer Connectivity
Configuration Report
CLI Display
External Music Interface
Fax Homing
Help Reports
Operator Console Interface
Port Number Identification
PAS Interface
Printer Port
Relay Port (Inteleswitch/Door Lock)
Remote Display Units
SMDR
Voice Help
Voice Module Applications
Please note:
Fast Programming command * does not work in Team-208S model.
=X=X=
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 15
Team/Focus/Empire
Configuring the System
The Team/Focus/Empire are versatile products from Matrix that can be effectively used in small, medium and large
organizations. The number and the type of ports required is decided by the customer and the basic configuration can
be expanded to meet the requirements.
The Team-208
The Team-208S/P is a multi-card system and houses three types of cards viz.
1. CPU Card
This card controls and co-ordinates all the activities of the entire system. All the configuration and the programming
information is stored on this card. It controls all the ports. The Micro Controller, Real Time Clock, LEDs, one Tone
Generator(400Hz), Voice Modules, Fax Detection Circuit, DTMF transreceivers are all housed in this card. In
addition to the above Team-208P also supports the following interfaces.
Communication Port-1
Printer Port-1
External Music Port-1
Paging Port-1
Relay Port-1
The functions and the significance of each of these interfaces are explained in respective topics of this system manual.
2. EL Card
The EL card are available in two varieties viz.
EL card with 12 KHz/16 KHz
EL card without 12 KHz/16 KHz
Each variety has two types of cards:
The EL-104 card (1 trunk port and 4 extension ports)
The EL-203 card (2 trunk ports and 3 extension ports)
3. Ext. Card
The Ext. card has 5 extension ports and its named as EXT-005 card.
The EL and Ext. cards are optional. These are purchased to fullfil the customers configuration requirement.
For example a customer requires a PBX system with configuration 2x13. To fulfill this requirement the customer
needs to purchase a Team-208S or Team-208P and an EXT-005 card. The customer can insert the EXT-005 card
in the third location. (The lower card is on the right hand side)
The Focus-416
The Focus-416 is a multi-card system and houses three types of cards viz.
1. CPU Card
This card controls and co-ordinates all the activities of the entire system. All the configuration and the
programming information is stored on this card. It controls all the ports. The Micro Controller, Real Time
Clock, LEDs, Tone Generator(400 Hz), Voice Modules, Fax Detection Circuit, DTMF transreceivers and
Music circuit, etc. are all housed in this card. This card also supports following interfaces.
Communication Port-1
Printer Port-1
External Music Port-1
Paging Port-1
Relay Port-1
The functions and the significance of each of these interfaces are explained in respective topics of this system manual.
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 16
Team/Focus/Empire
2. EL Card
The EL card are available in two varieties viz.
EL card with 12 KHz/16 KHz
EL card without 12 KHz/16 KHz
Each variety has two types of cards:
The EL-104 card (1 trunk port and 4 extension ports)
The EL-203 card (2 trunk ports and 3 extension ports)
3. Ext. Card
The Ext. card has 5 extension ports and its named as EXT-005 card
The EL and Ext. cards are optional. These are purchased to fullfil the customers configuration requirement.
The Empire-428
The Empire-428 is a multi-card system and houses four types of cards viz.
1. Master Card
This card controls and co-ordinates all the activities of the entire system. All the configuration and the
programming information is stored on this card. It controls all the ports. The Micro Controller, Real Time
Clock, LEDs, are housed in this card. This card also supports following interfaces.
Communication Port-1
Printer Port-1
Relay Port-1
2. Tone Card
This card houses a Microcontroller, Tone Generator (400Hz), Voice Modules, Fax Detection Circuit, DTMF
transreceivers and a Music circuit. This card also supports following interfaces.
External Music Port-1
Paging Port-1
3. EL Card
The EL card are available in two varieties viz.
EL card with 12 KHz/16 KHz
EL card without 12 KHz/16 KHz
The EL Card supports two trunk ports and 6 extension ports and hence is called EL-206 card. This card
houses a microcontroller and LEDs alongwith the trunk and extension ports.
4. EXT Card
The EL and Ext. cards are optional. These are purchased to fullfil the customers configuration requirement.
The EXT card supports 8 extension ports and hence is called EXT-008 card. The EXT-008 card houses these
ports, a switch and a microcontroller.
=X=X=
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 17
Team/Focus/Empire
Protecting the System
The system does not work in isolation with the environment. It is connected to the environment in following ways:
Power is fed to the system for functioning of the system.
Being the system, trunk lines and extension lines are also connected to the system.
The system should be protected from static charges that could find their way through the system
components.
If the system is protected from these interfaces, 100% satisfactory and trouble free performance of the
system is guaranteed.
Protecting the System from heavy voltages from the Mains:
The system is designed to work with input voltages ranging between 90-265V AC, 47-53 Hz (if SMPS with battery
charger is used and at 230V 5%, 50/60 Hz). It is recommended to protect the system from abrupt changes in the
input voltage, using spike/surge protectors.
Protecting the System from heavy voltages on the trunk lines and the overhead extensions:
The system can get damaged if heavy voltages enter the system from trunk lines or from overhead extensions.
These heavy voltages could be due to:
Heavy voltage line falling on the CO line or on the overhead extensions cable
Thunderbolts
Short-circuit of trunk lines or overhead extension cables with electric cables. It is necessary to protect. The
system from these voltages. The protection can be in the form of some protection devices like GDTs, MOVs,
Fuses, etc. Matrix provides a protection device for the four ports called PPM-4. It is recommended to connect
this device to each trunk line and overhead extension. These protection devices are inbuilt for each trunk in the
system.
These devices work satisfactorily only if they are properly earthed. It is recommended that the system is provided
with a separate telecom earth. Telecom earth is a dedicated earth only for the system. The advantage of having a
dedicated earth is that there is no risk of back voltage. There are chances that if the earth is not perfect, instead of
providing protection to the system, it may damage the system. Please note that Matrix supplies one number PPM-4
with Focus system and two number PPM-4 with Empire system free of cost. For our customers using Team system
it is recommended that they purchase a PPM-4 and installed the same.
Protecting the System from static charges:
While installing the system or servicing the system, care must be taken to provide a path to the static charges. It is
advisable for the system engineer to touch an unenergised grounded object before touching the system before
installation or maintenance.
Protecting the system from heavy voltage on the communication cable:
The system provides a communication port to which a computer can be connected. It is recommended to run the
cable connecting both the devices through the conduit carrying telephone cables or through a separate conduit. By
fluke if an electrical wire carrying heavy voltage shorts with this cable, heavy voltages can damage the
communication port.
Protecting the system from heavy voltage on the External music port:
The external music port of the system should be protected from:
Heavy voltages on the cable connecting the system and the external music source due to shorting with any
electrical wire.
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 18
Team/Focus/Empire
An audio signal, which is not as per the specifications, is fed to this port. Please refer External Music for
specifications.
Protecting the system from heavy voltages on the PAS port:
The PAS port of the system should be protected from:
Heavy voltages on the cable connecting the system and the amplifier/speaker due to shorting with any
electrical wire.
Faulty Amplifier
Protecting the system from heavy voltage on the Relay Port:
The Relay port of the system should be protected from:
Heavy voltages on the cable connecting system and the equipment / Doorlock / Contactor connected to it.
Faulty or overrated contactor / equipment / Doorlock.
Protecting the system from insects:
Close the cabling holes in the enclosure after wiring.
Cover the ventilation slots in the enclosure by a thin net. But please ensure that the air flow is not obstructed.
=X=X=
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 19
Team/Focus/Empire
Installing the System
Important Safety Instructions
Never do telephone wiring during a lightening storm.
Avoid using telephone other than a cordless type during an electric storm. There may be a remote risk of
electric shock from lightening.
Never use a telephone to report gas leaks if it is near to gas leak.
Do not touch non-insulated telephone wires or terminals before disconnecting at the network interface.
Do not install this product near water, for example near a bathtub, washing bowl, kitchen sink, laundry tub,
swimming pool etc.
Slots on enclosure are for proper ventilation. They will protect the system from over-heating. Never cover
the slots.
Never place this product on heated place or any other equipment.
Never push objects of any kind inside this product. This may short-circuit various parts.
Operate these products only with 230 VAC +/-10%, 50 Hz supply and if you are not sure about supply
voltage, contact authorized dealer. It is advisable to give power through a good quality Constant Voltage
Transformer (CVT).
This product is equipped with a plug having a third (ground) pin, which fits only into a grounding-type
outlet. This is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug into the outlet, ask an electrician to
replace the obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the purpose of the grounding type plug.
Unplug this product from electric wall outlet in following cases and contact authorized service personnel.
Liquid spills on to the product.
Product exposed to rain or water.
Product does not operate normally by following operating instructions.
Product dropped from height.
Product exhibits unusual change in performance.
Do not open the system in power-on condition. This may damage the system. Warranty does not cover
such damages.
The system provides primary protection module (PPM-4) for protection on CO trunks and overhead
extensions. Each extension line uses a fuse, GDT and MOV for protection.
It is advisable to connect a dedicated telecom earth to the terminal marked ETH on the MDF. If not
installed, heavy voltage on CO trunks/ overhead extensions can damage the product and warranty does
not cover such damages.
Site Selection
The system should always be installed at a place equidistant from all the extension lines. This reduces the
cabling cost and also makes cabling network less complicated.
The system should preferably be installed at 3.5 feet height (approx.) in airy, dust free and moisture
free place. An installation at this height makes preventive or curative maintenance task easy.
It is advisable that the system should be installed away from any source of electromagnetic noise such as
any radio equipment, heavy transformers, faulty electric chokes of tube lights, any device having a faulty
coil etc. This will reduce any problem arising due to electromagnetic effect.
Cabling
Decide different places at which you want to give the extensions the shortest possible cabling route to that
location.
Always ensure that you have separate cable conduits for both electrical and telephone cables.
The wires in the MDF should be inserted only after removing the insulation properly (1.0cm approx.).
Please do not double the cable before inserting in the MDF. Select a good quality telephone cable (with
0.5mm conductor diameter) for internal cabling.
For all over-head cabling, good quality drop wire must be used. In case you have any problem please take
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 20
Team/Focus/Empire
help of an expert wireman.
Avoid long length cables and at the same time keep number of joints to a minimum i.e. strike a balance
between the two. This will help you to find out a cable fault easily.
Single core cable is preferred instead of multi-core cable.
Power Supply
The Matrix PBX operates on 230V +/-5%, 50/60 Hz or 90-260V, 47-53 Hz AC supply. Arrange for a separate
power point and switch, close to the system. Power Supply for the system must be separate from other heavy
electrical loads like Air-conditioners, Heaters, Welding machines, Electrical motors, etc.
If the supply is not stable, use of a good CVT is recommended.
Earth (Ground)
Proper earth is vital for safety of the personnel and the system. Good electrical earth prevents electric shock
to the personnel. Two separate earth paths are recommended.
Electrical Earth : The regular earth provided with the electrical wiring. This prevents electric shock to the
personnel.
Telecom Earth : A separate earth to be provided to guard the system against heavy voltages due to thunderbolt,
damage due to heavy voltage power line failing on the overhead telephone lines.
Telephones
The system is capable of working with all standard telephones: Rotary phone, Pulse-tone switch able
push-button phone, Feature phone and Cordless phone.
It is not necessary to buy all new phones. You may also hook up your existing old telephones.
Please note that few features like DID, DOSA will not work with telephones, which do not support tone
dialing.
Trunk lines
Generally, CO provides two types of signaling in analog technology: Pulse dialing and Tone dialing. Hence, you
have to program the system to dial the codes either in pulse mode or tone mode depending on the type of
signaling used for the trunk line you use. Remember you can dial in pulse mode on a tone type trunk line
but vice versa is not possible. Take care to connect the trunk lines to the system through Primary Protection
Module (PPM-4). Be sure to earth the PPM-4. (Green wire is provided for this purpose)
Installation
Unpack the box. Get satisfied with the contents and the condition of all the parts. In case of short supply or
damaged parts, please contact the source from where you purchased the system immediately.
Dont power the system.
Check the voltage at the power point from where the supply is to be accessed. It should be as specified. It is
desirable to use a good quality power-conditioning device such as CVT.
Earth the system properly.
Connect all the extension line and trunk cables on the MDF of the system. Please note that the system provides
push type connectors on the MDF for extension line and trunk wires. Remove about 1cm of the insulation for
proper connections of the field wires to the MDF connectors.
Tag each wire pair with respective extension line or trunk number. (Different colour tags for trunk and extension
line can be used for better identification)
Connect power cord of the system to the power supply. Ensure proper contacts.
=X=X=
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 21
Team/Focus/Empire
Getting Started
After strictly following the safety instruction and installing the system as instructed (please refer Installing the
System), the system is now ready to be switched ON. To check the correctness of installation, configuration and
connection it is advisable to test the basic features like Making a call (Both Internal and External), Receiving a Call
before proceeding with the programming of the system as per requirement.
Switching ON the system
Switch on the system. The system will take about 3-4 seconds to reset. Observe the reset cycle on the front
panel of the system.
Reset Cycle (Team)
At power ON all the LEDs on the front panel glow in sequence (Power-Test-Night-Buffer-L1 to L4 for Team
and Power-Test-Night-Buffer-L1 to L8 for Focus) then all the LEDs go OFF. Then after the LED marked
Power glows and remains continuously ON. The LED marked TEST starts blinking after 1-3 seconds (1
second ON, 1 second OFF). The rest of the LEDs are OFF.
The system gives dial tone on all extension lines.
Reset Cycle (Focus)
At power ON all the LEDs on the front panel glow in sequence (Power-Test-Night-Buffer-L1 to L4 for Team
and Power-Test-Night-Buffer-L1 to L8 for Focus) then all the LEDs go OFF. Then after the LED marked
Power glows and remains continuously ON. The LED marked TEST starts blinking after 1-3 seconds (1
second ON, 1 second OFF). The rest of the LEDs are OFF.
The system gives dial tone on all extension lines.
Reset Cycle (Empire)
At power ON all the LEDs of the master card glow in sequence followed by the LEDs on the tone card
followed by the LEDs on the EL cards . Then all the LEDs go OFF. After 500 milliseconds all the LEDs glow at
once and remain ON for another 500 milliseconds. The system beeps. All the LEDs now go OFF. The LED
marked Power glows and remains continuously ON. The LED marked TEST (on the Master Card) starts
blinking after 1-3 seconds (1 second ON, 1 second OFF).
The system gives dial tone on all extension lines.
The array of LEDs and their behavior during the normal condition for Team/Focus/Empire is as given below:
The Team
The Team has 8 LEDs.
Led Label Normal Behaviour
L1 This LED is ON when Trunk 1 is in use
L2 This LED is ON when Trunk 2 is in use
L3 This LED is ON when Trunk 3 is in use
L4 This LED is ON when Trunk 4 is in use
Night This LED is ON when the system is used in Night Mode
Buffer This LED starts blinking when 650 calls are stored in the
buffer. It glows continuously ON when the buffer is full (850
calls).
Test This LED blinks during normal functioning
Power This LED glows when Team is powered.
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 22
Team/Focus/Empire
The dialing pattern and the ringing pattern can be observed on the LEDs L1 to L4.
The Focus
The Focus has 12 LEDs.
Led Label Normal Behaviour
L1 This LED is ON when Trunk 1 is in use
L2 This LED is ON when Trunk 2 is in use
L3 This LED is ON when Trunk 3 is in use
L4 This LED is ON when Trunk 4 is in use
L5 This LED is ON when Trunk 5 is in use
L6 This LED is ON when Trunk 6 is in use
L7 This LED is ON when Trunk 7 is in use
L8 This LED is ON when Trunk 8 is in use
Night This LED is ON when the system is used in Night Mode
Buffer This LED starts blinking when 650 calls are stored in the buffer. It
glows continuously ON when the buffer is full (850 calls).
Test This LED blinks during normal functioning
Power This LED glows when Focus is powered.
The Empire
The Empire has 21 LEDs in all.
Led Label Normal Behaviour
L1-L16 This LED is ON when the corresponding Trunk is in use
Night This LED is ON when the system is in used in Night Mode
Buffer This LED starts blinking when 650 calls are stored in the buffer. It
glows continuously ON when the buffer is full (850 calls).
Test (Master Card) This LED blinks during normal functioning
Test (Tone Card) This LED blinks during testing of Tone card
Power This LED glows when Empire is powered.
Testing the Installation.
In the Power ON mode the system is ready for use with predefined values for variables like extensions
flexible numbers, timers and other programmable parameters.
It is required to check the functioning of the system by testing all the extension lines and the trunk.
Test all extension lines for dial tone, ring back tone, speech and ring one by one.
Test functioning of the trunk by dialing outside number from one of the extension lines and checking the trunk
tones and speech. Ring on the trunk can be tested by asking your friend to dial your number.
How to make an Internal Call?
Lift the handset.
Dial the desired extensions flexible number.
The called extension rings. You get a Ring Back Tone.
Speech is established when the called party lifts the handset.
Important Points:
Hands free Operation is also possible if a speakerphone is used.
The extension lines having access to internal call will only be able to make Internal Calls.
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 23
Team/Focus/Empire
How to make External Call?
Lift the handset.
Dial trunk access code.
Dial the external Telephone Number.
Important Point:
The extension lines having access to trunk and higher Toll control will only be able to make External Calls.
Answering Calls
When a call is placed to your extension ,if the caller is an internal caller then your extension rings as
Trin....Trin............Trin.....Trin.............. This is called double ring. If the caller is an external caller, the extension on
which the trunk call lands rings as Trin................ Trin.................... This is single ring. These two types of rings
differentiate an internal caller from an external caller.
Programming the System
Many a times it happens that the default settings do not meet our requirements and there is need to program the
system. Programming is possible only from SE/SA mode.
For more details Please refer Programming the System.
Steps for Programing:
It is advisable to program the system in following hierarchy. One may skip undesirable steps.
1. Flexible Numbers
2. Class of Service(COS)
3. Allowed and Denied Lists
4. Toll Control
5. Trunk Access
6. Trunk Parameters
7. Trunk Landing
8. System Security(Passwords)
Relevant Topics:
1. Flexible Numbers
2. Interrupt Request
3. Raid
4. Auto Call Back
5. Barge-In
6. Call Forward
7. Distinctive Rings
8. Toll Control
9. Trunk Access
=X=X=
Section 2: Features and Facilities
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 27
Team/Focus/Empire
Abbreviated Dialing
Whats this?
Frequently called numbers can be stored in the system. These numbers can be dialed using specific codes.
This is called Abbreviated dialing. It is also known as Memory Dialing.
This helps save time while dialing frequently used numbers.
An abbreviated number is dialed through its directory index.
The Matrix PBX offers two types of Abbreviated Dialing: Personal Abbreviated Dialing and Global
Abbreviated Dialing.
Each user is allocated memory space called personal memory to store 10 numbers of his own choice.
This is called Personal Abbreviated Dialing. These numbers are dialed out using access codes 600-609.
Besides personal memory, 90 numbers can be stored in a common memory space called Global Memory.
These numbers are dialed out using access codes 610-699. This is called Global Abbreviated Memory.
Personal Abbreviated Dialing
The numbers stored in the personal memory of a user are dialed out.
Each user can store up to 10 numbers of his choice in his personal memory.
User can change these numbers anytime from his extension without consulting the System
Administrator or the System Engineer.
The location codes for Personal Abbreviated Dialing are 00-09. Hence, the access codes are 600 to 609.
Personal Abbreviated Dialing is allowed to all the users.
The system checks Trunk Access for daytime/night time and Toll Control allowed list and denied list
before dialing the Personal Abbreviated number. Hence for Personal Abbreviated Dialing, Trunk
Access for daytime/ nighttime, Toll Control allowed list and Toll Control denied list should be
programmed properly.
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 28
Team/Focus/Empire
How to program Personal Abbreviated Dialing?
In the above command
Directory Index is from 00 to 09.
Trunk is 1-4, 6-8 or 0. (Please note that trunk 5 and trunk 9 cannot be used. However, these can be programmed in
group 9 and 5 and then be used.)
Number is the telephone number, maximum of 16 digits which is to be abbreviated.
How to use Personal Abbreviated Dialing?
Directory Index is from 00 to 09
Example:
To program telephone number 316/529-6128 (Where 316 is the area code, 529 is the city code and 6128 is the
number) at the directory index 00, on trunk 1, dial
18-00-1-3165296128
Once this location is programmed with the number, dial 600 to call the number.
Please note that the personal memory directory cannot be printed or downloaded.
Global Abbreviated Dialing
The numbers stored in the global memory of the system are dialed out.
Global directory can be programmed either by the System Administrator or the System Engineer.
The global directory is common for all the users.
Maximum 90 numbers can be stored in the global directory. Location codes for global directory are
from 10 to 99. Hence, the access codes for global abbreviated dialing are 610 to 699.
Global Directory is divided into two parts i.e. Global Directory part 1 and Global Directory part 2.
A user can dial these numbers irrespective of his Toll Control. However, these numbers can be dialed
only if the user is allowed this feature from Class of Service and is given Trunk Access.
Telephone numbers of fire, police, branch offices or such other places can be stored in global directory
part 1 and its access be given to all the users so that any user can access this facility.
Long distance numbers can be stored in global directory part 2 and its access be given to selected users.
In case of long distance numbers, complete numbers with preceding codes should be entered.
1 Lift the handset. Dial tone
2 Dial 6-Directory Index. Number dialed out.
1 Lift the handset. Dial tone
2 Dial 18-Directory Index-Trunk-Number-#. Confirmation tone
3 16 8 2 88 6 5 0
3 16 8 2 81 2 3 4
9 18 2 3 45 8 5 5
9 18 2 3 48 9 5 4
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 29
Team/Focus/Empire
How to program?
Step 1: Program a telephone number in the Global Directory.
Step 2: Assign Global Directory Part I to an extension.
Step 3: Assign Global Directory Part II to an extension.
Step 4: Take a printout of Global Directory using the command 116.
Step 1
Use following command to program a telephone number in Global Directory:
8-Directory Index-Trunk-Number-#/Flash
Where,
Directory Index from 10 to 54 is for Global Directory Part I
Directory Index from 55 to 99 is for Global Directory Part II
Trunk is 1-4, 6-8 or 0. Please note that trunk 5 and trunk 9 cannot be used. However, these can be programmed in
group 9 and 5 and then be used.
Number is the telephone number (maximum 16 digits)
Step 2
Use following command to allow/deny global directory part I on a extension:
335-Extension-Day Time-Night Time
Where,
Extension is the flexible number assigned to the extension.
Use following command to enable/disable the access of global directory part I to all extensions:
335-*-Day Time-Night Time
Step 3
Use following command to enable/disable the access of global directory part II to all extensions:
336-Extension-Day Time-Night Time
Where,
Extension is the flexible number assigned to the extension.
Use following command to enable/disable the access of global directory part II to all extensions:
336-*-Day Time-Night Time
Example:
Store number 316/828-8650 in location 10 and number 918/234-5855 in location 55 of the global directory.
Give access of global directory I in day time and global directory II in night time to extension 23.
Day Time Meaning
0 Deny Global Directory Part II
1 Allow Global Directory Part II
Night Time Meaning
0 Deny Global Directory Part II
1 Allow Global Directory Part II
Day Time Meaning
0 Deny Global Directory Part I
1 Allow Global Directory Part I
Night Time Meaning
0 Deny Global Directory Part I
1 Allow Global Directory Part I
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 30
Team/Focus/Empire
To store number
Dial 8-10-0-3168288650
Dial 8-55-0-9182345855
To enable daytime/nighttime access
Dial 335-23-1-0
Dial 336-23-0-1
How to use Global Abbreviated Dialing?
Directory Index is from 10 to 99.
If the programming is done has per the above then to dialed 316/828-8650 the user should dialed 610.
Step 4
Use following command to download/print global directory:
116
Timer of Relevance:
Pause Timer-Time for which the system waits before dialing the stored telephone number on the trunk. This timer is
required because in old central office, you get dial tone after approximately 2-3 seconds. Now if the system dials the
telephone number immediately then it may happen first two or three digits do not get dialed on the central office
trunk and possibly we may get connected to some wrong number. To avoid this pause is introduced before dialing.
Command : 215-Timer
Range: 0-9 seconds.
Default : 3 seconds
Important Points:
Memory dialing may not work efficiently in old central office if pause timer is reduced to 1 second.
You will have to dial *6-location code to use memory dialing if any of the extension starts with digit 6 .
By default, all extensions have access to both the global directories.
Global memory will not work on those extensions where trunk access is not given.
Relevant Topics:
1. Class of Service (COS)
2. Trunk Parameters
3. Trunk Access
4. Toll Control
1 Lift the handset. Dial tone
2 Dial 6-Directory Index. Number dialed out.
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 31
Team/Focus/Empire
=X=X=
GLOBAL DIRECTORY AS ON 06-10-04(Wed) AT 15:00

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
LOCATION TRK NUMBER LOCATION TRK NUMBER
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
10 55
11 56
12 57
13 58
14 59
15 60
16 61
17 62
18 63
19 64
20 65
21 66
22 67
23 68
24 69
25 70
26 71
27 72
28 73
29 74
30 75
31 76
32 77
33 78
34 79
35 80
36 81
37 82
38 83
39 84
40 85
41 86
42 87
43 88
44 89
45 90
46 91
47 92
48 93
49 94
50 95
51 96
52 97
53 98
54 99
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
MATRIX TEAM Ver: 7R9 (US)

Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 32
Team/Focus/Empire
Alarms
Whats this?
The Matrix PBX offers four different types of alarms.
1. Duration Alarm
2. Time Alarm
3. Daily Alarm
4. Remote Alarm
Duration Alarm
The Matrix PBX can remind an extension user after some specific time.
On expiry of the set time, the telephone starts ringing.
When the extension user lifts the handset, he gets music or voice message (if recorded.)
How to use it?
1 Lift the handset. Dial tone
2 Dial 161-Minutes. Confirmation tone
3 Replace the handset.
Minutes can be from 00 to 99.
Example:
Dial 161-09 to set a reminder after 9 minutes.
Important Points:
Only one reminder can be set at a time on one extension. The last set alarm supersedes all the previous
timings.
All extensions can set duration alarm for same duration simultaneously.
If voice message is enabled and two or more extension set alarm for the same time then the extension that
lifts the handset first will get voice message whereas others will get music.
You can set time alarm, duration alarm, and daily alarm simultaneously on the same extension.
The timer can be set only in minutes and the format is MM.
If the extension is engaged at the time of alarm then the extension gets alarm when the extension becomes
free.
Ring cadence is same as that of Boss Ring.
Time Alarm
You can ask the Matrix PBX to remind you at some specific time. At the set time, your telephone starts
ringing.
When you lift the handset, you get music or voice message if recorded.
How to use it?
1 Lift the handset. Dial tone
2 Dial 162-Hour-Minute. Confirmation tone
3 Replace the handset.
Example :
Dial 162-1630 to set a reminder at 4.30 P.M.
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 33
Team/Focus/Empire
Important Points:
Only one time alarm can be set at a time on one extension.
All extensions can set time alarm for same time simultaneously.
If voice message is enabled and two or more extension set alarm for the same time then the extension that
lifts the handset first will get voice message whereas others will get music.
You can set time alarm, duration alarm, and daily alarm simultaneously on same extension.
The timer has 24-hour format i.e. 4.30 p.m. is 1630 hrs.
If the extension is engaged at the time of alarm then the extension gets alarm when it becomes free.
Ring cadence is same as that of Boss Ring.
Available only in Premium model
Daily Alarm
You can ask the Matrix PBX to remind you everyday at some specific time.
At the set time, your telephone starts ringing.
When you lift the handset, you get music or voice message (if recorded).
How to use it?
1 Lift the handset. Dial tone
2 Dial 163-Hour-Minute. Confirmation tone
3 Replace the handset.
Example:
Dial 163-1230 to set a daily reminder for break at 12.30 P.M.
Important Points:
Only one time alarm can be set at a time on one extension. The last set alarm supersedes all the previous
timings.
All extensions can set time alarm for same time simultaneously.
If voice message is enabled and two or more extension set alarm for the same time then the extension that
lifts the handset first will get voice message whereas others will get music.
You can set time alarm, duration alarm, and daily alarm simultaneously on same extension.
The timer has 24-hour format i.e. 12.30 p.m. is 1230 hrs.
If the extension is engaged at the time of alarm then the extension gets alarm when the extension becomes
free.
Available only in Premium model.
Remote Alarm
Whats this?
You can ask the Matrix PBX to wake up the guest in your hotel at a time desired by your guest.
At the set time, the telephone of your guest starts ringing.
When he lifts the handset, he gets music or voice message (if recorded).
If the guest does not answer the call for time = Alarm ring timer 1 then both the guests extension and your
extension (you should be an operator extension) starts ringing for time = Alarm ring timer 2.
How to use it?
1 Lift the handset. Dial tone
2 Dial 164-Extension-1-Minutes (1 is for duration alarm). Confirmation tone
3 Dial 164-Extension-2-Hours-Minutes (2 is for time alarm). Confirmation tone
4 Dial 164-Extension-3-Hours-Minutes (3 is for daily alarm). Confirmation tone
5 Keep the handset on hook.
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 34
Team/Focus/Empire
Example:
To set a daily wake up alarm at 5.30 am on station 23 from station 26, dial 165-23-3-0530 from station 26.
To cancel remote alarm for any extension, Dial 164-Extension-0. (Extension refers to the extension
on which remote alarm was earlier set.
Important Points:
Only one time alarm/duration alarm/daily alarm can be set at a time on one extension. The last set alarm
supersedes all the previous timings.
You can set time alarm, duration alarm and daily alarm simultaneously on same extension from any
extension.
If voice message is enabled and two or more extension set alarm for the same time then the extension that
lifts the handset first will get voice message whereas others will get music.
This feature can be used in hotels by receptionists to wake up their guests.
The return alarm ring will go to the operator and not on the extension from where the alarm is set.
Ring cadence of this alarm ring is same as that of boss ring.
To cancel remote alarm for any extension, Dial 164-Extension-0. (Extension refers to the extension
on which remote alarm was earlier set.
Available only in Premium model
Cancel the Alarms
You can ask the PBX to cancel the alarm.
Dialing 160 from the extension will cancel all the alarms set on that extension i.e. suppose time alarm,
duration alarm and daily alarm all are set on extension 23 and if you dial 160 from the extension, all the
alarms will be cancelled.
Suppose you set duration alarm/time alarm/daily alarm on extension 23 from extension 26. This alarm can
be cancelled from extension 23 only.
How to use it?
1 Lift the handset on which the alarm is set. Dial tone
2 Dial 160. Confirmation tone
3 Replace the handset.
Example:
To cancel the alarms set on station 26, dial 160 from station 26.
To cancel remote alarm set on station 26 from station 23, dial 164-26-0 from station 23.
How to program?
Alarm is a programmable feature. Please refer class of service(COS) for details on how to permit Alarm and
Remote Alarm to an extension user.
Timers of Relevance:
Alarm Ring Timer 1-Time for which the extension rings on which the alarm is set.
Command: 217-13-Timer
Range: 01 to 99 seconds
Default: 90 seconds
Alarm Ring Timer 2-Time for which the extension on which the alarm is set and the operator extension both, rings
simultaneously.
Command: 217-14-Timer
Range: 01 to 99 seconds
Default: 60 seconds
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 35
Team/Focus/Empire
Important Points:
All extension users can set duration alarm/time alarm/daily alarm for same duration/time simultaneously.
If the extension is engaged at the time of alarm then the extension gets alarm when it becomes free.
Ring cadence of an alarm is same as that of Boss Ring.
If voice message is enabled and two or more extension set alarm for the same time then the extension that
lifts the handset first will get voice message whereas others will get music.
You can set time alarm, duration alarm and daily alarm simultaneously on the same extension.
If the alarm ring is not answered by the extension before expiring of Alarm ring timer 1, the extension and
the operator both ring for Alarm ring timer 2.
Time alarm and Daily alarm are available only in Premium model.
Relevant Topics:
1. Class of Service(COS)
2. Voice Messages
=X=X=
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 36
Team/Focus/Empire
Allowed and Denied Lists
Whats this?
Allowed and Denied lists is a group of number strings. The Matrix PBX uses these lists to support three
different features viz. Toll Control, Dynamic Lock and Call Budget.
Association of Allowed and Denied Lists with Toll Control:
When the number is dialed from an extension, the system compares the dialed number string with the number strings
in allowed and denied lists.
Association of Allowed and Denied Lists with Dynamic Lock:
If the user locks the extension and thereafter dials a number from his extension, the system compares the
dialed number string with the number strings in allowed and denied lists for the locked status.
Association of Allowed and Denied Lists with Call Budget:
If the Call Budget of the extension exhausts and there after the extension dials a number the system
compares the dialed number string with the number string in the Allowed and Denied Lists for the Call
Budget exhausted status.
How it works?
Maximum 10 allowed-denied lists (levels) can be formed.
Each level accommodates 12 allowed strings and 12 denied strings.
Each number string can have maximum of 16 digits.
Number string can be a complete telephone number, area code or few initial digits of a telephone number.
An allowed-denied list (a level) should be assigned to each extension depending upon the requirement.
A table as shown below is formed within the system memory.
Toll
C o ntrol
D yna m ic
Lock
Allow e d List
And
D enied List
C a ll
Bud ge t
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 37
Team/Focus/Empire
Allowed String Denie d String
Loc1, Loc2.Loc*, Loc# Loc1, Loc2.Loc*, Loc#
0 Num0, Num1.Num10, Num11 Num0, Num1.Num10, Num11
1 Num0, Num1.Num10, Num11 Num0, Num1.Num10, Num11
2 Num0, Num1.Num10, Num11 Num0, Num1.Num10, Num11
3 Num0, Num1.Num10, Num11 Num0, Num1.Num10, Num11
4 Num0, Num1.Num10, Num11 Num0, Num1.Num10, Num11
5 Num0, Num1.Num10, Num11 Num0, Num1.Num10, Num11
6 Num0, Num1.Num10, Num11 Num0, Num1.Num10, Num11
7 Num0, Num1.Num10, Num11 Num0, Num1.Num10, Num11
8 Num0, Num1.Num10, Num11 Num0, Num1.Num10, Num11
9 Num0, Num1.Num10, Num11 Num0, Num1.Num10, Num11
Level
By default, the Allowed and Denied strings are as shown below:
Level Allowed String Denied String
0 B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 0, *, #
1 B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, *, #
2 B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, *, #
3 B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, *, #
4 B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, *, #
5 B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 0, *, #
6 B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 0, *, #
7 B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 0, *, #
8 B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 0, *, #
9 B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 0, *, #
How to program?
Step 1: Take a pen and a paper and decide which number strings are to be programmed as allowed strings
and the denied strings.
Step 2: Program the allowed strings using command 252.
Step 3: Program the denied strings using command 253.
Step 1 Take a pen and a paper. Make the allowed and denied strings accordingly.
Step 2
Use following command to program an allowed string:
252-Level-Location-Number-Flash
Where
Level is from 0 to 9
Location is from 0 to 9, *, #.
Number is a complete telephone number, truncated telephone number or an area code.
Step 3
Use following command to program a denied string:
253-Level-Location-Number-Flash
Where
Level is from 0 to 9
Location is from 0 to 9, *, #.
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 38
Team/Focus/Empire
Number is a complete telephone number, truncated telephone number or an area code.
Default allowed strings and denied strings are shown in the table
Example 1:
Program following as allowed strings
1. 316/828-8650
2. 918/234-5855
Solution:
To program these two allowed strings in location 0 and 1 at level 3.
252-3-0-3168288650-Flash
252-3-1-9182345855-Flash
Example 2:
Program following as denied string:
1. 316/529-6128
Solution:
To program the denied string at location 0 of level 3.
253-3-0-3165296128-Flash
Important Point:
Allowed strings and Denied strings cannot be programmed remotely.
Relevant Topics:
1. Toll Control
2. Dynamic Lock
3. Call Budget
=X=X=
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 39
Team/Focus/Empire
Auto Call Back
Whats this?
The Matrix PBX offers two types of Auto Call Back viz. Auto Call Back-On Busy and Auto Call Back-On
No Reply.
Auto Call Back-On Busy
Extension user need not keep dialing busy extension repeatedly.
Extension user can request Auto Call Back by dialing 2 if he receives a busy tone.
When the requested extension becomes free it rings. Simultaneously, extension that requested Auto Call
Back also starts ringing.
Whosoever answers first gets ring-back tone, whereas the other end keeps ringing.
Once the ring is answered, ring-back tone stops and speech is established.
Auto Call Back can also be requested on busy trunk.
To Set ACB-On Busy
If Auto Call Back ring is not answered within 30 seconds, it stops and Auto Call Back request gets cleared.
This is called Auto Call Back Ring Timer and is programmable.
To Cancel ACB-On Busy
Example:
Extension 23 is busy. To enable Auto Call Back, dial 2 during busy tone. If you have wrongly dialed 23 and
want to cancel Auto Call Back request, dial 102 to cancel it.
Auto Call Back-On No Reply
Extension user need not keep trying no-reply extension repeatedly.
Extension user can set ACB-No Reply
When the extension user for whom ACB request was made returns to his desk and picks up the handset the
extension that requested ACB rings.
Both the extensions come in speech when the extension that requested ACB answers the call.
To Set ACB-on No reply
To Cancel Auto Call Back
1 Lift the handset. Dial tone
2 Dial 102. Confirmation tone
How to program?
Auto Call Back is a programmable feature. Please refer class of service(COS) for details on how to permit Auto
Call Back to a user.
1 Lift the handset. Dial tone
2 Dial 102. Confirmation tone
1 Dial Number. Busy tone
2 Dial 2. Confirmation tone
1 Dial Number. Ring Back Tone
2 Dial Flash-2. Confirmation tone
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 40
Team/Focus/Empire
Timer of Relevance:
Auto Call Back Ring Timer-Time for which the extension on which the ACB is set rings.
Command: 217-10-Timer
Range: 01 to 99 seconds
Default: 45 seconds
The significance of auto back ring timer is same for ACB-On Busy and ACB-on No Reply.
Important Points:
Only one ACB-On Busy request is entertained at a time.
Only one ACB-On No Reply request is entertained at a time.
The last ACB request supersedes all other previous ACB requests.
ACB-On Busy and ACB-On No Reply can be used simultaneously.
If more than one extension make ACB request for the same extension then the request of extension coming
first in the hardware loop is entertained.
For e.g. suppose extension 21, 22, 23 have hardware ports 1, 2, 3. If extension 22 is busy and extension
21 and extension 23 request for ACB then irrespective of the priority of the requests made, extension 21
will be entertained first. It holds true for the other extensions also.
Relevant Topic:
1. Class Of Service (COS)
=X=X=
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 41
Team/Focus/Empire
Auto Redial
Whats this?
Many times when we make a call, we find that the called party is busy. Hence we have to try the same
number repeatedly to contact him. This is very frustrating and time-consuming. Auto Redial rescues us from this
sheer wastage of time. The system gives ring to the extension user that requested Auto Redial, when the call goes
through.
The system offers two types of Auto Redial - Low priority Auto Redial and High priority Auto Redial.
Generally the system should be programmed in such a manner that in low priority type the number of
trials made by the system is less (count) and the time gap between two trials (timer) is more whereas in
high priority type the number of trials is more and the time gap between two trials is less. This enables
us to give Auto Redial facility to senior officials as well as staff persons.
How to use it?
Example:
Dialed number 316/529-6128 is busy. To enable Auto Redial, disconnect and dial 77 or 777.
To Cancel Auto Redial
Example:
Dialed number 316/529-6128 was busy. Auto Redial is requested. Meanwhile the same number calls. Now to
cancel Auto Redial request, dial 70.
How to program?
Auto Redial is a programmable feature. Please refer class of service(COS) for details on how to permit Auto Redial
to a user.
Timers of Relevance:
Auto Redial RBT Wait Timer-Time for which the Matrix PBX waits to sense RBT from the PSTN after
dialing the requested number.
Command: 2142-Timer
Range: 01 to 99 seconds
Default: 30 seconds
1 Lift the handset. Dial tone
2 Grab a trunk. Trunk dial tone
3 Dial number. Busy tone
4 Disconnect.
5 Lift the handset. Dial tone
6
Dial 77 (for Low priority Auto Redial).
or
Dial 777 (for High priority Auto Redial).
Confirmation tone
1 Lift the handset. Dial tone
2 Dial 70. Confirmation tone
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 42
Team/Focus/Empire
Low priority Auto Redial Timer and Count-Duration and the number of times the system shall try the requested
number.
Command: 2143-Timer-Count
Range: Timer : 01 to 99 seconds
Count : 01 to 99
Default: Timer : 40 seconds
Count : 01
High priority Auto Redial Timer and Count-Duration and the number of times the system shall try the requested
number.
Command: 2144-Timer-Count
Range: Timer : 01 to 99 seconds
Count : 01 to 99
Default: Timer : 30 seconds
Count : 01
Important Points:
Only one number can be requested for Auto Redial at a time from one extension.
All extensions can attempt Auto Redial simultaneously.
If the system detects busy tone it releases the trunk and redials the number after some time.
If the system does not detect ring back tone for time = Auto Redial RBT wait timer, it releases the trunk
and tries after some time.
If the system detects ring back tone, it gives ring on your extension. When you lift the handset, you get
connected with the desired party.
The system uses the same trunk type you used to make a call. If you dialed the number using trunk access
code 5, the system takes one of the free trunks from this group for Auto Redial. If you tried out the
number on a selected trunk, the system uses that particular trunk only.
Auto Redial will suspend if there is any activity (ringing or dialing) on your extension. It resumes as soon
as your extension becomes free.
Auto Redial does not work in following cases:
If the trunk lines do not support standard tones. (Frequency and timings are critical for auto redial to work).
Trunk condition is poor and various tones cannot be detected properly.
Called party lifts within 3 seconds after the ring starts on his phone.
Behind the Matrix PBX applications where Matrix trunks are connected to extension lines of some other
PBX which do not support standard tones.
On canceling Auto Redial the request made by your extension will only be cleared whereas, the request
made by other extension would be entertained.
Requests made by other extensions would be entertained.
Please refer the System Parameters Report to know the number of times Auto Redial has been executed by the
system.
Relevant Topic:
1. Class of Service(COS)
=X=X=
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 43
Team/Focus/Empire
Barge-In
Whats this?
When your message is urgent and you cannot wait for the called person to become free, you can land in his
conversation after intimating him.
While landing, you get music and the called person gets beeps.
During the beeps, the called person can dial Flash-1 to answer your call. In this case the third party is put
on hold and gets music and hence cannot listen to your conversation.
If the called person does not dial Flash-1 then speech is automatically established after time = Barge-In
timer.
Replace your handset once your talk is over. This will automatically restore his speech with the held-up party.
How to use it?
Example:
Extension 23 is busy. To give a very urgent message to him, dial 33 on busy tone.
How to program?
Barge-In is a programmable feature. Please refer class of service(COS) for details on how to permit Barge-In to a
user.
Timer of Relevance:
Barge-In timer-Time after which the speech is established.
Command: 217-12-Timer
Range: 01 to 99 seconds
Default: 05 seconds
Important Points:
Barge-In works even when the destination is talking on the trunk line.
Barge-In can work only if the destination is in speech.
Barge-In can also be done by keeping one party in hold. Suppose a trunk call is to be transferred to a busy
extension then you can keep the caller on hold and Barge-In the destination to inform him about his call.
This is most advantageous feature for the operator.
However, Barge-In will not work when the destination is in three-party mode or in dialing state or in
ringing state.
It will also not work if any extension is having call privacy from Barge-In.
It is not possible to Barge-In the operator console.
Relevant Topic:
1. Class of Service(COS)
=X=X=
1 Lift the handset. Dial tone
2 Dial number. Busy tone
3 Dial 33. Music. The destination gets beeps.
4
The system connects you to the destination after
5 seconds. Start talking after the music stops.
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 44
Team/Focus/Empire
Behind the PBX Applications
Whats this?
Many times, small and medium range PBX systems are connected behind some bigger PBX systems. Such
applications are used mainly to expand the existing capacity of the big PBX already in use. Extensions
coming from the big PBX are used as trunks of the small PBX. There could also be some PSTN trunks
coming directly on the smaller PBX. Such configurations are known as Behind the Matrix PBX Applications.
In such situations, it is not easy to implement toll control restrictions.
Consider a simple event
Extension 21 of PBX B in the figure above is not given long distance dialing facility. It has access to all the
trunks. Now when he wants to use T2 or T3, which are directly coming from PSTN, he dials 0. He gets
PSTN dial tone and dials the number.
But when he does similar procedure on T1, he gets error tone. Because, in this case when extension 21 grabs
T1 by dialing a code, he gets dial tone of PBX A. Now when he again dials 0 to grab PSTN dial tone, PBX
understands it to be a long distance call and since extension 21 is not allowed long distance calls, the system
rejects dialing on trunk and gives error tone to extension A.
Hence now if extension 21 of PBX B is to be allowed external dialing through T1, he should be given long
distance dialing access. If this is done then extension 21 may make long distance calls on T2 and T3.
PBX solves this problem by providing programmable PBX Expansion count for each trunk. This count is the
number of digits to be ignored before toll control check is begun. PBX Expansion count is same as the
number of PBXs connected between the main PBX and the last subscriber. In the figure shown, PBX
Expansion count of T1 should be kept 1 and for T2 and T3, it should be kept 0.
CAUTION
For all normal applications, keep this PBX Expansion count to 0 for all the trunks. Otherwise, outside
dialing may be hampered.
PBX supports PBX Expansion Count(PEC) for each trunk.
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 45
Team/Focus/Empire
How to program?
Use following command to program PBX Expansion count for a trunk:
54-Trunk -PEC Count
Trunk is from 0 to 9.
PEC Count is from 0 to 9
By default, PEC for all the trunks is 0.
Example:
To program PEC = 1 for trunk 1,
Dial 54-1-1.
=X=X=
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 46
Team/Focus/Empire
Boss Ring
Whats this?
This feature helps the user to identify the caller. A person in the organization having higher hierarchy can be
assigned this feature. Whenever a person having access to Boss Ring calls any other person in the
organization, the called extension rings differently. This helps the called party to identify the caller.
How to program?
Boss Ring can be allowed or denied to an extension user (programmable). When a station assigned a Class
of Service level greater then 6 (in default condition) makes a call, the called station gets the Boss Ring. Boss Ring is
Internal Fast Ring.
Relevant Topics:
1. Distinctive Rings
2. Class of Service (COS)
=X=X=
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 47
Team/Focus/Empire
Busy Hunting Group
Whats this?
In some applications, it is desirable that if the called extension is busy, the call should ring on the near by
extension instead of giving busy tone to the caller.
How to use it?
Desired extensions can be programmed in one group. If the called extension is busy then the call will be
diverted to next free extension in the group.
How to program?
Use following command to program an extension in a busy hunting group:
304-Extension-Busy Hunting Group
Where,
Extension is the flexible number assigned to the extension.
Busy Hunting Group is from 1 to 9
Use following command to program all extensions in a busy hunting group:
304-*-Busy Hunting Group
By default, no extension is programmed in either of the busy hunting group. If any extension is pro-
grammed with group value 0, that extension will not be included in any group.
Example 1:
To program extensions 202,206 and 208 in hunting group 1.
304-202-1
304-206-1
304-208-1
With this program, on calling 202 if 202 is busy then the call will be diverted to 206 and if 206 is also busy
then it will be diverted to 208.
Example 2:
Removed extension 206 from busy hunting group 1.
304-202-0
Important Points:
This facility may appear same as our feature Call Transfer- on busy but they are different. If the Call
Transfer-On Busy feature is used then calls can only be transferred to any other single extension and not
to a group of extensions. If this facility is used then chaining of Call Transfer-on busy gets enabled i.e.
the system hunts for free extension in the group you have programmed.
All extensions can be programmed in one group.
9 such groups (from group 1 to group 9) can be programmed.
This feature is applicable for only internal calls and not for incoming calls.
=X=X=
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 48
Team/Focus/Empire
Call Budget
Whats this?
The total cost of calls made by an extension can be controlled.
To elaborate: To prevent misuse of long distance calls, Matrix provides toll control programming
for day and night times. But, sometimes you cannot simply stop long distance call access for people who
need to make such calls as part of their job. It makes more sense to limit their bill to a certain fixed limit. It
is desirable that this limit is in terms of amount. The system allows the extension to make calls freely as
long as he does not cross his limit. Once he crosses his limit, his extension is locked by the system. This
facility is called call budget.
How to program?
Step 1: Activate/deactivate call budget on the extension using command 3021.
Step 2: Set the amount using command 3022.
Step 3: Set the Allowed-Denied List level for the extension, once it crosses the limit using command
3023.
Step 1
Use following command to activate/deactivate call budget on the extension:
3021-Extension-Code
Where,
Extension is the flexible number assigned to the extension.
Example:
To activate call budget on the extension 201, dial
3021-201-1
Step 2
Use following command to set the amount:
3022-Extension-Amount
Where,
Extension is the flexible number assigned to the extension.
Amount is can be set from 0001 to 9999. Amount can be in Dollars, Rupees etc.
Example:
Set call budget for extension 202 is $ 500, dial
3022-202-0500
Step 3
Use following command to set Allowed-Denied list level for the extension, once it crosses the call budget
limit:
3023-Extension-Allowed-Denied List Level
Where,
Extension is the flexible number assigned to the extension.
Allowed-Denied List Level is the level to be set to allow/deny calls after the call budget has exhausted.
Code Meaning
0 To deactivate call budget on the extension
1 To activated call budget on the extension
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 49
Team/Focus/Empire
Important Points:
Call Budget can be activated on selected extensions.
Each extension can be assigned different amount depending on the requirement.
The assigned budget is for one month.
If the budget is exceeded anytime during the month, the system locks the extension till month end. Once
locked, calls cannot be made from the extension depending on the lock level till 1
st
of the next month.
From 1
st
of the next month, the system allows calls from the extension.
The system allows set lock level for each extension. It is possible to bar only long distance call and allow
local calls from the extension that has exceeded its budget. Local and long distance calls both can be
barred, if desired.
Call Budget can also be used to limit local calls. Thus, it can also be set for extensions having local
facility only.
It is also possible to increase the budget amount before the amount is exceeded. Now new calls will be
allowed till fresh budget gets exhausted.
Call Budget facility is based on cost of each call. Hence the system must be programmed properly with
all CCC parameters and area codes. Errors in calculation of call cost can lead to malfunction of call
budget.
Call does not get disconnected if the budget gets exhausted during the call. However, the extension gets
locked thereafter.
By default, Call Budget is off for all extensions.
The Call Budget is not possible on operator console.
Relevant Topics:
1. Call Cost Calculation (CCC)
2. Allowed and Denied Lists
=X=X=
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 50
Team/Focus/Empire
Call Cost Calculation (CCC)
Whats this?
The system can calculate the actual cost for the calls made by the station.
How it works?
The total cost of a call depends on:
1. Destination number dialed i.e. local, long distance, international, etc.
2. The tariff applicable to the destination and
3. The duration of the call
Hence the system needs to be programmed for the destination number and the applicable tariff to get the actual cost
of the call.
Generally, the destination numbers are classified according to the area codes. Hence, the system should be
programmed with all the area codes and applicable tariff rate.
The tariff for different areas may be different. Thirty-two such tariffs can be programmed in the system. Each such
tariff is termed as tariff type. Each area is assigned a tariff type according to which the system calculates the cost of
the call. The Tariff is time based and time is calculated in terms of units. Hence a call duration is said to be 2 units,
10 units, 50 units, etc. Duration of unit is programmable for each tariff type. Further the service providers charge
differently for first unit and additional units. Hence the cost of unit for each tariff type is also programmable.
Two types of table viz. the tariff table and the area code table exists in the system.
Tariff table:
Tariff Type
Duration for
first unit
Cost of first unit
Duration for
additional unit
Cost for
additional unit
Area Code table:
Area Code Tariff Type
The system calculates the cost of a call using following two formulas:
For Call maturity type other than 12KHz/16Khz:
Total Cost of Call = [Cost of first unit + (Number of additional units x Cost for additional units)] + Service charge.
For Call maturity type equal to 12 KHz/16 KHz:
Total Cost of Call = (Unit charge x Total call units) + Service charge.
Hence, following parameters should be programmed in the system:
1. Tariff table
2. Area code table
3. Unit Charge
4. Service Charge
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 51
Team/Focus/Empire
The system also provides following facilities:
1. Different Service charges for local and long distance calls
2. Multiple service charges for local calls
3. Fixed or Variable service charge for long distance calls.
4. Additional unit for long distance call
How to program?
Step 1: Program the unit charge using command 2611.
Step 2: Program the service charge for local calls using command 2612.
Step 3: Program the multiple service charges for local calls using command 2662.
Step 4: Program the service charge for long distance calls using command 2613.
Step 5: Set fixed/variable service charge for long distance calls using command 2666.
Step 6: Program the percentage if variable service charge selected for long distance calls using command 2614.
Step 7: Enable/disable unit increment at the end of long distance call using command 2667.
Step 8: Program the duration and cost of first unit for a tariff type using command 2631.
Step 9: Program the duration and cost of additional unit for a tariff type using command 2632.
Step 10: Print the Tariff table using command 117-1.
Step 11: Program the tariff type for the area code using command 264.
Step 12: Clear an area code from the area code table using command 265
Step 13: Clear entire area code table suing command 260-SE password-Reverse SE password
Step 1
Use following command to program the unit charge (applicable only in case of 12 KHz/16 KHz metering):
2611-MM.NN
By default, unit charge is 1.10.
Example:
To program unit charge = 1.31, dial
2611-01.31
Step 2
Use following command to program the service charge for local calls:
2612-MM.NN
By default, Service Charge is 1.00.
Please note that the system considers all the calls made to numbers not starting with 0 as local calls.
Example:
To program service charge for the local calls = 2.00, dial
2612-0200
Step 3
Use following command to program multiple service charges for local calls:
2662-Code
Where,
Code Meaning
0 Single service charge for local calls
1 Multiple service charge for local calls
Example:
To program multiple service charge for local calls, dial
2662-1
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 52
Team/Focus/Empire
Please note that:
Multiple service charges can be charged if the call is made for more than one unit. Suppose a call is made for
duration equivalent to N units then the cost of the call will be (Cost of First unit) + (Additional units x Cost of
Additional unit) + N units x Service charge.
Step 4
Program the service charge for long distance calls: (calls starting with 0 or 00)
2613-MM.NN
By default, service charge for long distance calls is 2.00.
Please note that if long distance number does not start with 0 this is not effective.
Example:
To program service charge for long distance calls = 3.00, dial
2613-0300
Step 5
Use following command to set fixed/variable service charge for long distance calls:
2666-Code
Where,
Code Meaning
0 Fixed service charge for long distance calls
1 Variable service charge for long distance calls
Example:
Set variable service charge for long distance calls, dial
2666-1
Step 6
It is possible to charge service charges for long distance calls on basis of percentage.
Use following command to program service charge percentage for long distance calls:
2614-Percentage
Where,
Percentage is represented in two digits.
Example:
If you want to keep service charge for long distance calls equal to 5% of the total bill, dial
2614-05
Doing so, if net cost of the call is 100 then 5% of it i.e. 5 will be added to the net cost and total cost of the call will
now become 105.
Step 7
The Matrix PBXs provide a facility to increment one unit at the end of the call. This is helpful to the hotel customers
who wish to charge some extra amount per call from their guest.
Use following command to set one unit incremented/no unit incremented after end the call:
2667-Code
Where,
Code Meaning
0 No unit is incremented
1 One unit is incremented
By default, no unit is incremented.
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 53
Team/Focus/Empire
Example:
To increment one unit at the end of the call, dial
2667-1
Step 8 and Step 9
Number of units is derived from the tariff type and the duration of the call. System acquires the tariff type
from the tariff table and the duration from the in-built RTC.
Total units = First unit + Additional units.
Default tariff table is given below:
Tariff Type
Duration for
first unit
Cost of first unit
Duration for
additional unit
Cost for
additional unit
01 300.0 1.10 300.0 1.10
02 180.0 1.10 180.0 1.10
03 120.0 1.10 120.0 1.10
04 90.0 1.10 90.0 1.10
05 60.0 1.10 60.0 1.10
06 30.0 1.10 30.0 1.10
07 30.0 1.10 15.0 1.10
08 15.0 1.10 15.0 1.10
09 15.0 1.10 7.5 1.10
10 8.0 1.10 8.0 1.10
11 8.0 1.10 4.0 1.10
12 4.0 1.10 4.0 1.10
13 4.0 1.10 2.0 1.10
14 2.0 1.10 2.0 1.10
15 2.0 1.10 1.0 1.10
16 1.0 1.10 1.0 1.10
17 1.0 1.10 0.5 1.10
18 0.4 1.10 0.2 1.10
19 0.2 1.10 0.2 1.10
20 0.2 1.10 0.1 1.10
21 0.1 0.00 0.1 0.00
22 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.00
23 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.00
24 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.00
25 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.00
26 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.00
27 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.00
28 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.00
29 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.00
30 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.00
31 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.00
Use following command to program duration and cost of first unit:
2631-Tariff Type-Duration of First Unit-Cost of First Unit
Where,
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 54
Team/Focus/Empire
Tariff Type is in two digits from 00 to 31
Duration of First Unit is in XXX.X format (Maximum value 999.9)
Cost of First Unit is in MM.NN format (MM.NN could be Rupees-Paise, Dollar-Cent, Pound-Sterling, etc)
Use following command to program duration and cost of additional unit:
2632-Tariff Type-Duration of Additional Unit-Cost of Additional Unit
Where,
Tariff Type is in two digits from 00 to 31
Duration of Additional Unit is in XXX.X format (Maximum value 999.9)
Cost of Additional Unit is in MM.NN format (MM.NN could be Rupees-Paise, Dollar-Cent, Pound-Sterling, etc)
Step 10
Use following command to print the pulse rate table:
117-1
Step 11
Next important parameter in calculating the amount for a call is the destination where the call has been made. This
information is given to the system by programming the Area codes in the Area code table. To program Area codes,
there can be two methods:
1. To enter all the Area codes and corresponding tariff type so that whenever an Area code is dialed, the
system looks for it in the table and calculates the cost accordingly but it is a very laborious and time
consuming.
2. To make a group of Area codes having same tariff. The system will look for best possible fit and
yet calculate the cost efficiently. This method is used by this system.
How to enter Area codes in the area code table?
To program the Area code table, we need all the Area codes with applicable tariff. (This information can be obtained
from the Service Provider)
Sort the Area codes in increasing order. Write applicable tariff type against each Area code.
Select Area codes having common digits (1 or 2 ) and same tariff.
Select the group of Area codes and find out the minimum common digits.
Program the truncated common code with same tariff type.
Repeat this procedure to find out other Area code groups.
Left out Area codes must be entered individually.
Usually, the Area codes of places in the remote areas from your city can be compressed in one code.
Use following command to program Area code table with corresponding tariff type:
264-Area Code-Tariff Type-#/Flash
Where,
Area Code is the number string of maximum 7 digits.
Tariff Type is of 2 digits.
Step 12
Use following command to clear an Area code from the Area code table:
265-Area Code-#/Flash
Where,
Area Code is number string of maximum 7 digits.
It is advisable to delete entire Area code table before you being programming. Doing so will clear any
Irrelevant data present in the Area code table.
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 55
Team/Focus/Empire
Step 13
Use following command to clear entire Area code from the Area code table:
260-SE Password-Reverse SE Password
Where,
SE Password is number string of maximum 4 digits.
Reverse SE Password is number string of maximum 4 digits (For SE password 1234, the reverse password is
4321)
Examples
Example 1:
To enter code of Alaska (907)with pulse rate code 06, dial
264-907-06-#
To clear code of Alaska(907)from the Area Code table, dial
265-907-#
To clear entire Area code table, dial
260-1234-4321 (Password is assumed to be 1234)
Example 2:
Assume that you come across following entries in the sorted out Area codes:
Are a code
Duration for
Firs t Unit
Cos t of Firs t
Unit
Duration for Each
Additional Unit
Cos t of Each
Additional Unit
Tariff Type
331 1.0 1.10 0.5 1.10 16
332 1.0 1.10 0.5 1.10 16
336 1.0 1.10 0.5 1.10 16
337 1.0 1.10 0.5 1.10 16
Please note that all the above codes have same tariff type; hence it is possible to compress them to one code. The
code would be 33, since the third digit is varying. Now from the default Normal tariff typeate table, it is apparent
that the pulse rate type for this pulse rate is 16.
Hence now to enter this data in the Area code table, dial
264-33-16-#
Example 3:
Assume that you come across following entries in sorted Area codes.
Area code
Duration for
First Unit
Cost of First
Unit
Duration for Each
Additional Unit
Cost of Each
Additional Unit
Tariff Type
303 1.0 1.10 0.5 1.10 03
317 1.0 1.10 0.5 1.10 03
331 1.0 1.10 0.5 1.10 06
332 30.0 1.10 15.0 1.10 06
336 30.0 1.10 15.0 1.10 06
337 30.0 1.10 15.0 1.10 06
401 1.0 1.10 1.0 1.10 15
402 1.0 1.10 1.0 1.10 15
452 1.0 1.10 1.0 1.10 15
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 56
Team/Focus/Empire
Please note that all the above codes do not have same tariff types; hence it is not possible to compress all of them to
one code. However, these could be compressed as follows:
Dial 264-33-06-#
Dial 264-317-03-#
Dial 264-303-03-#
Dial 264-4-15-#
Use following command to print the Area code table:
117-2
Important Points:
At the time of calculating cost of any call, the system performs three steps:
Search for the best fitting Area code
Get tariff from the tariff type given against the Area code.
Calculate the cost of call using the applicable tariff.
Maximum 500 Area codes with tariff type can be stored in the area code table.
This table is retained even during power failure.
It is possible to print this table on the printer or on the computer.
If the dialed number string does not match with the number strings stored in the Area code table then by
default, tariff type 00 is taken for local calls, tariff type is taken for long distance calls starting with 0 and
tariff 11 is taken for long distance calls starting with 00. Such calls are identified by ? in the remarks
column in all the SMDR reports.
In case the dialed number contains a Area code which is not matching with any entry, this call is indicated
by ? in the remark column in all SMDR reports.
While programming if there are more than one entry for the same Area code, the earlier entry is not
deleted from the table. You have to give the command once again to delete other entries with the same
Area code.
Please refer the System Parameters Report to know the programmed values for CCC parameters.
The cost calculation is done at the time of printing of reports.
Please note in the reports attached, the word Pulse Rate Type is a synonym for Tariff Type and the
word Pulse Rate is a synonym for Duration. The unit charge mentioned for 16 Khz metering is
applicable for 12Khz metering also.
Relevant Topics:
1. SMDR
2. Maturity
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 57
Team/Focus/Empire
COST CALCULATION PARAMETERS AS ON 06-10-04(Wed) AT 15:01

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Pulse : First Unit : Additional Units
Rate :------------------------------:----------------------------------
Type : Pulse Rate Cost : Pulse Rate Cost
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
00 : 300.0 1.10 : 300.0 1.10
01 : 180.0 1.10 : 180.0 1.10
02 : 120.0 1.10 : 120.0 1.10
03 : 90.0 1.10 : 90.0 1.10
04 : 60.0 1.10 : 60.0 1.10
05 : 30.0 1.10 : 30.0 1.10
06 : 30.0 1.10 : 15.0 1.10
07 : 15.0 1.10 : 15.0 1.10
08 : 15.0 1.10 : 7.5 1.10
09 : 8.0 1.10 : 8.0 1.10
10 : 8.0 1.10 : 4.0 1.10
11 : 4.0 1.10 : 4.0 1.10
12 : 4.0 1.10 : 2.0 1.10
13 : 2.0 1.10 : 2.0 1.10
14 : 2.0 1.10 : 1.0 1.10
15 : 1.0 1.10 : 1.0 1.10
16 : 1.0 1.10 : 0.5 1.10
17 : 0.4 1.10 : 0.2 1.10
18 : 0.2 1.10 : 0.2 1.10
19 : 0.2 1.10 : 0.1 1.10
20 : 0.1 1.10 : 0.1 1.10
21 : 0.0 0.00 : 0.0 0.00
22 : 0.0 0.00 : 0.0 0.00
23 : 0.0 0.00 : 0.0 0.00
24 : 0.0 0.00 : 0.0 0.00
25 : 0.0 0.00 : 0.0 0.00
26 : 0.0 0.00 : 0.0 0.00
27 : 0.0 0.00 : 0.0 0.00
28 : 0.0 0.00 : 0.0 0.00
29 : 0.0 0.00 : 0.0 0.00
30 : 0.0 0.00 : 0.0 0.00
31 : 0.0 0.00 : 0.0 0.00
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Fixed Charges :-
16khz-Call Unit Charge 1.10
Local-Call Service Charge 1.00
LongDist-Call Service Charge 2.00
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
MATRIX TEAM Ver: 7R9 (US)
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 58
Team/Focus/Empire
=X=X=
AREA CODE TABLE AS ON 06-10-04(Wed) AT 15:01

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
SR. CODE PULSE RATE TYPE SR. CODE PULSE RATE TYPE
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------











--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
MATRIX TEAM Ver: 7R9 (US) Page: 01
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 59
Team/Focus/Empire
Call Duration Control
Whats this?
Call Duration Control (CDC) helps the customer to restrict the duration of the calls whether, incoming or
outgoing external calls. This feature disconnects incoming or outgoing external calls after a set time. People
tend to talk about sports, movies, politics and such other subjects over telephone. Now, these topics are
generally not related to business. Moreover, such topics tend to take more time than the business talk for
which the call was originally made. If duration of each call can be restricted, people will talk to the point and
not drift to other unproductive talk. There are many advantages:
Reduction in telephone bills.
Trunks will be easily available for other outgoing calls. More business calls can be made during working
hours leading to more business.
Your trunks remain free for incoming calls. More customers can call.
People spend more time on the actual job on hand rather than on telephone. This means increased
productivity.
Call Duration Control can be set for each extension line.
Call Duration Control for Outgoing calls can be enabled/disabled for local calls, long distance calls and
incoming calls separately.
How it works?
1. Local calls, long distance calls and incoming calls can be disconnected at set times.
2. Local calls, long distance calls and incoming calls can be disconnected for different timings separately.
3. If CDC is activated, then system gives warning beeps after time = CDC warn timer. After the warning
tone, the system waits for time = CDC good-bye timer before releasing the connection forcefully.
4. CDC can be activated on selected extension lines.
5. CDC can be activated for either day, or night, or both.
6. In case of transferred call, the CDC timer gets reset and starts again a fresh on the transferred extension line.
7. It is also possible to just warn the user without disconnecting his call. In this case, the user gets the beeps
after the programmed time but his call does not get disconnected.
8. If Barge-in/Raid feature is used on an extension line on which CDC is activated then the time for which Barge-
In/Raid was done will not be counted.
9. CDC does not work for Operator Console.
How to program?
Step 1: Enable/disable CDC for local calls using command 3331.
Step 2: Enable/disable CDC for long distance calls using command 3332.
Step 3: Enable/disable CDC for incoming calls using command 3333.
Step 4: Enable/disable CDC warning beeps without disconnection using command 3334.
Step 5: Set various timers for CDC.
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 60
Team/Focus/Empire
Step 1
Use following command to enable/disable CDC for local calls:
3331-Extension-Day Time-Night Time
Where,
Extension is the flexible number assigned to the extension.
Use following command to enable/disable CDC for Local calls for all extensions:
3331-*-Day Time-Night Time
By default, CDC for local calls is disabled during day time and night time.
Step 2
Use following command to enable/disable CDC for long distance calls:
3332-Extension-Day Time-Night Time
Where,
Extension is the flexible number assigned to the extension.
Use following command to enable/disable CDC for long distance calls for all extensions:
3332-*-Day Time-Night Time
By default, CDC for long distance calls disabled during day time and night time.
Step 3
Use following command to enable/disable CDC for incoming calls:
3333-Extension-Day Time-Night Time
Where,
Extension is the flexible number assigned to the extension.
Day Time Meaning
0 CDC is disabled during daytime
1 CDC is enabled during daytime
Night Time Meaning
0 CDC is disabled during nighttime
1 CDC is enabled during nighttime
Night Time Meaning
0 CDC is disabled during nighttime
1 CDC is enabled during nighttime
Day Time Meaning
0 CDC is disabled during daytime
1 CDC is enabled during daytime
Day Time Meaning
0 CDC is disabled during daytime
1 CDC is enabled during daytime
Night Time Meaning
0 CDC is disabled during nighttime
1 CDC is enabled during nighttime
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 61
Team/Focus/Empire
Use following command to enable/disable CDC for incoming calls for all extensions:
3333-*-Day Time-Night Time
By default, CDC for incoming calls is disabled during day time and night time.
Step 4
Use following command to enable/disable CDC warning beeps without disconnection:
3334-Extension-Day Time-Night Time
Where,
Extension is the flexible number assigned to the extension.
Use following command to enable/disable CDC warning beeps without disconnection:
3334-*-Day Time-Night Time
By default, CDC warning beeps are enabled during day time and night time.
Step 5
Timers of Relevance:
Disconnection time should be programmed for different call types using following table:
Examples:
Program CDC for incoming calls on extension 23 during daytime for 4 minutes. The system should give me
beep after 3 minutes.
Use following commands:
3333-23-1-0
217-28-3
217-29-60
Program CDC for long distance calls on extension 21 during nighttime for 5 minutes. The system should
give me beep after 4 minutes.
Use following commands:
3332-21-0-1
217-27-4
217-29-60
Command Description Range Default Unit
217-26-Timer CDC local warn timer 001-255 4 Min
217-27-Timer CDC STD warn timer 001-255 4 Min
217-28-Timer CDC incoming warn timer 001-255 4 Min
217-29-Timer CDC good-bye timer 01-99 20 Sec
Night Time Meaning
0 CDC is disabled during nighttime
1 CDC is enabled during nighttime
Day Time Meaning
0 CDC is disabled during daytime
1 CDC is enabled during daytime
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 62
Team/Focus/Empire
Important Topics:
Local calls, long distance calls and incoming calls can be disconnected at set times.
Local calls, long distance calls and incoming calls can be disconnected for different timings separately.
If CDC is activated, then system gives warning beeps after time = CDC warn timer. After the warning
tone, the system waits for time = CDC good-bye timer before releasing the connection forcefully.
CDC can be activated on selected extension lines.
CDC can be activated for either day, or night, or both.
In case of transferred call, the CDC timer gets reset and starts again afresh on the transferred extension line.
It is also possible to just warn the user without disconnecting his call. In this case, the user gets the beeps
after the programmed time but his call does not get disconnected.
If Barge-in/Raid feature is used on an extension line on which CDC is activated then the time for which barge-
in was done will not be counted.
CDC does not work for Operator Console.
=X=X=
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 63
Team/Focus/Empire
Call Follow-Me
Whats this?
Suppose you went to your co-workers place and you want that all the calls coming on your extension
should now come to your co-workers extension then you can use this feature.
The extension dial tone changes to feature tone if its calls are forwarded.
How to use it?
Example:
My extension number is 23. My User password is 1212. Right now I am at extension 21. I want that all my
calls on 23 come to extension 21.
Dial 132-23-1212 from extension 21.
Cancel Call Follow-Me
How to program?
Call Follow-Me is a programmable feature. Please refer class of service(COS) for details on how to allow
Call Follow-Me to a user.
Important Points:
My extension is say 21. I am sitting at extension 22. I have enabled this feature and I am attending all my
calls on extension 22. The person of extension 22 is sitting at extension 23, now if he too enables this
features from extension 23 then my request will be canceled and my calls will land on extension 21 only
whereas the calls of extension 23 will land on extension 23.
My extension is 21. I was sitting at extension 22 for last ten minutes. Now I am going to extension 23. To
receive my calls of extension 21 at extension 23, I should dial 130 from extension 22, go to extension 23
and again dial 132-21-User password from 23 to receive all the calls of 21 at 23. If I dial 132-22-User
Password on 21 as it is. This is so because chaining of call follow me is not allowed.
Relevant Topics:
1. User Security (User Password)
2. Class of Service(COS)
=X=X=
1 Lift the handset. Dial tone
2 Dial 130. Confirmation tone
1 Lift the handset. Dial tone
2 Dial 132-Extension-User Password. Confirmation tone
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 64
Team/Focus/Empire
Call Forward
Whats this?
In an organization people might move from one place to another to accomplish a job. They do not sit at fixed
places. A user might go to his colleagues desk to work on a project they are doing jointly. A manager might
go on the production floor or remain in conference room for few hours. In such situations, a user cannot
afford to miss his calls. He would like to attend his calls from his new location. To fulfill this requirement,
the Matrix PBX offers a facility called Call Forward. The calls can be forwarded to another stations or the VMS
port.
Call Forward is also interpreted as Do Not Disturb or Executive/Secretary feature.
Access to Call Forward is programmable and hence can be allowed or denied to a user. Please refer topic
Class Of Service(COS) for details on how to enable this feature on a particular extension line.
The Matrix PBX offers three types of Call Forward:
Call Forward - All Calls
Call Forward - If Busy
Call Forward - If No Reply
Call Forward-All Calls
You can use this feature when you are not available on your place for some time and you wish to divert all
your calls on some other extension.
Whenever you wish privacy or want to attend to uninterrupted discussion or thinking, you can use this
feature. Once invoked, all calls on your extension will go to the extension where the calls are forwarded.
How to use it?
To forward all calls to VMS dial 131-VMS Extension.
Example:
My extension is 23. I am busy in meeting. I want my calls to go to extension 24, dial 131-24.
Call Forward - If Busy
This feature is useful for a group of people performing same type of job. In such a case you can divert
your calls to your colleague while you are already busy over phone.
The external calls can only intimate you by giving beeps but they wont be transferred to the specified
extension.
How to use it?
To forward calls when the stations is busy to the VMS. Dial 134-VMS Station.
Example:
My extension is 23. I am busy over phone most of the times. To forward all my calls to extension 24 in such
condition, dial 134-24.
1 Lift the handset. Dial tone
2 Dial 131-Extension. Confirmation tone
1 Lift the handset. Dial tone
2 Dial 134-Extension. Confirmation tone
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 65
Team/Focus/Empire
Call Forward - If No Reply
The system diverts the call to some other extension if the destination does not answer the ring in time =
Ring Back Timer: transfer on no-reply.
You and your colleague can use this feature. In your absence, the caller automatically gets diverted to
your colleague who can take messages for you.
How to use it?
To forward the calls on no reply to the VMS dial 133-VMS Extension.
Example:
I have two extensions, 23 and 25. I am busy over extension 23 and the call lands on extension 25 at that time only. I
want that if my existing call gets finished in some time, I can attend the call on extension 25 but if could not attend the
call then it should be diverted to extension 24 after some time. To forward the call to extension 24 but only after few
rings, dial 133-24 from extension 25.
Timer of Relevance:
Ring Back Timer: Transfer on No Reply-Time after which the call gets forwarded.
Command: 217-19-Timer
Range: 01 to 99 seconds
Default: 20 seconds
Cancel Call Forward (all calls/if busy/if no reply)
How to program?
Call Forward is a programmable feature. Please refer class of service(COS) for details on how to allow Call
Forward to a user.
Important Point:
Only one type of call forward features viz. Call Forward if busy, Call forward if no reply etc. can be
enabled at one point of time.
Relevant Topic:
1. Class of Service(COS)
=X=X=
1 Lift the handset. Dial tone
2 Dial 133-Extension. Confirmation tone
1 Lift the handset. Dial tone
2 Dial 130. Confirmation tone
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 66
Team/Focus/Empire
Call Park
Whats this?
You can park the current call and attend to another call.
While a call is parked, you may use other system features like Call Pick-Up, Call Follow-Me, attending a
call ringing on other extension without losing current call. While the call is parked the parked party gets
the music.
If you dont retrieve the call within time equal to call park timer, the call comes back to you automatically.
Your extension starts ringing. In case you are in conversation, system gives beeps to remind you of the
parked call.
How to use it?
To retrieve the parked call:
Example:
My extension is 23. While talking with one party, I got external call waiting tone (double beeps). To attend
the waiting call; I should park the present call. When my talk is completed with this call, I want to retrieve
the parked call. To do this, I should
Dial Flash-7: When I am in speech with first party.
Dial Flash-1: To attend second party.
Disconnect : On completion of talk with party 2.
Dial 17 : To retrieve the parked call.
How to program?
Call Park is a programmable feature. Please refer class of service(COS) for details on how to allow Call Park
to a user.
Timer of Relevance:
Call Park Timer-Time for which the call gets parked.
Command: 211-Timer
Range: 01 to 99 seconds.
Default : 30 seconds.
Important Point:
Once the call is parked, it remains parked for time=Call Park Timer.
Relevant Topics:
1. Class of Service(COS)
2. System Parameters
=X=X=
1 Spee ch with trunk (or sta tion).
2 Dia l Fla sh. Fe ature tone
3 Dia l 7 . Call P a rke d.
1 Lift the handset. Dial tone
2 Dial 17. Speech.
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 67
Team/Focus/Empire
Call Pick Up
Whats this?
You can answer calls of your colleague or co-worker without physically going to his extension. You can use
this feature to answer even trunk calls ringing on other extensions. The Matrix PBX offers two types of call
pick up facility viz. Call Pick UpGroup and Call Pick UpSelective.
Call Pick Up-Group
Calls of any extension within your group can be answered simply by dialing `4 after lifting the handset.
Maximum 10 call pick up groups can be formed.
In case more extensions are ringing, the extension with the least port number will be picked up first.
This feature can be used when people performing same job sit in groups and intragroup call pick up is to
be allowed whereas inter group call pick up is to be restricted.
How to use it?
Call Pick Up-Selective
Call of any ringing extension can be answered by dialing 12-Extension after lifting the handset.
This is useful when more than one extensions are ringing and you want to answer one of them selectively.
For selective call pick up, it is not necessary for the extension to be in the same pick up group.
How to use it?
How to program?
Call Pick up-Group
Step 1: Decide number of call pick-up groups to be formed.
Step 2: Program the extension in call pick-up group using command 301.
Step 3: Assign a Class of Service group with call pick-up feature enabled.
Step 1
Decide the number of call pick-up groups to be formed.
Step 2
Use following command to program an extension in call pick-up group:
301-Extension-Call Pick-Up Group
Where,
Extension is the flexible number assigned to the extension.
Call pick-up group is from 0 to 9
Use following command to program all extensions in same call
pick-up group:
301-*-Call Pick-Up Group
By default, all extensions are in the same group (Call pick-up group 0).
1 Lift the handset. Dial tone
2 Dial 4. Speech.
1 Lift the handset. Dial tone
2 Dial 12-Extension. Speech.
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 68
Team/Focus/Empire
Step 3
Call Pick up is a programmable feature. Please refer Class of Service for details on how to permit Call Pick-Up
feature to the user.
Important Point:
Alarm ring and Auto Call Back ring cannot be picked up from any other extension.
Relevant Topic:
1. Class of Service(COS)
=X=X=
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 69
Team/Focus/Empire
Call Progress Tones
The Matrix PBX gives various tones in different situations. This is how the Matrix PBX responds to dialing of codes
and commands.
Dial Tone
When you lift the handset you get dial tone. Dial tone stays for 7 seconds. This Dial Tone Timer is
programmable. After that error tone starts.
Sound: Toooooooooooo
Use following command to program the Dial Tone Timer:
217-00-Timer
Where,
Timer is from 01 to 99 seconds
By default, Dial tone timer is 07 seconds.
Ring Back Tone
When you dial internal number and if that number is free, you will get the ring back tone. The ring back tone
continues for 45 seconds. This Ring Back Tone Timer is programmable.
Sound: Turroo... Turrroo
Use following command to program the Ring Back Tone Timer:
217-01-Timer
Where,
Timer is from 01 to 99 seconds
By default, Ring back tone timer is 45 seconds.
Busy Tone (Engage Tone)
High pitch beeps with equal on and off periods. When you dial any extension that is busy, you get busy tone.
Busy tone continues for 5 seconds. This timer is programmable.
Sound: Tooooooo.........Toooooooo
Use following command to program the Busy Tone timer:
217-02-Timer
Where,
Timer is from 01 to 99 seconds
By default, Busy tone timer is 05 seconds.
Error Tone
The Error Tone is made of fast beeps. When you perform some wrong operation or try using a feature
without access, you get error tone.
Sound: TooTooTooToo
Internal Call Waiting Tone
Short beep followed by longer off duration repeated every second. This is also known as intrusion tone. Busy
user gets this tone over his speech when some other extension attempts interrupt request/barge-in.
Sound: Beep.Beep
This tone continue for interrupt request timer or barge-in timer.
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 70
Team/Focus/Empire
External Call Waiting Tone
This tone is of two ticks followed by a longer off time of approximately 3 seconds. Busy programmed
destination extension gets this tone when there is a fresh central office call.
Sound: Beep...Beep....Beep...Beep
This tone continues for transfer-On busy timer.
Feature Tone
Short beep followed by a longer off duration repeated every second. The feature tone is given to the user
when he has one party as held party and tires to access a feature same time as dial tone. By default, feature
tone remains for 7 seconds.
Sound: Beep................. Beep
Feature Confirmation Tone
This tone is continuous, fast beeps. The Matrix PBX confirms successful usage of features with this tone.
The confirmation tone remains for 7 seconds. This is called Feature Confirmation Tone Timer and is
programmable.
Sound: Beep... Beep... Beep
Use following command to program the Feature Confirmation Tone Timer:
217-04-Timer
Where,
Timer is from 01 to 99 seconds
By default, Feature confirmation tone timer is 05 seconds.
Programming Tone
Short beeps followed by a longer off duration repeated every second. It is exactly same as the feature tone.
The Matrix PBX prompts you to enter fresh commands during programming with this tone. The system waits
for this time before programming tone changes to error tone.
Use following command to program Programming Tone Timer:
217-05-Timer
Where,
Timer is from 01 to 99 seconds
By default, Programming tone timer is 15 seconds.
Programming Error Tone
This tone is exactly same as the Error Tone. This tone is given when some wrong programming command is
dialed. This tone remains for 3 seconds. This Programming Error Tone timer is programmable.
Sound: TooTooTooToo
Use following command to program the Programming Error Tone Timer:
217-06-Timer
Where,
Timer is from 01 to 99 seconds
By default, Programming error tone timer is 03 seconds.
Programming Confirmation Tone
This is exactly same as the feature confirmation tone. This tone is continuous, fast beeps. During
programming, this tone indicates that valid command is received by the system and it has taken necessary
action. This tone remains for 3 seconds. This is called Programming Confirmation Tone Timer and is
programmable.
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 71
Team/Focus/Empire
Sound: Beep... Beep... Beep
Use following command to program the Programming Confirmation Tone Timer:
217-07-Timer
Where,
Timer is from 01 to 99 seconds
By default, Programming confirmation tone timer is 02 seconds.
Tone Specifications
Name Frequency Cadence (milli seconds)
Dial Tone 400Hz Continuous
Ring Back Tone 400Hz 500ms on, 250ms off, 500ms on, 2750ms off
Busy Tone 400Hz 500ms on, 500ms off
Error Tone 400Hz 250ms on, 250ms off
Internal Call Waiting Tone 400Hz 67ms on, 3933ms off
Trunk Call Waiting Tone 400Hz 67ms on, 67ms off, 67ms on, 3799ms off
Feature Confirmation Tone 400Hz 33ms on, 33ms off
Programming Tone/Feature Tone 400Hz 100ms on, 900ms off
Programming Confirmation tone 400Hz 33ms on, 33ms off
Programming Error tone 400Hz 250ms on, 250ms off
Shuttered Dial Tone 400Hz 16ms on, 16ms off
Matrix PBX provides the facility to demonstrate all these tones. Following commands can be used to hear
these tones (Command should be given from the SE/SA mode)
Sr. Tone Command
1 Dial tone 161-1
2 Ring back tone 161-2
3 Busy tone 161-3
4 Error tone/Programming Error Tone 161-4
5 Feature confirmation tone/Programming confirmation tone 161-5
6 Programming tone/Feature tone 161-6
7 Internal call waiting tone 161-7
8 Trunk call waiting tone 161-8
9 Shuttered dial tone 161-9
10 Music 161-0
Timer of Relevance:
Demonstration Tone Timer-This time specifies the duration to demonstrate tones.
Command: 217-18-Timer
Range: 01 to 99 seconds
Default: 20 seconds
Demonstration of Internal call waiting tone and Trunk call waiting tone is given only in Empire.
=X=X=
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 72
Team/Focus/Empire
Call Splitting
Whats this?
This feature enables you to talk to two persons alternately. This is used when you are in speech and you are
interrupted by an external or internal call.
Call Splitting is also known as Hold-Consult or Hold-Toggle.
How to use it?
Call Splitting can be used in any of the following three combinations:
1. Two extensions
2. One extension and one trunk
3. Two trunks
Call Splitting between two Extensions
Call Splitting between a Extension and a Trunk
Call Splitting between two Trunks
How to program?
Call Splitting is a programmable feature. Please refer class of service(COS) for details on how to allow Call
Splitting to a user.
Important Points:
Only one of the two persons will be in conversation with you at a time. The third person is on hold. He
gets music and cannot hear your conversation.
When in speech with a extension and on getting external call waiting tone, you can dial Flash-1 to answer the
trunk call. The extension is put on hold and gets music. Now, you can split between the two persons.
Interrupting extension can also be answered very much in the same way as described above. Your current
call is put on hold and speech with the interrupting extension is established. Once again, you can toggle between
the two persons.
1 Speech with extension.
2 Dial Flash. Feature tone. Called extension goes on Hold.
3 Dial another Extension. Ring Back Tone
4 Speech with the extension when the call is answered.
5 Dial Flash-1. Speech with held party.
1 Speech with trunk.
2 Dial Flash. Feature tone. External party goes on Hold.
3 Dial Extension. Ring Back Tone
4 Speech with the extension when the call is answered.
5 Dial Flash-1. Speech with held party.
1 Speech with trunk.
2 Dial Flash. Feature tone. Trunk goes on Hold.
3 Dial 6. Silence.
4 Dial 9 or 5 or 8-Trunk. Trunk dial tone
5 Dial Telephone Number. Ring Back Tone
6 Speech with called party when the call is answered.
7 Dial Flash-1. Speech with held party.
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 73
Team/Focus/Empire
You can transfer the active person (one who is in conversation with you) to any other extension.
You can park the current party.
Conference can be invoked to include both the parties by dialing Flash-9.
An extension user having access to Call Hold can only do call splitting.
Relevant Topics:
1. Conference
2. Call Transfer
3. Call Park
4. Class Of Service (COS)
=X=X=
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 74
Team/Focus/Empire
Call Transfer
Whats this?
The Matrix PBX offers four types of call transfer:
Call Transfer-On Busy
Call Transfer-Screened
Call Transfer-Trunk to Trunk
Call Transfer-While ringing
Call Transfer-Screened
This is normal call transfer and the most widely used.
Operators can use this method to transfer incoming calls.
How to use it?
Call Transfer-While Ringing
Transfer a call without waiting for the destination to answer.
An operator can use this feature when there are other calls pending and she cannot wait for the station to
respond to intimate the call.
This is also known as Wait For Ring Transfer.
If the called station does not respond to the ring within 45 seconds, the call comes back to the station that
transferred the call. This is same as Ring back tone timer.
If the station that transferred the call is free at the time of call return, caller gets triple ring.
If the station that transferred the call is busy at the time of call return and if it was an internal call transfer
then the caller gets error tone.
If the station that transferred the call is busy at the time of call return and if it was a trunk call transfer then
the system gives beeps to the station who transferred the call [provided privacy against beeps is not
enabled].
How to use it?
Call Transfer-On Busy
Transfer a call on a station already in speech with some other person.
Operators can transfer calls without even checking for the status of the destination station.
This is also known as Blind Transfer.
The busy destination station gets intrusion tone. He can speak to the calling person by dialing Flash/
Flash-1
A call can be transferred on busy station only if it is not programmed with call privacy from trunk call.
If the called station does not respond to the intrusion tone within 30 seconds, the call comes back to the
station that transferred the call.
1 Speech with trunk.
2 Dial Flash. Feature tone
3 Dial Extension. Ring Back Tone
4 Wait for the extension to answer. Speech when ring answered.
5 Put down the handset. Call is transferred.
1 Speech calling or called party.
2 Dial Flash. Feature tone
3 Dial Extension. Ring Back Tone
4 Put the handset.
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 75
Team/Focus/Empire
If the busy extension is in the busy hunting group then the call will be transferred to the next free extension in the
group.
If the station that transferred the call is free at the time of call return, caller gets triple ring.
How to use it?
Call Transfer-Trunk-to-Trunk
An external call can be transferred on another trunk line.
The operator need not remain in speech. Two external persons can speak through the Matrix PBX.
In case a colleague has not come to the office, his incoming calls can be transferred on his residences
phone line or on his mobile.
In case a remote colleague is not having long distance or international dialing facility from his present
location. He can dial his office and request the operator to connect him to the desired number.
A warning tone is given after DOSA inactivity timer. To extend the call, either of the person has to dial a
digit in tone (DTMF) except #. Dialing of # terminates the call and both the trunks get released.
How to use it?
How to program?
Call Transfer is a programmable feature. Please refer class of service(COS) for details on how to permit Call
Transfer to a user.
Single/Double Ring on Trunk Call Transfer
The Matrix PBX can be programmed to give single/double ring on trunk call transferred on another
extension.
Use following command to set single/double ring:
157-1 : Single ring on trunk call transfer.
157-0 : Double ring on trunk call transfer.
Important Points:
Internal station calls can also be transferred to some other station.
While waiting for the station to answer, you can abandon the transfer by dialing Flash. The ring on the
station is stopped and you get connected to the person on hold.
Relevant Topics:
1. Class Of Service (COS)
2. Privacy
3. Conference
4. Direct Outward System Access (DOSA)
=X=X=
1 3-way mode as described in call splitting.
2 Dial Flash. Feature tone
3 Dial 8. Extension disconnects, Trunk 1 and Trunk 2 remain in speech.
1 Speech with trunk.
2 Dial Flash. Feature tone
3 Dial Extension. Busy tone
4 Put the handset. Call will be transferred on the busy extension and it will get intrusion tone.
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 76
Team/Focus/Empire
Cancel Extension Features
Whats this?
Feature like Alarms, Auto Call Back, Call Follow-Me, Call Forward, Hot Line, Hot Outward Dialing and
Walk in Class of Service can be cancelled from the extension.
There is separate cancellation code for each feature except walk in class of service but this is a master
command to cancel all the features with a single command.
How to use it?
How to program?
The features set on an extension can also be cleared from programming mode.
Use following command to clear all the features on a extension:
343-Extension
Where,
Extension is the flexible number assigned to the extension.
Following features of the extension are cleared:
Alarm
Auto Call Back
Call Forward /Follow me
Hot-outward dialing
Hot line
Walk-in class of service
Example:
Clear all the features on extension 25, dial
343-25
=X=X=
1 Lift handset. Dial tone
2 Dial 100. Confirmation tone
3 Replace the handset.
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 77
Team/Focus/Empire
Class Of Service (COS)
Whats this?
From the viewpoint of utilizing the features of the Matrix PBX, all users in an organization are not equal. Some users
are important and their time is more valuable. Further, their nature of job also differs. Keeping this diversity in mind,
it is imperative that the features they need from a system differ from person to person.
The feature requirements can also vary from time to time. For example, the features required during day time and
during night time need not be the same.
It is the systems responsibility to allow or deny a feature access to a user depending on his needs. The system
should support flexible allocation of features to different users. This accessibility of different features for a user is
known as his Class Of Service(COS).
How it works?
PBX supports very flexible COS programming. Each user can be assigned different COS depending on his and the
organizations needs. All the features supported by the system are presented in form of a list.
Each feature in the list is identified with a 2-digits number (Feature Index).
Following table lists all the features with feature Index to be used during programming:
Relevant features from this list can be selected and put in a group. One can make few feature access groups
depending upon the requirement. First group contains none of the features. Second group contain only internal
dialing. Third group contain very common features like Call Pick Up, Call Transfer, Internal Dialing etc. Fourth group
contain more advanced features and so on. Once programmed, COS groups may look like:
Feature Name Feature Index
Internal Dialing 00
Call Hold + Call Park 01
Call Transfer 02
Conference 03
Call Pick Up 04
Hot Outward Dialing 05
Dynamic Lock 06
Alarm 07
Call Forward 08
Call Follow Me 09
Auto Call Back 10
Interrupt Request + Barge-In 11
Raid 12
Trunk Reservation + Continued Dialing 13
Auto Redial - Low Priority 14
Auto Redial - High Priority 15
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 78
Team/Focus/Empire
By default, in all the 10 COS groups a set of features is allowed based on common requirement. Default COS
groups chart is attached herewith:
Now, these groups can be allocated to the users depending upon the hierarchy of the user in the organization. A user
can be assigned different COS groups for day time and night time. Once these groups are assigned to the users, the
users COS table looks like:
Following points are relevant:
Maximum 10 feature groups can be formed (0-9)
Each feature can be enabled or disabled in each group
Group 2 is the default COS group
How to program?
Step 1: Decide the number of COS groups to be used.
Step 2: Prepare a list of the features required in each COS group and program it using command 250.
Step 3: Assign COS group to a extension during daytime/nighttime using command 31.
Step 1
Take a pen and a paper and decide the number of groups to be formed and what all features are to be enabled in
each group.
Group 00 01 02 03 04 13 14 15
0 N N N N N N N N
1 N N Y Y N N Y N
2 Y N N Y Y Y Y Y
3 N N N Y Y N N N
4 Y Y Y N Y N Y N
5 Y Y Y N Y Y Y N
6 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
7 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
8 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
9 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
Group 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
0 N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N
1 Y N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N
2 Y Y Y N Y N N N N N Y N N N Y N
3 Y Y Y N Y Y Y N N N Y N N N Y N
4 Y Y Y N Y Y Y Y N N Y N N N Y N
5 Y Y Y N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N Y N
6 Y Y Y N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N Y N
7 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N Y Y Y
8 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
9 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
Station number COS group for
Day Time
COS group for
Night time
21 7 1
22 6 4
23 4 4
24 3 3



Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 79
Team/Focus/Empire
Step 2
Use following command to enable/disable a feature in a COS group:
250-COS Group-Feature Index-Code
Where,
COS Group is from 0 to 9
Feature Index is from 00 to 15
Step 3
Use following command to assign a COS group to extension during daytime/nighttime:
31-Extension-COS Group for Daytime-COS Group for Nighttime
Where,
Extension is the flexible number assigned to the extension.
COS Group for Daytime is from 0 to 9
COS Group for Nighttime is from 0 to 9
Use following command to assign a same COS group to all extensions during daytime/nighttime:
31-*-COS Group for Daytime-COS Group for Nighttime
Example:
Make a COS group 5 having features like Call Transfer, Conference, Hot Outward Dialing, Call Forward, Auto
Call Back, Raid, Trunk Reservation.
250-5-02-1
250-5-03-1
250-5-05-1
250-5-08-1
250-5-10-1
250-5-12-1
250-5-13-1
Relevant Topic:
1. Time Table
=X=X=
Code Meaning
0 Feature Disabled
1 Feature Enabled
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 80
Team/Focus/Empire
Comm. Port
Thick Wire
T
h
i
n
W
ir
e
Operator Console
CLI Display
Remote Display Unit or Computer
connectivity
Splitter Cable
CLI Display
Whats this?
Matrix offers two types of CLI Display viz. Internal CLI Display and External CLI Display. Functionally
both the displays are same. They differ only in terms of their dimension.
CLI Display can be connected to a Premium model. It has following components:
Five 7-segment LED modules, which displays the callers extension number
A buzzer that sounds when there is an alarm call.
A socket to connect an adaptor of 9V/12V DC supply and
A cable with D9 male connector to connect the display to the comm. port of the system.
CLI Display displays:
Current time when the service extension is idle. Here service extension, means the extension for
which the display is assigned.
Message DIAL when the service extension lifts the handset.
Dialed number when the number is dialed from the service extension.
Callers extension number when the service extension gets ring.
Blinking Message ALRM when the service extension gets alarm ring.
Blinking Message PROG when the service extension is in Programming/Administration Mode.
Blinking Message OPER when the Operator calls service extension.
Message L1 or L2 or as the case may be when the service extension grabs a trunk line.
CLI Display sounds a buzzer when there is an alarm call on this service extension. It displays a message
ALARM. When the user answers the call and goes on-hook again, the message ALARM goes off.
Also the buzzer stops.
One extension can be assigned for one CLI Display.
One extension can be assigned to many CLI Displays but one CLI Display cannot be assigned to
more number of extensions.
Maximum 16 CLI Displays can be connected on the same system. In hotel applications, one can
keep one CLI Display on each floor so that when the guest dials the floor service code, his extension
number is displayed on the CLI Display.
CLI Display can be used in hotels, offices, apartments, residential colonies, etc.
Fig. 1: Connection to be made if Operator console, CLI Display and Remote display/Computer are to be connected.
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 81
Team/Focus/Empire
Comm. Port
Thick Wire
T
h
in
W
ir
e
D
Splitter Cable
PBX (V7)
Fig. 2: Connections to be made if only one CLI display is to be connected Fig. 3: Connection to be made if more number of CLI displays are to be connected
Comm. Port
Thick Wire
T
h
in
W
ir
e
D # 1
Splitter Cable
PBX (V7)
D # 2
D # 16
J1 J2 J3 J4 CLI DISPLAY
NUMBER
A-B A-B A-B A-B 00
A-B A-B A-B B-C 01
A-B A-B B-C A-B 12
A-B A-B B-C B-C 03
A-B B-C A-B A-B 04
A-B B-C A-B B-C 05
A-B B-C B-C A-B 06
A-B B-C B-C B-C 07
B-C A-B A-B A-B 08
B-C A-B A-B B-C 09
B-C A-B B-C A-B 10
B-C A-B B-C B-C 11
B-C B-C A-B A-B 12
B-C B-C A-B B-C 13
B-C B-C B-C A-B 14
B-C B-C B-C B-C 15
How to use it?
This facility can be used by a security guard in an office or in a residential complex, by a person in a pantry
shop, by an office assistant, by a hotel staff in a hotel, etc. Sixteen extensions can be given this facility at a
time.
How to program?
Before programming the CLI Display, it should be assigned an unique number viz. 00 to 15. Four jumpers
are provided on the CLI Display to assign it an unique number (from 00 to 15). Table shown below depicts
the settings to be made.
Use following command to program Security display for a particular extension:
2095-CLI Display Number-Extension Number
Where,
CLI Display Number is from 00 to 15
Extension Number is to be used as service extension.
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 82
Team/Focus/Empire
Use following command to clear assignment of a CLI display with a particular extension:
2095-CLI Display Number-#
Use following command to clear assignment of all CLI displays with all extensions:
2095-*-#
Important Points:
If Operator Console is made a service extension then the CLI Display will not display message DIAL,
dialed number or callers extension number.
In case of improper connections between CLI Display and the system, CLI Display displays a message
dS-nn where nn is the CLI Display number.
Please note that CLI Display will display the digits dialed by the extension. The digits will scroll from
right to left.
The service extensions with corresponding CLI Displays are printed in the system parameters report.
Please configure the communication port for Operator console/CLI Display using command 131-4 in case
of Version 7 and Team systems. In Focus and Empire this may not be required.
More than one Display can be assigned to one extension.
Please refer to System Parameters Report for the list of extensions programmed for CLI Display.
Relevant Topics:
1. Communication Ports
2. Protecting the System
3. Operator Console
=X=X=
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 83
Team/Focus/Empire
Communication Ports
Whats this?
The Matrix PBXs possesses communication port/s (DB-9 connector) which is/are used to:
1. Download the configuration reports/SMDR reports to the computer
2. Connect Remote Displaying Unit
3. Connect Indoor/Outdoor CLI Display Unit
4. Operator Console (DSS70/DSS-45/DSS-PC)
The communication port can uses RS-232C protocol
Team-208P supports only one communication port.
Focus and Empire supports two communication ports. Both the communication ports are connected to one
DB-9 connector. To separate the two communication ports, a splitter cable is provided which separates
both electrical ports into two separate physical connections as shown below.
Comm. Port
Thick Wire
T
h
in
W
ire
No connection
DSS-70/DSS-45/DSS-PC OR
CLI Display OR Remote
Display Unit OR Computer
can be connected
Splitter Cable
Team
Figure shows connections of different devices with Team
Comm. Port
Thick Wire
Thin W
ire
DSS-70/DSS-45/DSS-PC OR
CLI Display can be connected
Remote display unit OR
Computer can be connected
Splitter Cable
Focus/
Empire
Figure shows connections of different devices with Empire and Focus
Please remember that in Focus and Empire, DSS-70 / DSS-45 / DSS-PC / CLI Display should be
connected to the thick cable (port 2) only whereas in Team-208P, DSS-70 / DSS-45 / DSS-PC / CLI
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 84
Team/Focus/Empire
Display should be connected to the thin cable (port 1).
In Focus and Empire, DSS-70 / DSS-45 / DSS-PC and/or CLI display and either Remote display unit or
Computer can be connected/used simultaneously.
In Team-208P, either of DSS-70 / DSS-45 / DSS-PC or CLI Display or Remote display unit OR Computer
can be connected/used at a time.
Technical details of communication ports.
The communication port parameter are fixed and not programmable
There are:
Baud Rate = 2400 bps
Data Bits = 8
Start Bit = 1
Stop Bit = 0
Parity Bit = 0
Flow Control = None
Pin details of the communication ports:
Pin No. Pin Details
1 V+
2 RXD
3 RTXD
4 NC
5 GND
6 V+
7 NC
8 NC
9 NC
Team
Pin No. Port No. Pin Details
1 V+
2 RXD
3 TXD
4 NC
5 GND
6 V+
7 NC
8 RXD
9 TXD
Port 2
(Thick wire
of splitter
cable)
Port 1
(Thin wire
of splitter
cable)
Focus/Empire
How to use it?
You can connect DSS-70/DSS-45/DSS-PC to the communication port for better call management. For
more details, please refer Operator Console Users Guide DSS-70 or DSS-45 or DSS-PC.
Communication port can be disabled using command 131-0.
Communication port can be set for Remote display unit using command 131-1.
Communication port can be set for Computer Connectivity using command 131-2.
Communication port can be set for Operator Console / CLI Display using command 131-4. (This command
is applicable only in Team-208P).
Important Point:
Communication port is not available in Team-208S.
Relevant Topics:
1. CLI Display
2. Remote Display Units
3. Operator Console
4. Configuration Reports
5. SMDR
6. Computer Connectivity
=X=X=
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 85
Team/Focus/Empire
Computer Connectivity
Whats this?
The Matrix PBX can be connected to a computer and all configuration reports can be stored in computers
memory.
SMDR call details can also be downloaded to the computer and can be stored in computers memory.
It is also possible to program the system from the computer. For more details, please refer Programming
using a Computer.
How to use it?
To communicate with the computer, install communication software like ProComm, Bitcomm, Xtalk,
Mirror, etc. For details, please refer section How to install ProComm software. However if you have
Windows 95 or Windows NT then its in-built software viz. HyperTerminal can be used. For details, please
refer Computer connectivity using HyperTerminal.
Connect the communication port of the Matrix PBX (thin cable of the splitter cable) with the
communication port of the computer using Matrix communication cable. Please contact Matrix dealer or
the company for Matrix communication cable. (Matrix communication cable has 9-pin D-type female
connector on both the sides and is 10 meters long)
Enable the communication port for computer connectivity using command 131-2 from programming
mode.
To get on-line SMDR reports on the communication port, use command 2668-1.
To get configuration reports on the communication port, use command 2669-1.
Computer connectivity using ProComm software
Start your computer and go to command prompt. You get C:\>. Type CD ProComm. You get
C:\ProComm>. Type ProComm. You get C:\ProComm>ProComm. Press Enter. The computer runs the
ProComm Software and you get a full screen showing ProComm.
Press Esc. You get a Status bar at the bottom of the screen.
Press ALT-P to set the communication port of the computer for following settings:
Baud rate = 2400 bps
Start bit = 1
Stop bit = 1
Parity bit = none.
These settings are available in the option 9. Hence press 9 and press enter.
Now press 20 if you have connected the cable to comm. port 1 (where normally a mouse is connected)
and press enter.
Press 21 if you have connected the cable to comm. port 2 and press enter.
To save the changes made in the settings, press 24.
After some time you get a screen with a status bar at the bottom.
Press ALT+F1 to create a file to store data. On pressing ALT+F1 the computer asks you a file name. Give
appropriate filename and press enter. The status bar at the bottom now shows LOG OPEN.
Now on giving printing commands or on completion of the call as the case may be, the reports get
downloaded on the computer (you can see them on the screen). These reports can be saved in a file and
can be retrieved, edited, deleted, printed, etc.
To come out of the DOS mode, press ALT-X.
Suppose you have stored the configuration reports in a filename viz. <Sumer> and you want to retrieve
this file. Then go to command prompt, type CD ProComm and then EDIT <filename>. Now you can edit,
delete and print this file.
How to install ProComm software on the computer?
Start the computer. You get the desktop menu.
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 86
Team/Focus/Empire
Insert the ProComm floppy in Drive A.
Click on command Prompt. You get C:\>
Make a directory called ProComm. (To make this directory, type MD ProComm.)
On the screen you get C:\>MD ProComm. Press enter. You get C:\>. Type CD ProComm.
You get C:\> CD ProComm on the screen. Press enter. You get C:\PROCOMM. Type COPY A:\*.* . You
get C:\PROCOMM>COPY A: \*.*. Press enter.
This will copy the ProComm software from the floppy on the hard disk in the Directory called ProComm.
Computer connectivity using HyperTerminal
ASSUMPTIONS:
Your computer has Microsoft Windows and has a facility of HyperTerminal under accessories option.
You are using a communication port other than the one used for Mouse
PROCEDURE:
Start the computer You get Desktop menu on the screen
Click on Start, Point to Programs, Point to Accessories,
Click on HyperTerminal.
You get a Dialog Box viz. C:\Program|Accessor
on the screen
Double click on Hyper terminal icon You get a Dialog Box viz. New connection Hyper
Terminal asking to give name for new connection
Give the name you desire and press <Enter>. You get a Dialog Box viz. PHONE NUMBER
No need to enter any phone no. But change the settings of
Connect to using its options to Direct to Comm port2 or
other port and click OK
You get a Dialog Box viz. PORT SETTINGS
Set Bits per Second to 2400, Data Bits to 8, Parity Bit to
None, Stop bits to 1, Flow control to None and Click OK
You get a Dialog Box having options like File, Edit,
View, Call, Transfer, etc.
Click on Transfer You get pop down menu
Click on Capture Text You get a Dialog Box asking file name
Give filename with path OR Browse to store in your desired
folder. In the desired folder create a text file. To do so right
click , Point on New, Point to new text document and click
on it, give a file name say <prog. as on xx.xx.xx>. Now type the
same file name in the File name block and click Open
You get a Dialog Box viz. Capture Text.
Click on Start button of the window Now the communication port is ready to receive the
data from the PBX
Click on File, Click on Properties, Click on Settings and
Change Emulation option to VT100 and click OK
You again get the Dialog Box having Options like
File, Edit, View, Call, Transfer, etc.
Now enter the programming mode in the PBX, enable
communication port by dialing 131-2 and give the printing
commands
You get the desired reports on the screen
After getting the reports on the computer, Click on Transfer,
Point to Capture text, Point to Stop and Click on Stop.
Click on File, Point Exit and Click.
All the data has been received by the computer and is
stored in the given filename.
Computer asks a question, Do you want to disconnect? Click on Yes
Computer asks a question, Do you want to save this session? Click on Yes. You come back to the desk top menu.
To print the file, open that file again in word pad or note pad.
Give the print command.
You get the print out. Keep it with you for reference.
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 87
Team/Focus/Empire
WHAT SHOULD I DO IF OTHER COMMUNICATION PORTS ARE NOT WORKING?
You may use the mouse port (communication port 1). But in this case you will be required to use arrow
keys of the number pad for the movement of the pointer on the screen. To make arrow keys accessible,
Press <window icon> key OR <Ctrl> and <Esc> key to Start, Go to Settings using <arrow> key, Press
<Enter> on Settings, You get Pop down menu. Go to Control panel using <arrow> key, Press <Enter>
on Control Panel. You get a Dialog Box showing different icons. Go to Accessibility Options using
<Tab> and <arrow> keys, press <Enter> on Accessibility Options. You get a Dialog Box with many
choices, Go to option named Mouse using <Tab> and <arrow> key and press <enter>. You get an option
Use Mouse Keys, Press <ALT-M>. You get a Tick mark in the box, which means that, now you can use
arrow keys of the numeric keypad to move the pointer to any location on the screen.
All the operations, which one can do with the mouse, can also be done without it by using simple arrow
keys and the arrow keys of the numeric pad. Tab Key is also very much used for cursor movement.
For each and every command say for example, in Use Mouse Keys, you can enable the mouse keys by
clicking the mouse in the box. The same can be done using the keyboard by pressing <ALT-M>. The
Dialog Box gives this hint with the help of an underline below M.
Start the computer You get Desktop menu
Press <windows icon> key OR <Ctrl> and <Esc >
key to Start, Go to Programs using <arrow> keys,
Enter on Programs, Enter on Accessories, go to
HyperTerminal, Enter on HyperTerminal.
You get a Dialog Box viz. C:\Program|Accessor
Go to Hyper terminal.exe icon using <arrow>
keys. Press <Enter> on it.
You get a Dialog Box viz. New connection
HyperTerminal asking to give name for new connection
Give the name you desire and press <Enter> You get a Dialog Box viz. PHONE NUMBER
No need to enter any phone no. But change the
settings of Connect to by pressing <Alt-n> to
Direct to Comm port2 or other port using
<arrow> keys and <Enter>
You get a Dialog Box viz. PORT SETTINGS
Set Bits per Second to 2400 (using <Alt-B>) ,
Data Bits to 8 (using <Alt-D>) , Parity Bit to None
(using <Alt-P>) , Stop bits to 1(using <Alt-S>) ,
Flow control to None (using <Alt-F>) and the
<arrow> keys. Use <Tab> key to reach OK and
<Enter>
You get a Dialog Box having options like File, Edit, View,
Call, Transfer, etc.
Press <Alt-T>to go to Transfer and press <Enter> You get pop down menu
Press <Alt-C>to go to Capture Text and press
<Enter>
You get a Dialog Box asking file name
Give filename with path OR Press <Alt-B> to
Browse.
You get a Dialog Box viz. Select Capture File.
Press <Alt-I >and then <down arrow> key to select
the desired folder
You get the files of that folder (It is possible that the folder may
not contain any file)
To create a new file, press - and 5 You get pop down menu
Go to New, Press <Enter>, Go to Text document,
Press <Enter>
A file viz. A new text document.txt is created
You can give your desired file name
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 88
Team/Focus/Empire
Press <Alt-F> and the file name of the file just
created. Press <Enter>
You get Dialog Box viz. Capture Text
Click on Start button of the window Now the communication port is ready to receive the data from
the EPABX
Press <Alt-F> to go to File, Go to Properties, Go
to Settings using <Tab> and <arrow> keys, Press
<ALT-E>,Change Emulation option to VT100 using
<arrow> keys and click OK
You again get the Dialog Box having Options like File, Edit,
View, Call, Transfer, etc.
Now enter the programming mode in the EPABX,
enable communication port by dialing 131-2 and give
the printing commands
You get the desired reports on the screen
After getting the reports on the computer, Press Alt-
T> to go to Transfer, Use <arrow> keys to go to
Capture text, Press <Enter>, You get Stop and
Pause option. Select Stop option using <arrow>
keys and press <Enter>.
Now the communication between computer and the EPABX has
stopped. All the data has been received by the computer and is
stored in the given filename.
Press <Alt-F>, Press <Alt-X> to Exit, Press
<Enter>

Computer asks a question, Do you want to disconnect Press <Alt-Y> for option Yes
Computer asks a question, Do you want to save this
session
Press <Alt-Y> for option Yes
You come back to the desk top menu
To print the file, open that file again and give the print
command
You get the print out. Keep it with you for reference
What Should I do if there is no HyperTerminal option in the accessories menu?
Click on Start, Point to Settings, Point to Control Panel, Click on Control panel. You get window with
different icons. Double click the icon Add/Remove Programs, Click on windows settings, Double Click
on Communications, Click on HyperTerminal. Place the pointer of the mouse in the check box and click on it.
The box gets a Tick mark. Click on Ok for the two Windows and come back to the Desktop menu. Now Click
on Start, Point to Accessories, You get the option HyperTerminal. Click on it and follow the above-mentioned
procedure. If you are unable to get the HyperTerminal folder in the Accessories option then you will have to install
this feature on your computer. This requires help of a computer expert.
Please note that, in the above section
Italics is used for any function to be done by the user
Bold letters are used to indicate the result of the action that will appear on the computer
<italics> indicate the keys of the computer to be pressed, which conforms, with the terminology of any
computer related literature.
Important Points:
Generally computers have two comm. ports viz. COM1 where mouse is connected and COM 2 which is
normally free. COM 2 can have DB-9 connector or DB-25 connector. If DB-25 connector is present then
DB-25 to DB-9 converter should be used.
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 89
Team/Focus/Empire
After doing all the above-mentioned procedure, on giving printing commands, you get confirmation tone
but no data appears on the screen. If this happens then check your comm. port of the computer.
To check the communication port of the computer, connect the Matrix COMPORT module to the
communication port of the computer. Now if the communication port is faulty then whatever you type will
not appear on the screen. (This is to be done after you give the filename in case of using ProComm and
after giving command for Capture text in case of HyperTerminal).
This facility is available in Premium models.
Relevant Topics:
1. Communication Ports
2. SMDR
3. Configuration Reports
=X=X=
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 90
Team/Focus/Empire
Conference
Whats this?
The Matrix PBX offers the facility of 3-party conference. 3- Party conference can be conducted at a spur of
the moment without much prior planning. If a user is talking to some one and he feels he should include a
third person in his present talk and have a conference, he can do so without disconnecting his present talk.
All he has to do is to hold present person, dial the third person and then dial conference code.
Following three combinations are allowed in 3-party conference
All three extensions
Two extensions and one trunk
One extension and two trunks
How to use it?
It is possible to have Conference-Unsupervised
This feature enables the operator to connect two trunks through the system and get herself free from the discussion.
Suppose you are at city A. Your two colleagues are at city B and city C. Now using this feature, you being at City A
can make conference with City B and City C and once in conversation, if you disconnect then City B and City C can
talk to each other.
How to use it?
How to program?
Access to Conference is programmable. Please refer section Class Of Service for details on how to allow/deny
conference to an extension. Only those extensions which have access to conference can initiate conference.
For more details, please refer Call Splitting and Call Transfer.
Important Points:
The trunks are connected in the same manner as in case of DOSA call. A warning tone is given after time =
DOSA inactivity timer.
To extend the call, either of the party has to dial a digit other than #. Dialing # terminates the call. Both
the trunks get release.
If the person forgets to dial # while disconnecting, the call gets automatically terminated after time =
DOSA inactivity timer. Once again, both the trunks get released.
Relevant Topics:
1. Class Of Service (COS)
2. Call Splitting
3. Call Transfer
=X=X=
1 3-way mode as described in call splitting.
2 Dial Flash-9. 3-way speech.
1 3-way mode as described in call splitting.
2 Dial Flash. Feature tone
3 Dial 6. Extension gets disconnected. Trunk1-Trunk2 speech.
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 91
Team/Focus/Empire
Configuration Reports
Whats this?
The Matrix PBX can be programmed/configured as per the requirement. This configuration can be
downloaded on the computer or printer in form of report. These are called Configuration Reports.
Configuration reports are useful for:
1. Verification of correct programming.
2. Storing them for future reference.
How it works?
Configuration reports can be generated after entering in the SE/SA mode.
Configuration reports can be generated on a computer or printed on a printer.
The reports are in pure ASCII format.
No graphics are used.
How to use it?
Use following commands to assign a destination where these reports are to be generated:
2669-Destination
Where,
Destination Meaning
0 Printer
1 Comm. Port
By default, print destination is printer.
Use the following commands to download/print various Configuration Reports::
Configuration Reports Command
Print System Parameters Report 115-1
Print Extension Parameters 1 115-2-1
Print Extension Parameters 2 115-2-2
Print Trunk Parameters 115-3
Print SMDR summary for all extensions 115-4
Print Feature Help Report 115-6
Print Programming Help Report 115-7
Print Global Directory List 116
Print Pulse Rate table and other SMDR Parameters 117-1
Print Area Code table 117-2
These commands can be issued from the SA mode also.
Please note that to get the trunk parameters report of the trunks 11 to 20(bank 2) first issue the command
156-2 to change the bank and then issue the command 115-3.
Relevant Topics:
1. Communication Ports
2. System Parameters
3. Extension Parameter
4. Printer Port
=X=X=
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 92
Team/Focus/Empire
Continued Dialing
Whats this?
Modern trunk exchanges support many advanced features like Call waiting, Call Forward, etc. This
requires dialing of codes during speech. The dialing of codes does not create problem when you are dialing
on the trunk directly, but the Matrix PBX between you and the TELCO exchange, the TELCO codes clash
with the Matrix PBX codes. This leads to difficulty in accessing TELCO features while in speech.
However, Matrix supports access to all codes from any extension. In essence, you have to inform the
Matrix PBX that you need to dial some code on the trunk. Dialing Flash-# precisely does this. Once this
code is dialed, you can dial any code within 10 seconds.
How to use it?
From Extension
1 Speech with trunk.
2 Dial Flash. Feature tone
3 Dial #. Feature tone stopped.
4 Dial desired code.
From Operator Console
1 Speech with trunk.
2 Dial #. DIALING
3 Dial desired code. Speech with the first trunk/second trunk depending on the dialed code.
Example:
To use call waiting facility of central office from any extension, follow the following steps:
1 Dial Flash-# This informs the system to pass following code
2 Dial Flash-2 Speech with second call
3 Dial Flash-# This informs the system to pass following code
4 Dial Flash-1 Speech with first call
5 Dial Flash-# This informs the system to pass following code
6 Dial Flash-2 Speech with second call
How to program?
Continued Dialing is a programmable feature. Please refer class of service(COS) for details on how to allow
Continued Dialing to a user.
Please note that an extension that is allowed the feature of trunk reservation can only use continued dialing.
Relevant Topic:
1. Class of Service (COS)
=X=X=
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 93
Team/Focus/Empire
Conversation Recording
Whats this?
System provides a facility to the station user to record his conversation with the opposite party.
The Conversation is recorded in the mailbox of the station user.
This feature works only if a VMS is interfaced with the system.
How to use it?
How it works?
When the station user dials the command for Conversation Recording, the system sends a string of digits to the
VMS to initiate Conversation Recording. The conversation gets recorded in the mailbox of the user that issued the
Conversation Recording command.
How to program?
Stations having access to conference can only use conversation recording.
Important Point:
The station user should possess a mailbox if Conversation Recording is to be used.
Relevant Topic:
1. Voice Mail Integration
=X=X=
1 Speech with the opposite party.
2 Dial Flash. Feature tone
3 Dial 109. Ring Back Tone
4 VMS answers the call. Conversation Recording starts.
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 94
Team/Focus/Empire
Department Group
Whats this?
A common number can be assigned to a group of persons doing same kind of job.
This feature is very useful in service industry where few homogenous groups of persons performing
similar type of work are formed. Now for the caller, it is not important to talk to a particular person only,
rather he wants solution for his problem. Now to get solution he has to dial a extension, if that extension is
busy, he has to again dial another extension and this may go on if more people of the group are busy.
Instead, if there is a common code for this group, it would be easy for the caller to dial a code and call goes
to any of the free extensions of that group. This feature precisely satisfies this need. Here you have to dial
a code and the call will land on first of the free extensions from the group.
If required, a particular person can also be contacted by dialing the specific extension number of the
person.
Maximum 10 groups can be defined. Each group has a unique code. The access codes for group 0 to 9 are
from 3980 to 3889.
How to use it?
Example:
To access any of the free extensions in group 1, dial 3981.
How it works?
You can access an individual extension by dialing its regular extension number.
You can program maximum 8 extensions in a group.
Maximum 10 such groups can be formed.
An extension can also be put in any group
An extension can also be kept out of all groups.
One extension can be programmed in more than one group
When a fresh call is made on a group, the system locates first free extension in a group. The call is routed
on this extension. Accordingly, incoming traffic will be more on the first few extensions in a group.
A new incoming call will go on later extension if all previous extensions are busy.
Group call can be made even from DID
If groups are not programmed, we get error tone when we make a department group.
No group of extensions is defined by factory default; hence one cannot access any extension by dialing
group code unless it is programmed.
How to program?
Use following command to program Department Group:
251-Department Group-Extension1....Extension8
Where,
Department group is from 0 to 9
Extension1...Extension8 are extensions to be defined in a group. (If less than 8 extension are required in a
group, use # to terminate the command).
Example:
To program extensions 21, 25 and 28 in a group to be accessed with code 3980.
1 Lift the handset. Dial tone
2
Dial Pilot
Number.
Ring Back Tone (The call lands on
first of the free station of the group).
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 95
Team/Focus/Empire
Use following command:
251-0-21-25-28-#,
Program extension 21, 25 and 28 in a group to be accessed with code 3981.
251-1-21-25-28-#
Important Points:
Department group 9 is used as VMS group. Hence if VMS is interfaced with the Matrix PBX and if all the
VMS ports are assigned a group, department group 9 cannot be used for Department .
Please refer the System Parameters Report to know the programmed values for department group.
Relevant Topics:
1. Flexible Numbers
2. Voice Mail Integration
=X=X=
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 96
Team/Focus/Empire
Default the Configuration
Whats this?
Every system comes with pre-defined set of variables like extensions flexible numbers, timers and other
parameters. These pre-defined settings are called default settings. The default value of each programmable
parameter is mentioned in the respective section. If the default setting suits your requirements then you may
not even program the system and the system will work according to default settings. The Matrix PBXs offers
two ways to assign default settings viz. Hardware and Software default.
How to use it?
Software default
Enter programming mode.
Dial 18-Programming Password
The system restarts
Hardware default
Switch OFF the system
Wait for 10 seconds
Open the system
Locate a mini-jumper on the CPU card near the RAM IC
Change position of the jumper
Wait for 5 seconds
Restore the jumper to its original position
Close the system
Switch ON the system
Now, the system is ready with default settings. The programming password becomes 1234. Use this
password to enter the programming mode and reprogram the complete system.
Please note that there is no jumper on the master card of the Empire system hence, to hardware default
the Empire system short capacitor C9 or C10 near the RAM IC for 5 seconds.
When to use it?
Many times it happens that due to some programming error, the system goes haywire and you are unable to
analyse the problem. During such situation, it is advisable to software default the system. However software
default of the system can be done from the programming mode and hence programming password should be
known. If you forget the password then software default cannot be done and in that case hardware default of
the system should be done.
Important Points:
Software default of the system will change all system parameters, system timers, system passwords, and all
the parameters set related to various features and facilities to default values.
SMDR details will not be cleared.
Hardware default to the system assign default values to all the parameters including SE password and SA
password.
Please refer the System Parameters Report to know the last time/day the system was set to default configuration
manually/By power ON.
Relevant Topics:
1. Programming the System
2. System Security(Passwords)
=X=X=
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 97
Team/Focus/Empire
Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
Whats this?
You must have observed that in big corporate offices there are more number of trunk lines. If all these trunks
are made to land on the operator then she will find it very difficult to handle the situation. At the same time
the callers will not get reply immediately and will have to hang around. To avoid this, few trunk lines can be
made to land directly to the concerned persons but this too will not help to the condition because every user
cannot be given a separate trunk line. Hence, a more subtle solution is found called Direct Inward Dialing
(DID). You can program any trunk for this facility. The caller on dialing this trunk will get a option to talk to
his desired contact person. Thus, without the help of an operator, an outside person can talk with the desired
person, hence the name DID. However, your extension number should be known to the caller.
How it works?
Call lands on a DID enabled
System gives Ring Back Tone
to the caller.
Caller gets music / VM for time
= DID/DOSA music timer
Caller gets beeps for time=DID/DOSA
beeps timer. PBX waits for valid
extension number in tone mode.
Is the dialed
number, a valid
extension ?
The call goes to the
landing destination
If the landing destination does
not answer the call within time
= RBT ring timer, the call gets
terminated.
End
The caller gets Ring Back Tone
No
Yes
Is the called
extension busy/is the
called extension
ringing/has the called
extension
Caller can talk to the
concerned person
End
The caller gets ring back tone
for time = DID ring timer
The caller gets busy tone
for time = busy tone timer
C
A
Busy
Ringing
Responded
B
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 98
Team/Focus/Empire
How to program?
Step 1: Enable/disable DID on a trunk/s during daytime and nighttime using command 43.
Step 2: Enable/disable voice message for DID on the trunk using command 532.
Step 3: Program the DID timers.
Step 1
Use following command to enable/disable DID facility on a trunk:
43-Trunk-Day Time-Night Time
Where,
Trunk is from 0 to 9.
Use following command to program DID facility on all trunks:
43-*-Day Time-Night Time
Example:
Enable DID on trunk 2 during day time and disable it during night time.
Use following command:
43-2-1-0
By default, DID is disabled on all the trunks during both daytime and nighttime.
Day Time Meaning
0 DID Disabled
1 DID Enabled
Night Time Meaning
0 DID Disabled
1 DID Enabled
C
A
Is it that the called
extension do not respond
/ caller do not try other
extension ?
Does the
called extension
responds ?
Caller can talk to the
concerned person
End
B
No
Yes
B
No
response
Call goes to the landing
destinations. It rings for time
= DID ring timer
No
If the caller disconnects the call while the
extension is ringing then also the landing
destination rings for time = DID ring timer
End
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 99
Team/Focus/Empire
Step 2
Many times it happens that the extension number of few persons in an office have to be changed. Since DID facility
is activated, callers should be informed about it, which is not feasible. Hence to solve such issues, voice guidance can
be enabled in the system and appropriate message like The new extension number of Mr. Palak is 201 can be
recorded. For more details, please refer Voice Messages.
Use following command to enable/disable voice guidance for DID on the trunk:
532-Trunk-Day Time-Night Time
Where,
Trunk is from 0 to 9.
Step 3
DID/DOSA music timer-Time for which caller gets music on dialing a DID/DOSA enabled trunk.
Command: 217-20-Timer
Range: 00 to 99 seconds
Default: 05 seconds
DID/DOSA beeps timer-Time for which caller gets beeps after the music, for dialing a valid extension number.
Command: 217-21-Timer
Range: 01 to 99
Default: 05 seconds
DID/DOSA ring time-Time for which the extension accessed through DID rings.
Command: 217-22-Timer
Range: 00 to 99 seconds
Default: 30 seconds
Important Points:
DID facility can be enabled on one or more trunks.
DID can be enabled/disabled for day and night time independently.
Call Privacy can be given against DID calls. For more details, please refer topic Privacy.
DID facility cannot be used for extensions starting with 1 if DID and DOSA, both are to be used simultaneously
on the same trunk.
The caller can dial extension number even while the voice message is being played. This would save some time.
DID call keeps ringing operator console till it is answered.
Relevant Topics:
1. Time Table
2. Privacy
3. Voice Messages
=X=X=
Night Time Meaning
0 DID Disabled
1 DID Enabled
Day Time Meaning
0 DID Disabled
1 DID Enabled
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 100
Team/Focus/Empire
Direct Outward System Access (DOSA)
Whats this?
DOSA enables the user to use the system resources for making outgoing call from anywhere outside the
office. This facility is generally used to make long distance calls.
How to use DOSA facility?
Dial a DOSA activated trunk.
On getting the Matrix PBX dial tone, dial 1-extension number-User password. You get DOSA dial tone.
(Short beeps)
On getting DOSA dial tone, dial 9, 5 or 8-trunk to grab another trunk to get central office dial tone.
On getting central office dial tone, dial the telephone number.
Dial any digit to continue the talk.
Dial # to disconnect the call.
You are still logged in the system. You can make another call by grabbing central office line.
Dial # to end the DOSA session.
How it works?
To make one DOSA call, minimum two trunk lines are used (L2 and L3 in figure). Hence, these should be
connected to the Matrix PBX. However, in all four trunk lines are (L1, L2, L3 and L4 in figure) used while
using this facility as shown below.
When a caller dials a DOSA activated trunk, two trunk lines (L1 and L2) are used. Then the caller grabs
the third trunk (L3) and dials a telephone number where fourth line (L4) is used.
In DOSA call, speech quality may deteriorate since the length of the path increase.
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 101
Team/Focus/Empire
Caller dials DOSA enabled trunk. EPABX senses the
call and gives RBT to the caller after one ring.
Caller gets music/VM for
time = DOSA music timer
Caller gets beeps for time = DOSA beeps timer. EPABX waits for
the caller to dial 1-extension number-dynamic lock passowrd.
(The caller should dial in tone mode only)
Are the
extension number and
the password correctly
dialled ?
EPABX gives error tone for time = error
tone timer. EPABX waits for correct
extension number and password.
X
EPABX gives DOSA dial tone(short beeps) for 10
seconds. These short beeps indicates successful
log-in. EPABX waits for the caller to grab a trunk
during these beeps by dialling 9 or 5 or 8-N
EPABX allots the trunk, if free to the caller and
waits for the caller to dial the telephone number
Is the
called party
busy ?
Caller gets RBT. Speech is established when the
called party answers. If the called party does not
answer the call then the call gets disconnected after
time = DOSA inactivity timer + 5 seconds
Caller gets busy tone. Caller should dial # to
disconnect. Caller gets DOSA dial tone.
A
B
No
Yes
Yes No

X

Z

Y
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 102
Team/Focus/Empire
How to program DOSA facility?
Step 1: Enable/disable DOSA on trunk during day time and night time using command 45.
Step 2: Enable/disable DOSA on an extension using command 35.
Step 3: Program DOSA Inactivity Timer is Second/Minute using command 207.
Step 4: Program the DOSA related timers.
Step 1
Use following command to enable/disable DOSA facility on a trunk:
45-Trunk-Day Time-Night Time
Where,
Trunk is from 0 to 9.
By default, DOSA is disabled on all the trunks both during daytime and night time.
Step 2
Use following command to Enable/Disable DOSA on an extension:
35-Extension-Code
Where,
Extension is the flexible number assigned to the extension.
Day Time Meaning
0 DOSA deactivated
1 DOSA activated
Night Time Meaning
0 DOSA deactivated
1 DOSA activated
A
Is it required to
extend the call beyond
DOSA inactivity
timer ?
Dial any digit other than
'#' to continue the talk
The call will get
disconnected after time
= DOSA inactivity timer
+ 5 seconds
End
Z
No
Ye
B
Does caller want to
retry the same or other
number or log out ?
Dial # to logout
Grab trunk an dial
out the phone
number
End
Y
Retry
Logout
Code Meaning
0 DOSA Disabled
1 DOSA Enabled
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 103
Team/Focus/Empire
By default, DOSA is disabled on all extensions.
Example:
Disable DOSA from extension 23 on trunk 2 during day time enable it during nighttime.
Use following command to satisfy the requirement:
35-23-1
45-2-0-1
Step 3
Use following command to program DOSA Inactivity Timer in Second/Minute:
207-Code
Where,
Step 4
Timer of Relevance:
DOSA Inactivity Timer-Time after which the system gives warning beeps to the caller:
Command: 216-Timer
Range: 00 to 99 seconds
Default: 30 seconds
For DOSA Music Timer and DOSA Beep Timer. Please refer Direct Inward Dialing(DID).
Important Points:
DOSA facility can be enabled on one or more trunks.
DOSA can be enabled/disabled for Day and Night times independently.
DOSA inactivity timer is the time for which a line remains active even after the call is finished if the user
forgets to log out by dialing #. Hence it is advisable to program this timer for optimum period.
Because of poor line conditions, it is possible that DOSAfacility may not work.
Open DOSA is allowed i.e. there is no need to give unique dynamic password to the extension to use
DOSA facility. However it is desirable to keep unique dynamic lock password to avoid the misuse. Also
you may change this password if you feel that it is no longer secret.
In case of Empire, the buzzer on the Master card gives sharp beeps while dialing a telephone number after
grabbing the trunk. This indicates that a DOSA call is being made. Also the LED of the trunk on which the
telephone number is dialed flashes on the front panel during this period. In other systems, only the LED
flashes whereas the buzzer does not sound.
Because of poor line conditions, it is possible that DOSA facility may not work.
A DOSA call gets stored in the buffer just like other calls and it is indicated by a letter D in the remarks
column.
DOSA facility allows remote users to make long distance calls. It is advisable for all the users to
understand the power and cost implication of this facility and hence enable this facility very carefully.
It is strongly recommended to protect this facility with a unique password. Change password from 1111 to
some other value. For double security, DOSA cannot be operated with default password.
Code Meaning
0 DOSA Inactivity Timer in Second
1 DOSA Inactivity Timer in Minute
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 104
Team/Focus/Empire
Voice Guidance facility for DOSA
If more number of persons are using DOSA then a caution message If you are making a DOSA call,
please do not forget to terminate the call. Dial # to terminate the call can be recorded. This will
remind the person just before making a DOSA call.
The voice guidance facility for DOSA message can be enabled/disabled on the trunk. For more
details, please refer Voice Message.
The caller can dial extension number and the password even while the voice message is being played.
This would save some time.
Relevant Topics:
1. Class of Service (COS)
2. Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
3. Voice Messages
=X=X=
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 105
Team/Focus/Empire
Distinctive Rings
Whats this?
The Matrix PBX support different types of ring for different situations.
Following table lists different types of ring and cadences for different situation:
ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF
1 Internal Call Slow, Double 500 250 500 3750 -- --
2 External Call Single 1250 3750 -- -- -- --
3
Auto Call Back Ring on
Extension/Trunk
Double/Single 500 250 500 1250 -- --
4 Auto Redial Ring Single 1250 3750 -- -- -- --
5 Boss Ring Fast, Double 500 250 500 1250 -- --
6
Door Phone Ring, Alarm,
Message Wait,
Programming Mode,
Return Calls,
Triple 250 250 250 250 250 3750
Timings (millisec.) Sr.
No.
Name Type
As different ring cadences are used for different occasions, it is easy to guess the caller type before you
answer the call. Thus, you can respond faster to a trunk call.
=X=X=
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 106
Team/Focus/Empire
Door Lock
Whats this?
This features enables us to open/close the door without physically going to open/close the door. Just dialing
codes can do this.
An electronic door lock is an accessory that can be controlled by giving an electrical signal from the Matrix
PBX.
How it works?
An electronic door lock has a solenoid (electrical coil and plunger arrangement), which operates the door
lock.
The door lock is mounted on the door panel.
The Matrix PBX provides a non-energized contact (relay port) to control the door lock.
When a command is given from any extension, the non-energized contact operates and door lock opens or
closes depending on the arrangement.
As the solenoid needs high power, separate power supply point is required for the door lock.
D C vo lta g e
Re la y p o rt o f the PBX
D o o r lo c k Un it (N o rm a lly c lo se )
D
o
o
r
H ouse
How to install it?
The door lock unit must be kept as close to the door as possible. Arrange for the power supply point where
the door lock is to be put.
Use a good quality wire pair to connect the solenoid control to the relay port of the Matrix PBX.
Connect the wires carrying the control signal to the lock on the door panel.
Connect the power supply cable.
Please remember that giving a command to turn the relay ON will close the door lock or vice versa
depending on the logic of the door lock.
How to program?
Step 1: Set relay port as Inteleswitch/Door lock using command 2091.
Step 2: Set relay port as mono-stable mode with active high/low logic using command 20920.
Step 3: Set relay port as Bi-stable mode using command 2092.
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 107
Team/Focus/Empire
Step 1
Use following command to configured to set relay port for Inteleswitch/door lock:
2091-Code
Where,
Code Meaning
0 Configured for Inteleswitch
1 Configured for Door lock
Example:
Set relay port for Door lock, dial
2091-1
Step 2
Use following command to set relay port for mono-stable with active high/low logic:
20920-Code
Where,
Code Meaning
0 Mono-stable with active low logic
1 Mono-stable with active high logic
Example:
Set relay port for mono-stable with active low logic, dial
20920-0
If the relay is programmed in mono-stable mode for active low then on giving command 3990, the relay will
be turned OFF for time = door lock timer.
If the relay is programmed in mono-stable mode for active high then on giving command 3991, the relay will
be turned ON for time = door lock timer.
Step 3
Use following command to set relay port for Bi-stable mode:
2092-1
The relay contact remains in ON or OFF position depending on the last command. It does not change its
position unless a command is given.
Timer of Relevance:
Door lock timer-If the relay is programmed in mono-stable mode for active high/low, the relay will be turned
ON/OFF for time.
Command: 217-34-Timer
Range: 00 to 99 seconds
Default: 05 seconds
How to use it?
1 Lift the handset. Dial tone
2 Dial 3990 (To Close the door). Confirmation tone
3 Dial 3991 (To Open the door). Confirmation tone
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 108
Team/Focus/Empire
Important Point:
Door lock feature is not available in Team-208S.
=X=X=
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 109
Team/Focus/Empire
Dynamic Lock
Whats this?
A user can lock his extension to avoid misuse of local and long distance dialing in his absence.
When a user locks his extension, his toll control changes to limited dialing or no dialing.
The lock operates with a 4-digits password. Each user has his personal password called User Password.
Extension can be locked manually or automatically.
If manual lock is selected, then user should lock the extension while leaving his work place by dialing the
required code. On returning back to work place, he can unlock the extension.
If automatic lock is selected, the system locks the extension after a set time automatically.
The timer starts from the time when the extension is unlocked.
How to use it?
Step 1
Decide whether you want to use Manual or Auto Dynamic lock.
If you decide to use Manual Dynamic Lock set the parameter minutes in the command 143-User
Password-Minutes to 00.
If you decide to use Auto Dynamic Lock, set the parameter minutes in the command 143-User Password-
Minutes to a desirable value.
1 Lift the handset. Dial tone
2 Dial 143-User Password-Minutes. Confirmation tone
User Password is a 4-digits secret code. Default User Password is 1111.
Minutes specify time in minutes after which the extension gets locked automatically.
Range for time is 00 to 99 minutes.
Use the following commands to lock/unlock the extension:
To Lock the Extension
1 Lift the handset. Dial tone
2 Dial 140. Confirmation tone
To Unlock the Extension
1 Lift the handset. Dial tone
2 Dial 141-User Password. Confirmation tone
Once the extension is locked, you will be able to dial the numbers depending on the dynamic toll control.
Step 2
Change your user password to avoid misuse of your extension.
To Change User Password
1 Lift the handset. Dial tone
2 Dial 144-Old User Password-New User Password. Confirmation tone
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 110
Team/Focus/Empire
Step 3
To assign Allowed-Denied list level for locked state.
1 Lift the handset. Dial tone
2 Dial 142-User Password-Allowed-Denied List Level. Confirmation tone
3 Replace the handset.
By default, Allowed/Denied list level 0 is assigned in locked state.
The user can assign a level lower than or equal to the toll control assign to the it by the SE.
In case you forget your password, do not panic. Contact the System Administrator (SA) or the System Engineer
(SE). He can clear your password to its default value. Refer System Security (Passwords) for more details.
SE/SA may use following command to default dynamic lock settings:
342-Extension
Where,
Extension is the flexible number assigned to the extension.
On issuing above command, the dynamic lock will set to manual mode and lock level will set to level 0.
How to program?
Dynamic lock is a programmable feature. Please refer Class Of Service (COS) for details on how to permit
Dynamic Lock to a user
Important Point:
If default password is 1111, dynamic lock will not work. It must be changed to some other value.
Relevant Topics:
1. Toll Control
2. User Security (User Password)
=X=X=
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 111
Team/Focus/Empire
Emergency Dialing
Whats this?
Emergency number can be dialed by a station as well as by an Operator provided it has access to trunk line.
While dialing emergency number the system does not check the Toll Control level assigned to the station.
A station can dial emergency number in two ways:
From the PBX dial tone. i.e. just after lifting the handset.
Grabbing the trunk line and then dialing the emergency number.
However, the Operator can dial the emergency number only after grabbing the trunk line i.e. the Operator has to
dial trunk access code followed by the emergency number. For e.g. to dial 911, the operator has to dial 9-911.
When any station dials an emergency number and if all the trunks are busy, the system releases any of these trunks
forcibly and dials the emergency number.
If the operator finds a busy trunk while dialing emergency number she can forcibly disconnect any of the trunks by
dialing 0 in the busy tone and dial out the emergency number.
How to program?
Use following command to program Emergency Numbers:
2096-Emergency Number-#
Where,
Emergency number is a number string of maximum 16 digits.
Use following command to clear all Emergency Numbers:
2096-#
Important Points:
If the feature access code match with any of the emergency numbers programmed then prefix * while using the
feature. For e.g. 411 is programmed as Emergency number, then while picking up a call, the station user should
dial *4 instead of 4.
However, please note that this rule does not apply to feature access code 9 and 5. I.e. to access a CO line, the
station user need not dial *9 or *5 instead of 9 or 5 respectively.
Relevant Topics:
1. Emergency Detection and Reporting
=X=X=
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 112
Team/Focus/Empire
Emergency Detection and Reporting
Whats this?
Whenever a station makes an emergency call, it is detected by the system and reported to the Operator. This is
useful when a distantly located station dials an emergency number. In such cases, the Operator may not be aware of
the emergency and when the Police reach the site, the Operator finds herself in jeopardy.
Emergency detection is done whenever an emergency call is made but reporting is possible only on Operator
Console. (DSS-45/DSS-70/DSS-PC)
How it works?
When any station makes an emergency call the system informs the Operator by giving a continuous ring and
displaying following message on line 1 of the LCD of the Operator Console.
EMERGENCY-2001
Operator needs to press ACK key to acknowledge the emergency call. On acknowledging the call, the ring on the
Operator Console stops.
Important Point:
In case an SLT is programmed to be an operator, this feature is not applicable.
Relevant Topics:
1. Emergency Dialing
2. Operator Console
=X=X=
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 113
Team/Focus/Empire
Extension Parameters
Whats this?
In an organization, all the extensions cannot have same characteristics. Each extension differs from the other
in one respect or the other like Flexible number, Toll Control, Class of Service, Flash timer, Extension Name
etc.
All the above parameters are explained in respective topics.
Use following parameters should be programmed for smooth functioning of the system apart from here,
Extension parameter report
Use following command to print/download the extension parameters 1 (first set of extension parameters) of all the
extensions:
115-2-1
Use following command to print/download the extension parameters 2 (second set of extension parameters) of all
the extensions:
115-2-2
Timer of Relevance:
Internal Digit-Digit (Inter Digit) Timer-It signifies the time for which the system waits for the extension
user to dial a digit. To elaborate: When the extension user picks up the handset, the system waits for internal
digit-digit timer and expects next digit. If the dialed digits match any extension number the call is places on
the extension. Alternately, if the dialed digits match any feature then corresponding action is taken by the
system. However, if the dialed digits neither match with an extension to with a feature then error tone is
issued.
Command: 217-08-Timer
Range: 01 to 99 seconds.
Default: 05 seconds
Relevant Topics:
1. Class of Service (COS)
2. Toll Control
3. Trunk Access
4. Call Pick Up
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 114
Team/Focus/Empire
Please note that this printout is for Team system. The printout for the Empire system is of 3 pages.
EXTENSION PARAMETERS1 AS ON 06-10-04(Wed) AT 14:54

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
F0 F1 TRUNK ACCESS F2F3F4 F5 F6 F7F8F9F10F11 F12 F F F Dir
EXT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 P P P 1 1 1 1 2
NO. DN DN DNDNDNDNDNDNDNDNDNDN DNDNDN DN 1 2 3 3 4 5 DNDN
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
21 22 11 YYYYYYYYYYYYYYYY N 6 0 0 0 3 000000 00 N Y N 0 0 N YYYY
22 22 11 YYYYYYYYYYYYYYYY N 6 0 0 0 3 000000 00 N Y N 0 0 N YYYY
23 22 11 YYYYYYYYYYYYYYYY N 6 0 0 0 3 000000 00 N Y N 0 0 N YYYY
24 22 11 YYYYYYYYYYYYYYYY N 6 0 0 0 3 000000 00 N Y N 0 0 N YYYY
25 22 11 YYYYYYYYYYYYYYYY N 6 0 0 0 3 000000 00 N Y N 0 0 N YYYY
26 22 11 YYYYYYYYYYYYYYYY N 6 0 0 0 3 000000 00 N Y N 0 0 N YYYY
27 22 11 YYYYYYYYYYYYYYYY N 6 0 0 0 3 000000 00 N Y N 0 0 N YYYY
28 22 11 YYYYYYYYYYYYYYYY N 6 0 0 0 3 000000 00 N Y N 0 0 N YYYY
29 22 11 YYYYYYYYYYYYYYYY N 6 0 0 0 3 000000 00 N Y N 0 0 N YYYY
30 22 11 YYYYYYYYYYYYYYYY N 6 0 0 0 3 000000 00 N Y N 0 0 N YYYY
31 22 11 YYYYYYYYYYYYYYYY N 6 0 0 0 3 000000 00 N Y N 0 0 N YYYY
32 22 11 YYYYYYYYYYYYYYYY N 6 0 0 0 3 000000 00 N Y N 0 0 N YYYY
33 22 11 YYYYYYYYYYYYYYYY N 6 0 0 0 3 000000 00 N Y N 0 0 N YYYY
34 22 11 YYYYYYYYYYYYYYYY N 6 0 0 0 3 000000 00 N Y N 0 0 N YYYY
35 22 11 YYYYYYYYYYYYYYYY N 6 0 0 0 3 000000 00 N Y N 0 0 N YYYY
36 22 11 YYYYYYYYYYYYYYYY N 6 0 0 0 3 000000 00 N Y N 0 0 N YYYY
371 22 11 YYYYYYYYYYYYYYYY N 6 0 0 0 3 000000 00 N Y N 0 0 N YYYY
372 22 11 YYYYYYYYYYYYYYYY N 6 0 0 0 3 000000 00 N Y N 0 0 N YYYY
373 22 11 YYYYYYYYYYYYYYYY N 6 0 0 0 3 000000 00 N Y N 0 0 N YYYY
374 22 11 YYYYYYYYYYYYYYYY N 6 0 0 0 3 000000 00 N Y N 0 0 N YYYY
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

F0 : Feature Access Level F5 : CB Programmed Amount F10: ACD For IC Calls
F1 : Class Of Service F6 : CB Current Amount F11: ACD Warning Only
F2 : DOSA F7 : CB Lock Level F13: Call Pick-Up Group
F3 : Flash Timer F8 : ACD For Local Calls F14: Hunt Group
F4 : CB On/Off F9 : ACD For LongDist Calls F15: Voice Mail Port
F12: Call Privacies For P1 = IR/BI/Raid, P2 = Trunk Call, P3 = DISA Call
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
MATRIX TEAM Ver: 7R9 (US) Page: 01

Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 115
Team/Focus/Empire
Please note that this printout is for Team system. The printout for the Empire system is of 3 pages.
=X=X=
EXTENSION PARAMETERS2 AS ON 06-10-04(Wed) AT 14:55

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
EXT FLEX# EXTENSION GUEST FLOOR NUMBER
NO. NAME GROUP
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
01 21 SERVICE 0
02 22 SERVICE 0
03 23 SERVICE 0
04 24 SERVICE 0
05 25 SERVICE 0
06 26 SERVICE 0
07 27 SERVICE 0
08 28 SERVICE 0
09 29 SERVICE 0
10 30 SERVICE 0
11 31 SERVICE 0
12 32 SERVICE 0
13 33 SERVICE 0
14 34 SERVICE 0
15 35 SERVICE 0
16 36 SERVICE 0
17 371 SERVICE 0
18 372 SERVICE 0
19 373 SERVICE 0
20 374 SERVICE 0

The Operator Extension Is 21 The Secondary Operator Extension Is 22
Floor Service Code Is 38
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
MATRIX TEAM Ver: 7R9 (US) Page: 01
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 116
Team/Focus/Empire
External Call Forward (ECF)
Whats this?
It is possible to divert the calls on your personal trunk line to your residence or your mobile number. This
facility of diverting your incoming trunk calls is known as External Call Forwarding or ECF in short.
How it works?
Call comes on the ECF enabled trunk
EPABX senses this call and checks for free destination
trunk. Meanwhile the caller gets RBT and P&T
Is destination
trunk free ?
No
Yes
EPABX answers the call, grabs the destination
trunk and gives RBT for time = ECF RBT timer
Is digit '1' / digit
'#' / no digit dialed
during ECF RBT
timer ?
Both trunks are released
End
Destination trunk is made free
A
EPABX dials destination number on destination
trunk. Caller gets music till dialing gets over.
EPABX turns 'ON' the DOSA inactivity timer.
Does the
caller get busy
tone / RBT ?
Caller should disconnect and retry
'#' '1' (To program ECF remotely)
No digit
dialed
Busy tone
RBT
Speech is etablished if
called party responds
No digit
dialed/digit '#'
dialed/digit other than
'#' dialed during DOSA
inactivity timer ?
B
Both trunks get released
Call gets disconnected after time =
DOSA inactivity timer + 10 seconds
End
End
Digit '#'
dialed
Digit other than
'#' dialed
No digit dialed
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 117
Team/Focus/Empire
How to program?
Step 1: Decide the trunk of which the calls are to be forwarded.
Step 2: Assign a destination trunk for the ECF trunk.
Step 3: Assign the destination number where the calls are to be forwarded.
Step 1
Use following command to enable/disable ECF on a trunk:
521-Trunk-Day Time-Night Time
Where,
Trunk is the trunk of which the calls are to be forwarded.
By default, ECF is off on all the trunks.
Step 2
Use following command to assign destination trunk to forward the calls of a trunk:
522-Trunk-Destination Trunk
Where,
Trunk is the trunk of which the calls are to be forwarded
Destination trunk could be 9 or 5 or 8-trunk. It signifies the trunk to be used by the Matrix PBX to dial out
Day Time Meaning
0 ECF Disable
1 ECF Enable
Night Time Meaning
0 ECF Disable
1 ECF Enable
B
The DOSA inactivity timer
gets re-loaded to set time
Speech continues
for set time
End
A
RBT stops. PBX waits for SA password
for time=Trunk inter digit timer
Is password not
dialed / wrong password
dialed / any other extension
in programmed or admin
mode Retry / Terminate
End
You get programming beeps, you can change destination
number / destination trunk / make ECF ON/OFF
Dial '#' to release the trunk
End
Yes
No
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 118
Team/Focus/Empire
the telephone number. If 9 or 5 programmed as destination trunk then any of the free trunks from group 9 or group 5
would be used for out dialing and if 8-trunk is programmed specific trunk would be used for dialing the number.
Step 3
Use following command to assign destination number where the calls are to be forwarded for a trunk:
523-Trunk-Telephone Number-#
Where,
Trunk is the trunk of which the calls are to be forwarded.
Telephone Number is the number (maximum 16 digits) where the calls are to be forwarded.
Example:
Program ECF on trunk 1 during night time. Destination trunk can be any free trunk from group 9. The calls
are to be forwarded to 316/828-6123.
521-1-0-1
522-1-9
523-1-3168286123-#
Timer of Relevance:
ECF RBT Timer-Time for which the system gives RBT to the caller as an acknowledgment of the receipt of
the call and after that the system dials the telephone number.
Command: 217-32-Timer
Range: 01 to 99 seconds
Default: 03 seconds
How to program ECF remotely?
It is likely that you will need to change the destination number remotely. Let us assume that normally during night
times and on holidays you receive your office calls at your residence. Now, if you go out to for a day to a relatives
place, you would like your office calls at the new number.
Make a call on the ECF enabled trunk.
The system answers the call and you get RBT for 3 seconds. During this RBT, dial 1.
The RBT stops.
Dial the administration password (Not programming password).
You get programming beeps.
Dial the command to change the destination number OR the destination trunk OR make ECF Off.
You get confirmation tone if the command is accepted.
Wait for programming beeps to start again.
Dial # to conclude the ECF programming. No other programming commands except the commands for
controlling the relay port (155-1 and 155-0) will be accepted in this mode.
Important Points:
ECF calls are same as DOSA calls. The ECF call shall get disconnected after time = DOSA Inactivity
Timer + DOSA Wait Timer. Hence to continue as ECF call, it is mandatory for the user to dial any digit
after the warning beeps.
ECF on all trunks is off by factory default.
Default destination trunk for any trunk is the next trunk.
By default no destination telephone numbers are stored.
The calls can be forwarded to a mobile phone.
The calls can be forwarded to a location where long distance calls is allowed. However, for this the destination
trunkshould be given the long distance calls access and the long distance calls lock should be open.
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 119
Team/Focus/Empire
Relevant Topics:
1. Trunk Access
2. DOSA
=X=X=
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 120
Team/Focus/Empire
External Music
Whats this?
A music-on-hold of your choice can be played while you keep a party on hold. The Matrix PBX has one
audio input port, which is used for connecting external source of music.
How to use it?
Connect a music source that matches the technical specifications of our port. The technical specifications of
our external music port are:
Port Type Audio Signals
Signal Range 0-2V peak-to-peak (Maximum)
DC bias telerance Not more than 10V DC
Any external device meeting above specifications can be connected with the system. The volume must be
set to a level such that the music on the trunks is not very low or very high. Volume of the signal coming
from this device must never increase beyond the specified limits.
How it works?
When you connect an external music source to the audio port (a male Casio jack), the internal music stops
and external music gets connected to the extension/trunk kept on hold. In all systems except Empire, extensions get
internal music whereas only the trunk if kept on hold gets external music. In Empire system, extensions also get
external music.
Important Points:
The pre-amplified output (marked AUX) of tape-recorder, Walkman, CD player or TV should be used as a
music source and it should be connected to the external music port of the Matrix PBX.
If signal voltage increases beyond 2V (peak-to-peak) then the speech quality may deteriorate.
If the DC bias increases beyond 10V then it will damage the external music port.
In Empire model, to connect external music following steps need to be done:
Switch OFF the system.
Open the system. Change the position of the music jumper J2 on the tone card
Close the system and switch it ON.
The external music port is audio input port and no electrical signal of higher value than the specified
limit should be applied to this port. This may result in permanent damage to the system. Matrix
warranty does not cover damages resulting from improper use.
=X=X=
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 121
Team/Focus/Empire
Fax Homing
Whats this?
Due to scarcity of trunk lines, it is often required to use the same trunk line for speech as well as for fax. The
Matrix PBX has the capability to detect fax tone over trunk line and route the call to the extension where the
fax machine is connected, provided fax tone of 1100Hz (CNG signal, CNG stands for calling) is available
from the callers end. This feature of routing the fax call to the fax machine and a speech call to the operator
automatically is known as Fax Homing.
How it works?
How to program?
Use following command to enable/disable fax homing on the trunk:
44-Trunk-Day Time-Night Time
Where,
Trunk is from 0 to 9.
Call comes on trunk fax
homing enabled trunk
PBX answers the call after 5
seconds. Caller gets beep
PBX gives music to the caller for 4
seconds (or Voice Message)
PBX waits for CNG signal for time = Fax
homing wait timer. Caller gets beeps
Is CNG signal
available ?
PBX routes the call to the
programmed destination (normally
operator) just like normal call
PBX routes the call to the extension
where the fax machine is connected
No
Yes
End End
Day Time Meaning
0 Enable fax homing
1 Disable fax homing
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 122
Team/Focus/Empire
Night Time Meaning
0 Enable fax homing
1 Disable fax homing
Use following command to program an extension as fax destination:
49-Trunk-Extension
Where,
Trunk is from 0 to 9.
Extension is the flexible number assigned to the extension.
Example:
To enable fax homing on trunk 1 on day time and disable it in night time with fax destination as extension
23, dial
44-1-1-0
49-1-23
With this programming the fax calls in daytime will go to extension 23 and speech calls will come to the
operator(or landing destination).
Timer of Relevance:
Fax Homing Wait Timer-Time for which the system senses the CNG signal on the trunk.
Command: 217-23-Timer
Range: 01 to 99 seconds.
Default: 06 seconds
Important Points:
It is possible to activate fax homing on more than one trunk.
Fax homing may not work if the caller does not give the CNG signal during the time = Fax Homing Wait
Timer even if fax homing feature is enabled.
The fax machine at the receiving end should be in auto-receive mode.
It is possible to enable fax homing, DID simultaneously on one trunk. In such case, the Matrix PBX
sense for CNG signal, Digit 1 or any extension number for time = fax homing wait timer.
If CNG signal is available, the system route the call to the fax destination.
If digit 1 is dialed the system understands it to a DOSA call and waits for valid extension number and
dynamic lock password.
If any extension number is dialed then the system routes the call to that extension number.
If nothing happens of the above three options then the call goes to the landing destination (generally the
operator) after time = fax homing wait timer.
=X=X=
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 123
Team/Focus/Empire
Flash Timer
Whats this?
While transferring a call, one uses the hook switch or the Flash key provided on the telephone instrument
or digit 1 if the telephone instrument is in pulse mode.
Many times it happens that while transferring the call, the call either gets disconnected or is not transferred.
This happens due to mismatch of time for which the hook switch is pressed, if used for transferring the call
hence it is advisable to use Flash Key of the telephone instrument. This problem may occur with Flash Key
also, if the timer for the Flash Key on the telephone instrument and the flash timer of the system are not set
properly.
Few telephone instruments have flash timers set to 800 ms. In such case the call does not get transferred
because the flash timer of all extension lines is set at 600 ms by default. In such cases the flash timer of the extension
line where the cordless phone is connected should be increased to 800ms.
Use following command to set Flash Timer:
36-Extension-Count
Where,
Extension is the flexible number assigned to the extension.
Count is from 2 to 9. (count 1 implies 100 milliseconds)
By default, Flash Timer is 6 (600 milliseconds)
Use following command to set same Flash timer on all extensions:
36-*-Count
Example:
To set the flash timer 800ms on extension 23, dial 36-23-8.
Important Point:
Flash timer should be changed very cautionsly.
=X=X=
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 124
Team/Focus/Empire
Flexible Numbers
Whats this?
The Matrix PBX offers flexibility to assign a code of your choice to access an extension. This code is called
flexible number. For example, to access first extension one has to dial 21. It is possible to change this code to
any other number of your choice.
Matrix offers flexible configuration. Configuration can be changed by using different Extension-Line
(commonly called EL) cards and Extension cards. Our Team and Focus models can be re-configured using
EL-104 card, EL-203 card and EXT-005 card whereas Empire model can be reconfigured using EL-206 card
and EXT-008 card. When you change the configuration to suit to your requirement by inserting any of these
cards, a need to change the extension numbers arises many times. Now while doing flexible numbering,
hardware port number and corresponding default extension numbers are required. For the purpose, the
hardware port numbers and default extension numbers for various products are given in the table below:
The system loads default flexible numbers to all the extensions on first power ON. Later on the extensions
can be assigned desired flexible numbers.
Following table shows the flexible numbers assigned to the port is default state.
How to program?
Use following command to program the flexible number for an extension:
37-Port Number-Flexible Number-#/Flash
Where,
Port Number is from 01 to 96 (Please refer above table)
Flexible number can be of 1,2,3 or 4 digits.
Terminate the command using #/Flash, if flexible number is of less than four digits.
Use following command to assign default flexible numbers to all the ports:
37-*-0
Use following command to clear flexible number for a particular extension:
37-Port Number-Flash
Use following command to clear flexible numbers for all extensions:
37-*-Flash
Model Port Number
Default Flexible
Numbers
01-16 21-36
17-20 371-374
01-32 201-232
33-36 233-236
37-40 301-304
01-36 201-236
37-72 301-336
73-96 241-264
Team
Focus
Empire
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 125
Team/Focus/Empire
Example::
Port 01 to 04 should be assigned flexible numbers as 31 to 34 and port from 05 to 08 should be assigned
flexible numbers as 21 to 24
37-01-31-#
37-02-32-#
37-03-33-#
37-04-34-#
37-05-21-#
37-06-22-#
37-07-23-#
37-08-24-#
Important Points:
Flexible numbers are the codes dialed from dial phase to call another extension. These flexible numbers
should be unique and should not match with any other extension or any of the features available from the
dial phase.
It is possible to have single digit, 2-digits, 3-digits and 4-digits flexible numbers.
It is also possible that few extensions have single digit, few have 2-digits, few have 3-digits and remaining have
four digit flexible numbers.
It is not possible to give any extension, flexible number as 1.
Flexible number having common digits cant be assigned to another extension. For example if 3101 is
used then 310 cant be used/programmed. Same way if 3111 is used then 311 cant be used/programmed.
Same flexible number cannot be assigned to two different extensions. For example, if you have used 211
for one extension then 211 cant be assigned to any other extension if both the extensions are in the same
tenant group.
It is possible to clear the flexible number of all the extensions.
When the flexible number of an extension is cleared, one cannot call that extension. However the
extension with null flexible number can make calls as usual.
Use flexible numbers for all the features used from User mode. Software port numbers are to be used only
during for SE mode or SA mode.
If any flexible number starts with a digit used for feature code then the feature can be used after preferring
it with *. For e.g. if an extension is assigned flexible number 44 then code for Raid becomes *4
The system prints HPnn in place of regular extension number if that port is not assigned a number.
Where, nn is the hardware port number. This appears in printouts of various SMDR and configuration
reports.
While programming a system with greater configuration, it is recommended to clear all the ports first and
then program the desirable extension numbers. This will make the programming easy, fast and error-free.
37-*-Flash
37-01-101-#
37-02-102-# and so on
In default condition, no extension can be assigned flexible number 38 or station with 38. If an extension
has to be assigned flexible number 38 or starting with 38 then please clean the floor service code and then
assign the flexible number.
No extension can be assigned flexible number 39 or starting with 39.
Relevant Topic:
1. Hotel Applications
=X=X=
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 126
Team/Focus/Empire
Help Reports
Whats this?
Though desirable, it is not feasible to remember all the features and programming codes. Sometimes the
system manual gets lost and it is required to make changes in the programming. During such situations, it is
very difficult to change programming without proper reference documents.
To help out during such situations, the Matrix PBX provides Help Reports.
Help reports are divided in to two parts viz. Feature help report and Programming help report
Feature Help report needs one page. All the features are arranged in alphabetical order for easy searching.
Programming Help report needs 7 pages. Following table shows which commands are available on which
page of the printouts.
Section Pages
System Commands Pages 1-2
System Parameters Commands Pages 3-4
Extension Parameters Commands Page 5
Trunk Parameters Commands Page 6
DSS-70 Paramters Commands Page 7
Each command is printed in a separate line. Command description is followed by the code.
All the features and programming codes can be printed on the standard printer.
How to use it?
Dial 115-6 : For Feature Help Report from SE/SA Mode.
Dial 115-7 : For Programming Help Report from SE/SA Mode.
Please note that the actual reports are not attached here since they can be had from the system.
=X=X=
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 127
Team/Focus/Empire
Hold
Whats this?
This feature allows the user to put the present party on hold.
How to use it?
How to program?
Hold is a programmable feature. Please refer class of service(COS) for details on how to permit Hold to a user.
Relevant Topics:
1. Class of Service (COS)
2. Flash Timer
=X=X=
1
Speech with one
extension/external caller.
2 Dial Flash.
Extension goes on hold and gets music/voice
message. You get feature tone.
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 128
Team/Focus/Empire
Hotel Applications
Whats this?
The system offers few basic hotel features like Floor Service, Guest Group, Service Group, Check-In/
Check-Out, Temporary Check-In/Check-Out, Private Trunk and Remote Alarm. However, all these features
can also be used in office applications depending upon the requirement.
Hotel Name Programming
Hotel name can be programmed in the system so that the name appears in the first line of the check-in/
check-out and all other reports. If this feature is used in office then company name would appear in all
reports.
How to program?
Use following command to program the hotel name:
201-Hotel Name
Where,
Hotel Name is a maximum of 80 characters.
This command can be issued only from DSS-70/DSS-PC. Please note that DSS-45 doesnt support Name
programming. (Please refer DSS-70 USers Guide for more details)
Floor Service
In hotels, all the rooms on one floor have a service room for room boys. The guests are required to dial an
extension number (we call it a floor service code) to call the room boy. It is required that all the guests are
given common code say 4 for room boy, just as we have 0 for operator but in this case the call should go
to the service room of the corresponding floor only i.e. if room no.101 dials 4 then the call should go to
110 and if 304 dials 4 then the call should go to 310. This feature is known as floor service.
For hotel Applications, it is advisable to give extension numbers same as room number. For e.g. room
number 101 shall have station 101, room number 102 shall have extension 102 and so on.
Room No.
301
Room No.
302
Room No.
303
Room No.
304
Room No.
310
Guest Room Service
Holiday Inn
Room No.
201
Room No.
202
Room No.
203
Room No.
204
Room No.
210
Room No.
101
Room No.
102
Room No.
103
Room No.
104
Room No.
110
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 129
Team/Focus/Empire
How to program?
Step 1: Take a paper pad and pen.
Step 2: Make a group of all extensions on one floor using command 305.
Step 3: Assign service extension for each group using command 2042.
Step 4: Assign unique code to be used as floor extension code using command 2041.
Step 1
Take a pen and paper pad. Make the groups as per the requirement.
Step 2
Use following command to assign a group number to all extensions on one floor:
305-Extension-Group Number
Where,
Extension is the flexible number assigned to the extension.
Group Number is from 0 to 9.
Step 3
Use following command to assign service extension for each group:
2042-Group-Extension
Where,
Group is from 0 to 9
Extension is the flexible number assigned to the extension.
Step 4
Use following command to assign an unique code to be used as floor service code:
2041-Floor Service Code
Where,
Floor Service Code can be of one digit, two digits, three digits or four digits. Use # to terminate the
command if less than four digits used as floor service code.
By default, the floor service code is 38.
Example:
Program the floor service code 4 for Holiday Inn with room distribution as shown in the diagram above,
Use following command to accomplish above program.
305-101-1
305-102-1
305-103-1
305-104-1
305-201-2
305-202-2
305-203-2
305-204-2
305-301-3
305-302-3
305-303-3
305-304-3
2042-1-110
2042-2-210
2402-3-310
2041-4
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 130
Team/Focus/Empire
Important Points:
Floor service code by default is 38.
Default floor service extension for each group is 22.
Please refer the System Parameters Report to know the programmed values for Floor Service.
Guest/Service Group
Privacy of the guests is very important in hotels. A guest should not be allowed to dial an unknown guest
and disturb him. Most of the guests need to communicate only with reception, operator, room service and
such other service extensions. He is not required to dial other guest.
Some times, a group of guests (a family or a party) occupies multiple rooms. In such cases, members of the
group would like to communicate among themselves and with service extensions. Hence the system should
be programmed to facilitate this. However, they should be stopped from dialing other guests.
Essentially we need following logic:
1. A service extension should be able to dial any other service extension or any guest. All service extensions
should be put in one group viz. 9.
2. A guest staying alone should be allowed to dial only the service extensions. He should not be allowed to
dial any guest extension. A single guest should be classified as group 0.
3. A extension belonging to a group should be allowed to dial the service extensions and other extensions
belonging to his group. But he should not be allowed to dial any other guest. Such a group of extensions
can be assigned any group number from 1 to 8.
Maximum 8 groups or parties can be accommodated at a time. Once a group checks-out, the same group
number can be assigned to a new group who checks in.
Following diagram depicts this logic:
Universal group
9
Solo group
0
Party group
1
Party group
2
Universal group
9
Party group
1
Party group
8
Party group
2
How to program?
When a group of guests arrives, the receptionist has to issue this command to put the guests in a specific
group.
Use following command to assign a group number to a guest that has checked in:
38-Extension-Group Number
Where,
Extension is the flexible number assigned to the extension.
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 131
Team/Focus/Empire
Group Number Description
0 Guest group
1 to 8 Party group
9 Service group
Use following command to assign same group number to all the guests those who have checked in:
38-*-Group Number
By default, all extensions are in service group.
Example:
Program the system for following conditions:
Two groups and a solo guest have approached your hotel. Each group requires 3 rooms. One group is allotted room
number 101, 102 and 104 and other group is allotted room number 201, 202 and 203. An individual guest is in
room 103. Laundry, house keeping and kitchen are in service group.
Use following commands to accomplish the requirement:
38-101-1
38-102-1
38-104-1
38-201-2
38-202-2
38-203-2
38-103-0
Important Point:
Single guest is checked-in in guest group 0, by default.
Check-In/Check-Out
When the system is used in hotels, check in and check out functions are to be performed. These function help to
Keep track of the calls made from any room.
Know the room status.
Lock/unlock rooms extension automatically to avoid misuse.
When a guest arrives at the hotel and the receptionist checks in the guest, the system performs following
functions.
New account is opened for that extension for the telephone calls.
The extension is unlocked for long distance/Local calls depending on the set lock level.
Room status is changed to occupied.
The system also prompts you to enter guest name. (This feature is available only with DSS-70 and DSS-PC).
Since DSS-45 does not support Name programming, press Hold key when system prompts to enter the name.
Similarly, when a guest leaves the hotel and the receptionist checks out the guest. The system performs
following functions, every time a check out command is issued.
Detailed SMDR report with summary for that extension is printed.
The extension is locked for long distance/Local calls depending on the set lock level.
Room status changes to not cleaned.
How to use it?
On arrival of the guest, the receptionist should check in the guest using following command:
3*1-Extension-1
Where,
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 132
Team/Focus/Empire
Extension is the flexible number assigned to the extension.
On issuing this command from the Operator Console the system prompts the receptionist to enter guest
name.
Example:
Check in Mr. Patel in room number 101.
3*1-101-1-Mr. John
The receptionists should check out the guest when he/she leaves the hotel using following command:
3*1-Extension-0
Where,
Extension is the flexible number assigned to the extension.
Example:
Check out Mr. John from room number 101.
3*1-101-0
Important Point:
These commands do not work if the printer is not attached.
Extension Name Programming
In this case you have entered wrong name of the guest then to change the guests name, this command can be
used. Guest (extension) name programming is a good idea because the name appears on his call checkout
report with his room number. Also when the guest calls the reception for any assistance, his name displayed
on the Operator Console. The receptionist can greet the guest with his name. Fox example:, Good morning
Mr. John. This is a personalized service and the guest is likely to feel happy hearing his name.
How to program?
Use following command to program the extension name:
3*2-Extension Number-Extension Name
Where,
Extension Number is the flexible number assigned to the extension.
Extension Name can be of maximum 16 characters.
Example:
To respell Mr. John as Mr. Jack checked-in in room number(extension) 101, dial
3*2-101-Mr. Jack
Important Point:
This command can be used from DSS-70 and DSS-PC only. (Please refer DSS-70 users Guide for more
details)
Temporary Check-In and Check-Out
The Matrix PBX offers a facility of temporary check-in/check-out. Using this feature locks/unlocks the
extension for outgoing calls thereby avoiding any misuse. It is advisable to the receptionist to temporary
check-out the guest when the guest leaves the room.
Doing so, the system locks the extension as per the dynamic toll control. Similarly when the guest comes
back to the room the system unlocks the extension.
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 133
Team/Focus/Empire
How to use it?
The receptionist should use following commands to temporary Checkout the guest:
3*3-Extension-0
Where,
Extension is the flexible number assigned to the extension.
The receptionist should use following commands to temporary Check-in the guest:
3*3-Extension-1
Where,
Extension is the flexible number assigned to the extension.
Example:
Mr. John (guest of room no. 101) leaves the hotel at 09.30 am and returns back in the evening at 08.00 P.M. Use
temporary check-in/check-out feature.
The receptionist should issue following command at 09:30 AM.
3*3-101-0
The receptionists should issue following command at 08:00 PM.
3*3-101-1
Private Trunk
The Matrix PBX offers a flexibility to assign a dedicated trunk to an extension.
On programming a trunk as Private trunk for an extension:
All the incoming calls land directly on the assigned extension.
HOD gets activated on the trunk.
This feature is also Direct Inward Line (DIL)
How to use it?
Use following command to program a trunk as private trunk:
3*4-Extension-Trunk
Where,
Extension is the flexible number assigned to the extension.
Trunk is from 0 to 9.
Example:
Program trunk 2 as private trunk for extension 101.
3*4-101-2
Use following command to cancel private trunk:
3*4-Extension-0
Where,
Extension is the flexible number assigned to the extension.
Example:
Cancel trunk 2 as private trunk from extension 101.
3*4-101-0
Important Points:
When checkout command is given for the extension, private trunk feature gets cancelled automatically.
Trunk 0 cannot be enabled as private trunk.
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 134
Team/Focus/Empire
Room Status Display
When a guest walks in for registration in a hotel, the receptionist can find out which rooms are available, immediately.
This feature is available only with Operator Console. Status of all the rooms is displayed on the Operator Console.
Any room can have one of the following status:
Sr. Room Status LED Indication
1 Vacant (Available) Off
2 Vacant but not cleaned Blinking
3 Occupied On
A vacant room is allotted to a new guest at the time of registration. At this time the receptionist uses check-
in command. The check-in command changes the status of the room from Vacant to Occupied. This is
indicated with extension LED on the Operator Console continuously glowing.
When the guest leaves the hotel, the receptionist uses the checkout command. With this command, the room
status automatically changes to Vacant but not cleaned. This is indicated on the Operator Console with the
room LED blinking. Now, when the room boy cleans the room, he must dial 3997 from the room extension.
This changes the room status from Not Cleaned to Vacant. The LED corresponding to the room on the
Operator Console goes off.
How to use it?
Use following command to know the room status:
FUN-1-1
Remote Alarm Status
While going to sleep, the receptionist can verify whether the wake-up alarms are set or not. It is possible to
check pending alarms without entering SA or SE mode. The Operator Console allows checking the pending alarms.
How to use it?
Use following command to check wake-up alarm set on any extension:
FUN-12
On giving this command, the LEDs of the extensions (DSS keys) with pending alarms turn ON.
Message Wait
During daytime, guests go out for their work. There may be calls when they are not present in the hotel. The
receptionist notes down the messages for the guest and gives them when they return in the evening. But,
there are chances of lapses if receptionist gets changed. The Matrix PBX helps in avoiding such mistakes.
The receptionist can use this feature. As soon as there is a call for a guest who is not presently in his room,
the receptionist sets a message wait on the guests extension. If message wait feature is set on a guest
extension, his extension rings for 5 to 10 seconds every half an hour or so. Now, in the evening when the
guest enters his room, the telephone rings after some time automatically. As soon as the guest answers the
ring, he will be connected to the receptionist. At the reception, on the Operator Console Extension - Give
Message message is displayed thereby reminding the receptionist to pass on the pending message.
How to use it?
Use following command to sets message wait on the guests extension:
FUN-4-Extension-1
Where,
Fun is a DSS function key.
Extension is the flexible number assigned to the extension.
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 135
Team/Focus/Empire
Use following command to cancel message on the guests extension:
FUN-4-Extension-0
Example:
To set message wait feature on extension 101,
Dial FUN-4-101-1 from Operator Console.
Important Points:
This feature is available only with Operator Console.
Once the message is given, it is cleared automatically.
Timers of Relevance:
Message Wait Ring Count-Number of times the extension should ring after message wait is set.
Command: 217-15-Timer
Range: 01 to 99 seconds
Default: 20 seconds
Message Wait Ring Interval Timer-Time after which the extension should ring.
Command: 217-16-Timer
Range: 01 to 99 minutes
Default: 30 minutes
Message Wait Ring Timer-Time for which the extension should ring at a time.
Command: 217-17-Timer
Range: 01 to 99 seconds.
Default: 15 seconds
Remote Alarm
In hotel applications, it is desirable to set wake up alarms for guests from the reception. We cannot expect
guests to set alarms on their own because of the obvious reasons. The system allows remote alarms setting
with and without Operator Console.
Once the remote alarm is set, the system gives ring to the guest at the set time. The guest extension rings for
some time. If the guest wakes up and answers the ring, he gets music or recorded message.
In case the guest does not respond to the ring and keeps sleeping, the system continues alarm ring on his
extension for 90 seconds. After that, the system gives ring to the operator. If Operator Console is used,
Alarm Ring extension message is displayed. At this time, both the guests extension and the operator are
ringing simultaneously. This is done to inform the receptionist that the guest has not woken up. He can send
room-boy to knock on the door and wake up the guest.
How to use it?
Commands:
164-Extension-1-Minutes : To set duration alarm on the extension.
164-Extension-2-Hour-Minute : To set time alarm on the extension.
164-Extension-3-Hour-Minute : To set daily alarm on the extension.
164-Extension-0 : To cancel all alarms on the extension.
Important Point:
For more details, please refer topic Alarms.
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 136
Team/Focus/Empire
Room Shift
Many times a guest insists on changing his room. This could be shifting from a single room to double room
or from non air-conditioned to air-conditioned room. In such cases, the original extension used by the guest
will be different from the new extension he uses after he moves. But, continuity must be maintained in the
SMDR buffer and also to allow him the same class of service. This is taken care by this feature room shift.
Following functions are done by the system when room shift feature is used:
SMDR records are transferred in the name of new extension.
Class of Service (COS) is transferred.
Call budgeting, if active is transferred to the new extension.
Private line, if active is transferred to the new extension.
Message wait, if active is transferred to the new extension.
Alarms, if active is transferred to the new extension.
How to use it?
Use following command, when guest is shift his present room to another room:
142-Original Extension-New Extension
Example:
Suppose a guest in room 101 has been shifted to room 102 then, dial
142-101-102
Important Points:
The source must be occupied or checked in extension.
The destination room must be unoccupied or checked out.
After the shift, source rooms status becomes checked-out and not cleaned.
After the shift, destination rooms status becomes checked-in and occupied
Check-In/Check-Out serial Numbers
To increase accountability, the system assigns each check-in a new serial number. The management can keep
track of this serial number to ensure that all the check-ins are accounted for.
The serial number is of 4-digits
The serial number is generated by the system and cannot be changed.
At the time of check-in a new serial number is assigned to this check-in.
The serial number is printed on the checkout report.
Serial number is cleared to 0000 whenever factory default settings are loaded.
It is incremented by one at the time of each new check-in.
It rolls over from 9999 to 0000.
PMS Interface
More and more hotels are using computer for billing, administration and accounts. A typical hotel will have
a computerized billing system taking care of guest billing. This application software running on the
computer is known as Property Management Software (PMS). Please note that Matrix does not provide
PMS.
The Matrix PBX maintains the details of the telephone calls only. Hence, the receptionists. Matrix has
developed a feature, which would make the exchange of information possible between the Matrix PBX and
the PMS.
Following table summarized information flow between the two system:
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 137
Team/Focus/Empire
Computer to PBX PBX to Computer
Check-In command with guest name SMDR records
Check-Out command SMDR reports
Alarm settings on a guest room Configuration reports
Extension lock/open commands
Programming commands
How it works?
Following functional components are needed make this synchronization work:
Personal Computer hardware with a spare serial port (not supplied by Matrix).
Hotel Software (commonly called PMS) with capabilities of interfacing with the Matrix PBX (not supplied
by Matrix).
The Matrix PBX with capability to interact with the computer (supplied by Matrix)
The second item in the above table list is a critical component. The PMS must be capable of interfacing with
the Matrix PBX. When the user issues a check-in command on the computer, the PMS should do its job and
send a suitable command to the Matrix PBX. When the guest checks out, the user shall issue only one
command on the computer. In this case, the PMS shall perform following tasks:
Room tariff, food, laundry and other calculations.
Send check out command to the Matrix PBX.
Get telephone calls detail from the Matrix PBX.
Include this in the bill.
Print the final bill, etc.
Setting Up:
Locate a spare communication port on the PC.
Switch off the Matrix PBX and the PC.
Connect the Matrix PBX and the computer using the Matrix communication cable. This cable is supplied
by Matrix as an optional item.
Switch on the Matrix PBX and the PC.
Enter programming mode from any extension.
Set the communication port for computer connectivity mode using command: 131-2
Exit programming mode.
Now the Matrix PBX is ready to accept commands from the serial port.
The Matrix PBX can accept commands from any software running on the computer. It can be hotel
management software(PMS) or standard communication software like ProComm or Bitcomm.
Hardware Interface:
The hardware interface between the Matrix PBX and the computer is through the serial port (RS 232).
The communication port works on following settings:
Baud Rate : 2400bps
Parity Bit : None
Data Bits : 8
Stop Bit : 1
Set Flow Control to None
Software Interface:
The Matrix PBX can take and execute all programming commands
Commands is of three parts:
Command prefix P or F
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 138
Team/Focus/Empire
Actual command
<Ent>
Please note that P is used as prefix letter for all programming commands.
Please note that F is used as prefix letter for all non-programming commands.
If the command is accepted and executed successfully by the system, it responds with Y.
If the command is found invalid, the system responds with N
Following commands can be given by the PMS.
Description Command
Check-in F3*1-Extension-1-<Ent>
Checkout F3*1-Extension-0-<Ent>
Lock an extension when the guest leaves his room F3*3-Extension-0-<Ent>
Open the lock when the guest returns to the hotel F3*3-Extension-1-<Ent>
Guest name F3*2-Extension-Name-<Ent>
Remote Alarm F64-Extension-1-minute
F64-Extension-2-hour-minute
F64-Extension-3-hour-minute
F64-Extension-0
Private Trunk F3*4-Extension-trunk
Message Wait F4-Extension-1
F4-Extension-0
When the communication port is being used for PMS and the online mode for downloading of call details is set the
PMS receive all the call details that are being sent to the comm. port. Now on issuing check-out report, PBX again
sends the call details to the PMS. This results in duplication of call details for the PMS. This needs to be avoided.
The duplication of call details can be controlled by enabling/disabling the transfer of call details to comm. port.
Use the following command to enable/disable the transfer of call details to comm. port:
2671-Code
Where,
Code Meaning
1 Send call details to communication port/printer port
0 Do not send call details to communication port/printer port
Relevant Topics:
1. CLI Display
2. SMDR
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 139
Team/Focus/Empire
=X=X=
SMDR CALLS REPORT : CHECK-IN/OUT ROOM NO. - 21 AS ON 06-10-04(Wed) AT 15

GUEST NAME : Check-In-Out Serial No.: 0

CHECK-IN ON : 01-01-01 AT 01:01:01 CHECK-OUT ON : 01-01-01 AT 01:01:01

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
SR EXT1-EXT2 T NUMBER DATE TIME DUR RATE UNITS AMOUNT REM
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------











--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Local Calls : 0 Time : 0 Units : 0 Amt. : 0.00
Long 0 Calls : 0 Time : 0 Units : 0 Amt. : 0.00
Long 00 Calls : 0 Time : 0 Units : 0 Amt. : 0.00
Total Calls : 0 Time : 0 Units : 0 Amt. : 0.00
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
MATRIX TEAM Ver: 7R9 (US) Page: 01
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 140
Team/Focus/Empire
Hotline
Whats this?
The Matrix PBX offers three types of hotline viz. Hotline-Trunk, Hotline-External Number and Hotline-
Internal.
Hotline-Trunk
You get connected to a trunk, the moment you lift the handset.
This feature is useful when you are making more number of trunk calls compared to internal calls. Once
this feature is enabled, as soon as you lift the handset you get the trunk dial tone after the set time.
This feature is also called Hot Outward Dialing (HOD).
If 9 or 5 is used as trunk, then any of the free trunks from group 9 or 5 will be given to the extension
user the moment he picks up the handset.
To set Hotline-Trunk
Example:
To simulate dialing of trunk 2 immediately on lifting the handset, Dial 151-2
Hotline-External Number
You get connected to a desired external number the moment you lift the handset.
This feature is useful when you are making call to a particular external number many times in a day. Once
this feature is enabled, as soon as you lift the handset, the system dials the telephone number and you get
connected to the external person.
This feature is also called Hotline with Number.
To set Hotline-External Number:
Example:
Let us activate Hotline for external number 316/828-8650. Let us assume group 9.
Dial following code to set this feature:
152-9-3168288650-#
Hotline-Internal
Hotline-Internal helps avoiding repeated dialing of an extension number.
Simply by lifting the handset, the caller gets connected to the programmed extension.
In an office environment, it is found that a boss calls his secretary or his co-worker frequently. This feature
could be of great help to him.
This feature is also called Boss-Secretary feature.
To set Hotline - Internal
1 Lift the handset. Dial tone
2 Dial 151-Trunk. Confirmation tone
1 Lift the handset. Dial tone
2 Dial 153-Extension. Confirmation tone
1 Lift the handset. Dial tone
2 Dial 152-Trunk-Number-#. Confirmation tone
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 141
Team/Focus/Empire
Example:
The boss needs to speak to his secretary (extension number 22) many times in a day. He can avoid repeated
dialing by activating the Hotline-Internal feature from his extension:
153-22
Delayed Hotline
After lifting the handset you do not get connected to the extension immediately but get regular dial tone. If
the user does not dial anything during this short dial tone, the Matrix PBX places the hotline call to the
extension. This delay timer allows the user to dial other numbers without cancelling hotline.
To Set Hotline Timer:
The default value of Hotline timer is 5 seconds and its range is 1-9 seconds.
The Hotline timer cannot be set to 0 seconds.
Cancel Hotline:
Please note that the cancellation code must be dialed from the Matrix PBX dial tone. If the Hotline timer is
1second, you have to be very quick in dialing the code.
How to program?
Hotline is a programmable feature. Please refer class of service(COS) for details on how to allow Hotline to a
user.
Important Points:
Only one type of Hotline can be activated on the same extension at the same time.
Delayed HOD is possible on an extension i.e. After lifting the handset you do not get connected to the
external number immediately instead you get a regular Matrix dial tone. You get connected to the external
number only after the set time. This allows you to dial other numbers without cancelling HOD.
Hotline and HOD cannot be activated on the same extension at the same time.
HOD cannot be activated on trunk 5 and 9 because system understands it to be group 5 and group 9.
HOD may not work if you program it for the trunk, which is not accessible from your extension.
Relevant Topics:
1. Class Of Service (COS)
2. Toll Control
=X=X=
1 Lift the handset. Dial tone
2 Dial 154-Seconds. Confirmation tone
1 Lift the handset. Dial tone
2 Dial 150. Confirmation tone
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 142
Team/Focus/Empire
Interrupt Request
Whats this?
When your call is urgent and you cannot wait for the called person to become free, you can land in his
conversation after intimating him.
While landing, you get ring back tone and the called person gets beeps for 45 seconds.
During the beeps, the called person can dial Flash-1 to answer your call. He can talk to you while his
previous partner is put on hold and gets music.
Replace your handset once your talk is over. This will automatically restore his original speech with the
held-up party.
How to use it?
How to program?
Interrupt Request is a programmable feature. Please refer class of service(COS) for details on how to allow
Interrupt Request to a user.
Timer of Relevance:
Interrupt Request Timer-Time for which the extension on which interrupt request is made gets the beeps:
Command: 217-11-Timer
Range: 01 to 99 seconds
Default: 45 seconds
Important Points:
Interrupt Request works even when the destination is talking on a trunk line.
Interrupt Request is ineffective if the called person is having call privacy from Interrupt Request.
The called party can toggle both the calls.
Interrupt Request cannot be made on operator console.
Relevant Topics:
1. Class Of Service (COS)
2. Privacy
=X=X=
1 Lift the handset. Dial tone
2 Dial number. Busy tone
3 Dial 3.
Music. The destination
gets beep.
4
Start talking when the called extension
includes you by dialing Flash-1.
Speech.
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 143
Team/Focus/Empire
Last Number Redial
Whats this?
This feature redials the last external number dialed.
This feature saves time during retrying a busy external number.
How to use it?
Timer of Relevance:
Redial Digit Wait Timer-It is the time for which the system waits before dialing the number on the trunk
line.
Command: 217-36-Timer
Range: 01 to 99 seconds
Default: 02 seconds
Important Point:
The system uses the same trunk you used for dialing the number last time.
=X=X=
1 Lift the handset. Dial tone
2 Dial 7. Silence.
3 The system grabs a trunk. Trunk dial tone
4
The system dials out the last
number.
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 144
Team/Focus/Empire
Maturity
Whats this?
A call is said to be matured when the called party lifts the telephone and answers the call. The Matrix PBX
should bill the call only when call matures. This information about the call maturity should be given to the
Matrix PBX. The details of the call are stored in the SMDR buffer. There are six methods to sense maturity.
1. Reversal
2. Delay
3. CPD + Delay
4. Only CPD
5. Off-line CPD + Delay
6. 12 KHz/16 KHz Metering
Reversal
Central office provides this signal. Whenever the called party lifts the handset to answer, central office
senses it and gives a signal (The polarity of battery feed gets reversed) to the caller. This signal is sensed
by the Matrix PBX and the system starts the duration meter.
Delay
If the reversal facility is not available from the central office and still we want to calculate call cost, this
method can be used.
In this method, it is assumed that the call will mature after set timer (called maturity delay timer)
irrespective of whether the call actually gets matured or not.
Measured call duration cannot match exactly with the actual duration because delay timer has no relation
with the actual maturity.
If the delay timer is programmed with lower value, calls which were not replied, will also be considered as
matured ones.
If the delay timer is programmed with too large a value, short matured calls will go undetected.
The system starts the timer after your dialing is over.
Please note that this is a very crude method and exact bill cannot be guaranteed.
However, this method is effective when combined with Off-line CPD.
CPD based maturity (Only CPD, CPD+delay, Offline CPD+ delay)
Few central office exchanges do not provide reversal facility and hence sensing call maturity of outgoing
calls at the customer premises is not possible. Duration of outgoing calls cannot be arrived at without
maturity signal from the central office. This leads to meaningless calculation of call cost, as the duration
itself is not accurate. The Matrix PBX has a capability to detect various tones on the central office lines. The
Matrix PBX can detect dial tone, engage tone, ring back tone (RBT), routing tone, etc. Using this tone
detection capability, Matrix provides sensing of call maturity.
Only CPD
In this option, the system starts detecting the ring back tone as soon as it enters speech mode(the system
enters speech mode on expire of inter digit timer after the last digit has been dialed) and continues to do
so till it could detect ring back tone. Once ring back tone is sensed, the system waits for ring back tone
to stop and as soon as it stops, the system starts duration meter for billing.
This method is better than delay based maturity detection method.
CPD+Delay
Many times it happens that CPD is not sensed even if a call is matured. To overcome this limitation, this
option is used. In this option, the system detects RBT for the time = RBT detect timer. If RBT is sensed,
the system starts the duration meter as soon as the RBT stops. This duration meter stops when the call is
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 145
Team/Focus/Empire
over. The details of the call are stored in the SMDR buffer. If the RBT is not sensed during this time, the
CPD logic will abandon detection and the call will get matured on the expiry of the delay timer.
This method is much better than earlier method CPD only.
Off-line CPD+Delay
As explained CPD works on detection of tones on trunk during call progression. The biggest hindrance to
this method is the noise present on the trunk. The callers end is the prime source of this noise. This
option helps to avoid this noise. Here the extension is disconnected from the trunk once the dialing is
over. The system detects for the RBT on the trunk and as soon as the RBT is sensed, the disconnected
extension is re-connected to the trunk. Hence it is known as Off-line CPD. The process is same as that of
CPD+Delay option. During disconnection, it is possible to give music-on-hold to caller instead of
silence.
Use following command to set music-on-hold/silence give to caller during disconnection of call:
206-Code
Where,
Code Meaning
0 User gets silence during disconnection
1 User gets music during disconnection
By default, user gets silence during disconnection.
As CPD technology is based on sensing of tones, it can fail in following cases:
Trunk lines are too noisy and tones are not clear.
Tones on the trunk lines are very weak.
There is loud room noise when the call is being made. This room noise hinders proper detection of tones.
(Not applicable in case of Off-line CPD)
CPD is not 100% accurate. Matrix assumes no responsibility for any error in Call Cost Calculation with
CPD option selected.
12 KHz/16 KHz Metering
Please note that this facility is hardware dependant Matrix provides two types of EL cards one supporting
12 KHz/16 KHz and the other not supporting 12 KHz/16 KHz. Please ensure that to used the card
supporting 12 KHz/16 KHz to avail this facility.
Central office provides pulses of 12 KHz/16 KHz for every unit depending upon the tariff plan. Suppose you are
calling Mumbai(India) from Newyork and the tariff plan is of 16 seconds then central office gives a pulse of 12 KHz/
16 KHz every 16
th
second till you are in speech with the other end.
The Matrix PBX provides the facility to sense 12 KHz/16 Khz signal. The Matrix PBX counts these pulses,
multiplies it with the unit charge and adds the service charge. This is how the Matrix PBX calculates call charges.
This method of call cost calculation is most efficient.
Mathematically,
Call Charges = (Number of Pulses * Unit Charge) + Service Charges
Advantages of 12 KHz/16 KHz Metering
No need to program area codes
No need to program tariff plan and cost
Only the unit charges and the service charges are to be programmed
Column with column heading Rate shall be blank in SMDR report if the call cost is calculated
using 12 KHz/16 KHz sensing and remarks column will show K.
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 146
Team/Focus/Empire
How to program?
Use following command to program maturity type of a trunk:
42-Trunk-Maturity Code
Where,
Trunk is from 0 to 9
Maturity Code Call Maturity Type
0 Maturity disabled
1 Delay
2 CPD + Delay
3 Only CPD
4 Polarity Reversal
5 Off-line CPD
6 12 KHz/16 KHz Metering
Timers of Relevance:
Delay Timer-Time after which system starts metering the call
Command : 213-Timer
Range: 00 to 99 seconds
Default : 40 seconds
Trunk Inter Digit Timer-Time for which the system remains in dial phase while dialing on trunk. To
Elaborate: When you lift the handset, grab the trunk, the system remains in dial phase for time = trunk inter
digit timer and waits for any digit dialed. If no digit is dialed then system goes in the speech phase. The same
happens when last digit is dialed. Hence if this timer is increased then CPD sensing will start late and if it is
decreased it will start early.
Command: 217-08-Timer
Range: 01 to 99 seconds
Default: 05 seconds
For local calls, lower value (04-07 seconds) is recommended.
For long distance calls, higher value (06-09 seconds) is recommended.
Ring Back Tone Detect Timer-It is the time for which the system detects this ring back tone. This timer
gets loaded when the system enters speech phase. As seen above, the system enters speech phase on expiry
of Trunk Inter Digit Timer. Hence trunk inter digit timer also plays a role in functioning of this scheme.
Command: 217-30-Timer
Range: 01 to 99 seconds
Default: 10 seconds
Recommended Range : 07 to 12 seconds.
Important Point:
Please refer Trunk Parameters Report in topic Trunk Parameters for trunk Maturity type.
Relevant Topics:
1. Call Cost Calculation
2. Trunk Parameters
3. SMDR
=X=X=
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 147
Team/Focus/Empire
Music on Hold
Whats this?
Whenever a person is put on hold or while his call is being transferred, the person gets music.
Relevant Topics:
1. Hold
2. External Music
=X=X=
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 148
Team/Focus/Empire
Operator
Whats this?
Operator is a person who handles more number of calls at a time. She acts as a link between the caller and the
called person.
Any extension can be interpreted as an Operator.
The Operator can use a Telephone instrument or a console.
The system offers two types of operator extensions:
Main operator extension to which a operator console is connected.( A telephone instrument can also be
connected)
Secondary operator extension to which a telephone instrument can be connected.
Operator can be in either of the two modes. Operator Absent/Operator Present. In Operator Present mode all
incoming calls land on the operator console. All the internal callers(on dialing 0) also land on the operator console.
In operator absent mode, all incoming calls go to the landing destination of respective trunks whereas all internal calls
go to the secondary operator.
How it works?
IF DSS-70/DSS-45/DSS-PC is connected to the exension that is defined as Operator, then a caller calling the
Operator, by dialing 0 gets a RBT. At the same time a second caller calling the operator also gets RBT. The
operator can see this on the LED of the DSS key when a telephone instrument is connected to the operator
extension, the first caller gets RBT on dialing 0 and the second caller gets a busy tone. However, the operator gets
internal call waiting tone.
How to program?
Use following command to program the Main Operator extension:
391-Extension
Where,
Extension is the flexible number assigned to the extension.
Use following command to program Secondary Operation extension:
392-Extension
Where,
Extension is the flexible number assigned to the extension.
Example:
Program extension 23 as main operator and extension 24 as a secondary operator.
391-23
392-24
Important Point:
In PBX arena, operator holds a significant position. Matrix provides a special feature to the operator, when the
operator wants to make a very inportant and finds all trunks busy she can release, a trunk forcibly by dialing 9.
On dialing 9 she gets access to a trunk line and can then make an outgoing call.
Relevant Topics:
1. Extension Parameters
2. Operator Console
3. DSS-45 Users Guide
4. DSS-70 Users Guide
=X=X=
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 149
Team/Focus/Empire
Operator Console
Whats this?
The Matrix system offers three types of feature-rich operator consoles viz. DSS-70, DSS-45 and DSS-PC for
effective call management.
Operator Console is recommended when call traffic is high. Busy offices, factories, hotels and hospitals are ideal
users of Operator Consoles.
Operator Console provides Direct Station Selection(DSS) for extensions and trunks and even direct feature
access.
All the three Operator Consoles are compatible with Team-208P, Focus and Empire models.
Operator Console is a optional product.
DSS-70
The DSS-70 is a versatile, user friendly, compact, feature-rich Operator Console. The DSS-70 is an effective tool
to manage calls efficiently. The DSS-70 is extensively used in offices, factories, hotels, hospitals and other business
establishments to increase productivity.
DSS-70 houses 70 keys in all, a 16 character alphanumeric, backlit, green LCD to display specific messages
and array of LEDs to display the status of different operations.
The keys are divided in following groups :
1. Extension DSS keys ( an extension can be accessed by pressing this key.)
2. Trunk DSS keys (a trunk can be accessed by pressing this key)
3. Main Keys( for functions like Answer ,Hold ,Transfer and Release)
4. Dialing Keys(Keys like 1-9, 0, *, # and FLASH)
5. Special function Keys(Conference, Chain, Memory, Acknowledge, Redial, Function, Page)
The LEDs display the status of
1. Extension
2. Trunk
3. System.
For more details on DSS-70, please refer DSS-70 Users Guide
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 150
Team/Focus/Empire
DSS-45
The DSS-45 is a versatile, user friendly, compact, feature-rich Operator Console. The DSS-45 is an effective
tool to manage calls efficiently. The DSS-45 is extensively used in offices, factories, hotels, hospitals and
other business establishments to increase productivity.
DSS-45 houses 45 keys in all, a 16 character alphanumeric, back-lit, green LCD to display specific
messages, LEDs to display the status of different operations. It has special features like 8 level
speakerphone, handset with 4 level volume control, auto hands-free mode etc.
The keys are divided in following groups :
1. Extension DSS keys ( an extension can be accessed by pressing this key.)
2. Trunk DSS keys (a trunk can be accessed by pressing this key)
3. Dialing Keys( Keys like 1-9, 0, *, # and FLASH)
4. Special function Keys (Function, Volume, Speaker, Hold, Transfer/Flash, Speed Dialing, Redial, Answer,
Page, Acknowledge, Conference and Flash)
The LEDs display the status of
1. Extension
2. Trunk
Fore more details, please refer DSS-45 Users Guide
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 151
Team/Focus/Empire
DSS-PC CONSOLE
A versatile, PC based operator console the DSS-PC is a perfectly suited tool to manage calls in offices,
factories, hotels, hospitals, small and large business establishments. It carries on the unique DSS facility
giving you a single click access to extension line and trunk lines. The DSS-PC console is a front end application. This
console is complemented by the DSS-PC server application. The DSS server PC application is a back end
application and connects the console to the PBX. This back end application is just a bridge between the DSS-PC
and the PBX and the user never interacts with it directly. The Server and the console application can be loaded on
the same PC (local) or on different PCs (remote).
The DSS-PC gives the feel of a typical windows application.
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 152
Team/Focus/Empire
How it works?
When an operator console is connected to the system, the caller gets a ring back tone on dialing 0. All the
extensions can call operator at the same time and all of them would get hold on music. The calls are answered
automatically in the order in which they are received on the operator console. However, the operator can answer the
calls selectively i.e. she can answer the long distance calls or director calls prior to other calls. For more details,
please refer DSS-70 Users Guide or DSS-45 Users Guide or DSS-PC Users Guide.
How to install Operator Console?
Please refer users guide of respective operator console.
How to program?
Step 1: Activate/deactivate operator console using command 611.
Step 2: Set operator present/absent using command 612.
Step 3: Set routing of trunks on Operator console/extension using command 51.
Step 4: Program the operator class of service using command 632.
Step 5: Enable/disable dial tone on operator console using command 618. (This command is not recommended for
DSS-70)
Step 6: Associate a key location to feature using command 621. (If required)
Step 7: Associate a status light code to a location using command 622. (If required)
Step 8: Program the auto answer timer using the command 613. (If required)
Step 9: Program the auto acknowledge ON/OFF using the command 615. (If required)
Step 10: Program the buzzer mode using the command 614. (If required)
Step 11: Program the buzzer delayed mode timer using command 616. (If required)
Step 12: Program the key click timer using the command 617. (If required)
Step 13: Print the operator console parameters report using command 115-5.
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 153
Team/Focus/Empire
Step 1
Use following command to activate/deactivate operator console:
611-Code
Where,
Code Meaning
0 To deactivate Operator Console
1 To activate Operator Console
Please note that this command should be issued from a telephone instrument and note operator console.
Also note that the system will restart on issuing this command.
Example:
To activate the Operator Console, dial
611-1
Step 2
Use following command to set operator in present/absent mode:
612-Code
Where,
Code Meaning
0 Operator Absent Mode
1 Operator Present Mode
Example:
To set operator in present mode, dial
612-1
Step 3
Use following command to set routing of trunks on operator console/extension:
51-Trunk-Day Routing-Night Routing
Where,
Trunk is from 0 to 9.
Day Routing Meaning
0 Routing on Extension
1 Routing on Operator Console
Night Routing Meaning
0 Routing on Extension
1 Routing on Operator Console
By default, all the trunks are routed on extension.
Example:
To program the system so that trunk 1 goes to Operator in day time and to an extension in night time, dial
51-1-1-0
Step 4
Use following command to assign toll control to the Operator Console:
632-Daytime Level-Nighttime Level
Where,
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 154
Team/Focus/Empire
Day time Level is from 0 to 9
Night time Level is from 0 to 9
Step 5
Use following command to enable/disable dial tone on operator console:
618-Code
Where,
Code Meaning
0 No dial tone on Operator Console
1 Dial tone on Operator Console
It is recommended to use this command only for DSS-45 and DSS-PC (if a telephone instrument is used to
answer the call).
Example:
To enable dial tone on DSS-45, dial
618-1
Step 6
Programming of soft keys is essentially assigning a function to each location. The locations are identified
with fixed numbers. Each key is having a fixed number. Following map lists the numbers for all locations
with default labels:
Use the following command to assign a function to a location:
621-Location-Function-Page
Where,
Location Label Location Label Location Label Location Label
01 01 21 21 41 L5 61 FUN
02 02 22 22 42 L6 62 *
03 03 23 23 43 L7 63 0
04 04 24 24 44 L8 64 #
05 05 25 25 45 L9 65 FLSH
06 06 26 26 46 L10 66 Page
07 07 27 27 47 1 67 TRAN
08 08 28 28 48 2 68 ANS
09 09 29 29 49 3 69 REL
10 10 30 30 50 C 70 HOLD
11 11 31 31 51 CHN 71 Active
12 12 32 32 52 4 72 Night
13 13 33 33 53 5 73 Buffer
14 14 34 34 54 6 74 Program
15 15 35 35 55 MEM 75 Admin
16 16 36 36 56 A 76 Fun 1
17 17 37 L1 57 7 77 Fun 2
18 18 38 L2 58 8 78 ---
19 19 39 L3 59 9 79 ---
20 20 40 L4 60 RDL 80 ---
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 155
Team/Focus/Empire
Function Description
0 No Action (dummy function)
001-144 Access extension 001 to 144
145-184 Access trunk 01 to 40
185-194 Dial digits 1-9, 0
195 Dial *
196 Dial #
197 Flash
198 Memory
199 Redial
200 Transfer
201 Answer
202 Release
203 Hold
204 Conference
205 Public System Access (not implemented)
206 Call Chain
207 Page or Pagination
208 Function
209 Acknowledge
Page Meaning
0 Active in all pages
1 Active in page 1
2 Active in page 2
3 Active in page 3 (not implemented)
4 Active in page 4 (not implemented)
Step 7
Use the following command to assign a LED to a location:
622-LED-Location-Page
Where,
LED Description
001-144 Access extension 001 to 144
145-184 Access trunk 01 to 40
185 Call Chain (not implemented)
186 Page (Pagination)
187 Function
188 DSS Active
189 Night
190 Buffer
191 Programming Active
192 Admin Active
193 Function #1
194 Function #2
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 156
Team/Focus/Empire
Page Meaning
0 Active in all pages
1 Active in page 1
2 Active in page 2
3 Active in page 3 (not implemented)
4 Active in page 4 (not implemented)
Step 8
Use the following command to program Auto Answer at the Operator Console:
613-Timer
Where,
Timer is from 00 to 99 seconds.
By default, Auto answer is OFF (Timer value is 00).
In case Auto Answer is required to be active, recommended value if the timer is 03 to 07 seconds.
For more details on Auto Answer please refer users guide of Operator Console.
Step 9
Use the following command to program automatic acknowledge mode:
615-Mode
Where,
Mode Meaning
0 Auto Acknowledge OFF
1 Auto Acknowledge ON
By default, auto acknowledge is OFF.
For more details on Auto Acknowledge please refer users guide of Operator Console.
Step 10
Use the following command to program the ringer mode:
614-Mode
Where,
Mode Meaning
0 Ringer always OFF
1 Delayed Ringer
2 Ringer only if the operator is idle
3 Immediate Ringer
By default, the ringer mode is 3.
For more details on Ringer Mode please refer users guide of Operator Console.
Step 11
Use the following command to program the buzzer delayed mode timer:
616-Timer
Where,
Timer is from 00 to 99 seconds
By default, the timer value is 10 seconds.
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 157
Team/Focus/Empire
For more details on Delayed Mode Timer please refer users guide of Operator Console.
Step 12
Use the following command to program the key click timer:
617-Timer
Where,
Timer is from 00 to 50 milli seconds.
By default, the value of timer is 10 milli seconds.
For more details on Key Click please refer users guide of Operator Console.
Step 13
Use following command to print/download operator console parameters report:
115-5
Important Points:
On giving 611 the system will restart and will come out of programming mode. Hence you will have to re-enter
into the programming mode. The LED marked ACTIVE would turn ON. It is advisable to do the programming
from the operator console.
Is DSS-70 is used then an extension other than power down extension should be selected as the operator
extension.
When operator console is connected it is required that few trunks are diverted to the Operator console and few
on the extensions directly. This gives flexibility in connecting fax, modems, private lines, etc.
Is it not possible to raid a station/trunk from operator console.
Relevant Topics:
1. DSS-70 Users Guide
2. DSS-45 Users Guide
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 158
Team/Focus/Empire
=X=X=
OPERATOR CONSOLE PARAMETERS AS ON 06-10-04(Wed) AT 14:56

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Console Status DEACTIVE
Operator Status DEACTIVE
Auto Answer OFF
Buzzer Mode IMMEDIATE (Delay Timer Is 10 Seconds )
Buzzer Acknowledgement MANUAL
Key Click Timer 10 ms
DAY NIGHT
Class Of Service 2 2
T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8 T9 T0
DN DN DN DN DN DN DN DN DN DN
TRUNK RING DESTINATION:NN NN NN NN NN NN NN NN

LOCATION OF KEYS AND LEDS ON OPERATOR CONSOLE
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
PAGE#1 | PAGE#2
LOC KEY LED | LOC KEY LED | LOC KEY LED | LOC KEY LED
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
01 EXT01 EXT01 | 40 TK04 TK04 | 01 - - | 40 - -
02 EXT02 EXT02 | 41 TK05 TK05 | 02 - - | 41 - -
03 EXT03 EXT03 | 42 TK06 TK06 | 03 - - | 42 - -
04 EXT04 EXT04 | 43 TK07 TK07 | 04 - - | 43 - -
05 EXT05 EXT05 | 44 TK08 TK08 | 05 - - | 44 - -
06 EXT06 EXT06 | 45 - - | 06 - - | 45 - -
07 EXT07 EXT07 | 46 - - | 07 - - | 46 - -
08 EXT08 EXT08 | 47 DIG1 - | 08 - - | 47 DIG1 -
09 EXT09 EXT09 | 48 DIG2 - | 09 - - | 48 DIG2 -
10 EXT10 EXT10 | 49 DIG3 - | 10 - - | 49 DIG3 -
11 EXT11 EXT11 | 50 CONF - | 11 - - | 50 CONF -
12 EXT12 EXT12 | 51 CHAIN - | 12 - - | 51 CHAIN -
13 EXT13 EXT13 | 52 DIG4 - | 13 - - | 52 DIG4 -
14 EXT14 EXT14 | 53 DIG5 - | 14 - - | 53 DIG5 -
15 EXT15 EXT15 | 54 DIG6 - | 15 - - | 54 DIG6 -
16 EXT16 EXT16 | 55 MEM - | 16 - - | 55 MEM -
17 EXT17 EXT17 | 56 ACK - | 17 - - | 56 ACK -
18 EXT18 EXT18 | 57 DIG7 - | 18 - - | 57 DIG7 -
19 EXT19 EXT19 | 58 DIG8 - | 19 - - | 58 DIG8 -
20 EXT20 EXT20 | 59 DIG9 - | 20 - - | 59 DIG9 -
21 - - | 60 RDL - | 21 - - | 60 RDL -
22 - - | 61 FUN FUN | 22 - - | 61 FUN FUN
23 - - | 62 * - | 23 - - | 62 * -
24 - - | 63 DIG0 - | 24 - - | 63 DIG0 -
25 - - | 64 # - | 25 - - | 64 # -
26 - - | 65 FLASH - | 26 - - | 65 FLASH -
27 - - | 66 PAGE PAGE | 27 - - | 66 PAGE PAGE
28 - - | 67 TRAN - | 28 - - | 67 TRAN -
29 - - | 68 ANS - | 29 - - | 68 ANS -
30 - - | 69 REL - | 30 - - | 69 REL -
31 - - | 70 HOLD - | 31 - - | 70 HOLD -
32 - - | 71 - ACT | 32 - - | 71 - ACT
33 - - | 72 - NIGHT | 33 - - | 72 - NIGHT
34 - - | 73 - BUF | 34 - - | 73 - BUF
35 - - | 74 - PGM | 35 - - | 74 - PGM
36 - - | 75 - ADM | 36 - - | 75 - ADM
37 TK01 TK01 | 76 - F1 | 37 - - | 76 - F1
38 TK02 TK02 | 77 - F2 | 38 - - | 77 - F2
39 TK03 TK03 | | 39 - - |
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
MATRIX TEAM Ver: 7R9 (US)

Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 159
Team/Focus/Empire
Paging (PAS)
Whats this?
You can deliver a message to a mass of people just by lifting your handset and dialing a code.
This feature is of great use in factories, offices, etc. where it is not feasible to provide more number of
extension lines. In such cases, if you need to call somebody you can just make an announcement naming him
to come and see you or call you.
This can also be used for mass communication.
The system supports one audio output port that can be used to connect public address system with the
system. In case of fire or any other emergency, announcement can be made from any extension over this
port. A good quality amplifier and a matching speaker should be connected to this port.
How to make connections for PAS port?
Connect good quality external amplifiers and matching speakers to the port as shown in the figure given
below.
Keep the distance between the system and the amplifier at minimum to reduce noise pick-up.
Use shielded cable for connecting the system with the amplifier.
Port Specifications
Specifications Value
Interface Type Audio Signal
Frequency 300 Hz to 3400Hz
Maximum Voltage 0.707V rms across 600 Ohms
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 160
Team/Focus/Empire
How to use it?
1 Lift the handset. Dial tone
2 Dial 3998. Ring back tone for 3 seconds.
3 Start announcement when the ring back tone stops.
How to program?
Each extension line can be programmed for PAS access.
Use the following command to program an extension for PAS access
334-Extension-Day Mode-Night Mode
Where,
Day Mode Meaning
0 PAS denied
1 PAS allowed
Night Mode Meaning
0 PAS denied
1 PAS allowed
Example:
To disable PAS on extension 205 in day and night mode, dial 334-205-0-0.
Use the following command to program all the extensions for PAS access:
334-*-Day Mode-Night Mode
Timer of Relevance:
PAS Music Timer-Time for which music is heard on the speaker when an extension uses PAS.
Command: 217-35-Timer
Range: 01 to 99 seconds
Default: 03 seconds
Important Points:
PAS may not work if it is not enabled on the port.
By default, it is enabled on all extension lines.
PAS may not work if the amplifier loads the PBX circuitry.
PAS may not work if the PAS port turns faulty.
PAS may not work if Casio/Multimedia jack turns faulty.
When the PAS port is not being used for any announcement, there could be very low signal heard on the
speakers. This is because the PAS port is not disconnected totally i.e. isolated from the system but only
audio path is cut. The system ground noise could get amplified and heard on the speakers. To reduce this
noise: 1. Use good quality amplifiers and speakers. 2. Reduce distance between the system and the
amplifiers and use matching speakers.
Using the relay port of the system can solve the above problem. It can be used to switch on/off the power
to the amplifier. The procedure for making the connection is as explained below:
Power the amplifier through the relay port.
Enter SA mode.
Give command: 155-1: Switch on the amplifier.
Exit SA mode.
Get system dial tone.
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 161
Team/Focus/Empire
Dial PAS access code: 3998.
Announce your message.
Enter SA mode.
Dial command: 155-0: Switch off the amplifier.
Exit SA mode.
CAUTION :
As the PAS port is audio output port, no electrical signal should be applied to this port. This may result in
permanent damage to the system. Matrix warranty does not cover damages resulting from improper use.
=X=X=
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 162
Team/Focus/Empire
Port Number Identification
Whats this?
The system provides the facility to find the flexible extension number of a hardware port. It is also possible
to find the hardware port number of an extension number. This facility is very useful when we need to add
an extension or change the extension number of a hardware port and also during installing the system.
How to use it?
Use following command to find the flexible number of a hardware port:
FUN-70-Hardware Port
Example:
Find the flexible number of hardware port 17 in Focus-416P (default condition), dial
Use following command to hardware port number of an extension:
FUN-71-Extensions Flexible Number
Example:
To find the hardware port number of extension number 23 in Team (default condition), dial
Important Points:
These commands are allowed directly from FUN command.
These commands are possible from DSS-45, DSS-70 and DSS-PC.
=X=X=
Press 'FUN' FUN command?
70 Hardware Port#?
17 HP17=217
Press 'FUN' FUN command?
71 Extension#?
23 23=HP03
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 163
Team/Focus/Empire
Power Down Mode
Whats this?
If no battery back up is provided then in case of power failure, it is desirable to have trunk lines available
directly on few extension lines. Matrix circuit is designed in such a way that during power failure some extension lines
get connected directly with the trunk lines and your communication with the external world does not get affected.
These extension lines are called power down extension lines.
How it works?
Following block diagram shows the power fail transfer function for one port:
Figure 1: Normal Condition Figure 2: Power fail Condition
Following table shows power down extensions for various models:
Relevant Topics:
1. Installing the System
2. Troubleshooting
=X=X=
Te le p hone
connectio n
in the field
Extensio n
C ircuit
Trunk Line
Pow er fa il Tra nsfer fo r O ne Po rt
C
C
N O
N C
N C
N O
Te le p hone
connectio n
in the field
Extensio n
C ircuit
Trunk Line
Pow er fa il Tra nsfer fo r O ne Po rt
C
C
N O
N C
N C
N O
Trunk
Number
Team
208
Focus
416
Empire
428
1 21 201 201
2 25 205 202
3 29 209 207
4 33 213 208
5 217 213
6 221 214
7 225 219
8 229 220
9 225
10 226
11 231
12 232
13 237
14 238
15 243
16 244
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 164
Team/Focus/Empire
Printer Port
Whats this?
The Matrix PBX offers a built in parallel port for connecting a printer with the system. This port is available
(in the form of a 25 pin connector) on the CPU/Master card of the system and is marked PRINTER on the
enclosure/facia panel.
How it works?
Any standard printer can be interfaced with the system. The system sends data in the pure ASCII format. No
special characters or control sequences are sent.
Important Point:
If the printer port is selected as the destination of the configuration reports or SMDR reports then
whenever any print command is issued by the SE/SA, the data reaches the printer.
Relevant Topics:
1. Configuration Reports
2. SMDR
=X=X=
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 165
Team/Focus/Empire
Privacy
Whats this?
While two extensions are in speech, it is desired that no third person can listen their talk i.e. privacy of their
conversation in maintained.
However if few important extensions are allowed to use features like interrupt request, barge-in and raid,
they can intrude others conversation. Also if DID is activated, outside caller can reach an extension or if
there is a call from another trunk line, it will interrupt your conversation by giving intrusion tone. Some
times this is very annoying and undesirable. The system provides privacy against all these types of intrusion.
This is known as privacy.
These are three types of intrusions against which a user might wish privacy:
1. Privacy from Interrupt Request/Barge-In and Raid
2. Privacy from Trunk call routing beeps
3. Privacy from DID calls
How to program?
Use following command to program the extension for call privacy:
303-Extension-Privacy from IR/BI/Raid-Privacy from Trunk call routing beeps-Privacy from DID calls
Where,
Extension is the flexible number assigned to the extension.
Use following command to program call privacy on all the extensions:
303-*-Privacy from IR/BI/Raid-Privacy from Trunk call routing beeps-Privacy from DID calls
Example:
To program call privacy from Raid and DID calls on extension 23,
Dial 303-23-1-0-1.
With this, no extension can raid extension 23. Also DID calls will not disturb extension 23.
Important Points:
The feature Transfer-on Busy will not work if call privacy from trunk call routing beeps is enabled.
By default, Privacy for Trunk Call routing beeps is enabled on all the extensions. Whereas, privacy for
Interrupt Request/Barge-In and Raid and DID call is disabled on all the extensions.
=X=X=
Privacy from trunk call routing beeps Meaning
0 Disable privacy
1 Enable privacy
Privacy from DID calls Meaning
0 Disable privacy
1 Enable privacy
Privacy from IR/BI/Raid Meaning
0 Disable privacy
1 Enable privacy
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 166
Team/Focus/Empire
Programming the System
Whats this?
The Matrix PBX is a flexible system and can be programmed to suit your needs. Programming can be done at
three levels:
System Engineer Level
At this level, System Engineer does the programming. This is called System Engineer Mode.
System Administration Level
At this level, System Administration does the programming. This is called System Administration Mode.
User Level
At this level, User does the programming for himself for features like, Alarms, Call follow me etc. For
more details, please refer respective sections.
How it works?
System Engineer (SE) Mode
SE mode allows SE to program the system for main basic functions like assigning flexible numbers to the
stations, programming destinations for trunk lines, Activation of DID facility on few lines, assigning
COS levels to stations, etc.
In this mode, only SE can do programming.
All the commands are allowed from SE mode.
This mode is password protected so that no other person can make any unauthorized alterations and
subsequent misuse of features and facilities.
System engineer is a person who programs the system as per the need. He is the person to make major
alternations in the system. No other person can change the system settings without his knowledge provided
the password is kept secret. Depending upon the organization structure, a person is designated as system
engineer.
How to use it?
SE password is 4-digits secret code used to avoid unauthorized access to SE mode.
Default SE password is 1234.
In case the SE password is forgotten, the same can be cleared to its default value. For more details on this,
1 Lift the handset. Dial tone
2 Dial 19-SE Password. Programming tone. You have entered the SE mode.
3 Enter programming command. Confirmation tone
4 To exit SE mode, dial '0'. Dial tone
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 167
Team/Focus/Empire
please refer section System Security (Passwords).
System gives programming tone on entering SE mode.
Only one person can enter SE mode at a time.
User can enter in the SE mode from any extension.
System Administration Mode
SA mode allows SA to change few system settings without entering the SE mode. It is a subset of the
full-blown SE mode and hence supports only a few programming commands.
In this mode, only SA or SE can do programming.
This mode is password protected so that no other person can make any unauthorized alterations and
subsequent misuse of features and facilities.
System Administrator is a person who carries out routine jobs like taking SMDR printouts, making
operator absent/present, etc. Generally an operator in an organization is selected as a System
Administrator.
How to use it?
1 Lift the handset. Dial tone
2 Dial 19-SA Password. Programming tone
3 Enter programming command. Confirmation tone
4 To exit programming mode, dial '0'. Dial tone
SA password is a 4-digits secret code used to avoid unauthorized access to SA mode.
Default SA password is 1111.
In case the SA password is forgotten, the same can be cleared to its default value from the System
Engineer (SE) mode.
System gives programming tone on entering SA mode.
If the SA password is not entered correctly, system gives error tone.
Only one person can enter SA mode at a time.
To exit SA, dial 0 from the programming tone. You get Matrix dial tone.
Following programming commands are allowed from the SA mode:
SMDR Reports Printing Commands
Day/Night control Commands
System Restart Command
Station Call Budget Programming
Guest Group Programming
Operator Present/Absent
Important Points:
Programming can be done at the site without opening the system from any Station.
System can also be programmed from a remote end from anywhere in the world. For more details, please
refer Remote Programming for more details.
Programming is accomplished by dialing separate codes (string of digits) for different settings. This
eliminates need for entering long and confusing programming sequences. Programming commands are
broken into two parts: Codes and Values.
The system continues to function normally even during programming. This allows the SE or SA to change
the settings without disturbing any communication.
The SE mode and the SA mode are password protected so that no other person can make any unauthorized
alterations and subsequent misuse of features and facilities.
If an extension number starts with digit 1 then you shall have to enter the SE/SA mode by dialing
*19-Password.
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 168
Team/Focus/Empire
Please refer the System Parameters Report to know the last day/time the system was programmed.
Relevant Topics:
1. System Security (Passwords)
2. Remote Programming
3. Programming Using a Computer
=X=X=
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 169
Team/Focus/Empire
Programming Using a Computer
Whats this?
Programming a system like Empire through phone is a very time consuming process. It is possible to
program the Matrix PBX system using a computer. Once a batch file is made in the computer, changes can
be made within no time and the entire batch file can be down loaded from the computer to the Matrix PBX
on a click of a button.
How to use it?
There are two ways of programming the system: Batch programming and Manual programming.
Batch programming:
Batch programming is suitable if we need to reprogram the complete the Matrix PBX.
To communicate with the computer, in-built software viz. HyperTerminal of Windows 95 or Windows NT
can be used. For details, please refer Computer Connectivity.
Connect the communication port of the Matrix PBX (the thin cable of the splitter cable) with the
communication port of the computer using Matrix communication cable. Please contact Matrix dealer or
the company for Matrix communication cable. (Matrix communication cable has 9-pin D-type female
connector on both the sides and is 10 meters long).
Enable the communication port for computer connectivity using command 131-2 from programming
mode.
Programming the Matrix PBX using HyperTerminal
Start the computer. Click on Start, Point to Programs, Point to Accessories, Double click on WordPad.
Create a batch file of programming commands. Use only upper case to enter programming commands in
the command file.
The command file must contain only the commands. It is advised not include any other text in the file.
However, comments can be included in the command file but care must be taken that alphabet P and F
are not used anywhere in the comments.
Once all the commands are entered, save this file using a proper file name with .txt extension.
Now again Click on Start, Point to Programs, Point to Accessories, Click on HyperTerminal. Double
click on HyperTerminal icon.
Give the name you desire and press <Enter>. No need to enter any phone no. Change the settings of
Connect to using its options to Direct to Comm port2 or any other port (It is assumed that the
Matrix PBX is connected to comm. port 2 of the computer) and click OK. Set Bits per Second to 2400,
Data Bits to 8, Parity Bit to None, Stop bits to 1, Flow control to None and Click OK.
Click on File, Click on Properties, Click on Settings and Change Emulation option to VT100. Click on
ASCII set up. Tick for Echo characters in sending mode. Click OK.
**
Click on Transfer. Click on Send Text File. Give filename with path OR Browse to give the path where
you have stored your file to be transferred. Click OK.
The computer is sending the command file character by character. The Matrix PBX is receiving these
characters and executing commands after assembling them in command format.
Wait for the file transfer to finish.
If the programming is accepted by the Matrix PBX, it responds by sending character Y. If it is not
accepted by the Matrix PBX, it responds by sending character N.
Click on File and then on Exit to come out of the programming mode.
Verify the programming of the Matrix PBX by generating configuration reports.
The command file can be saved for future reference and use.
We can print the command file for verification and future reference.
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 170
Team/Focus/Empire
Programming the PBX using ProComm.
Start the computer. Click on Start, Point to Programs, Point to MS-DOS prompt.
You get C:\windows>. Type CD. You get C:\>. Type EDIT. A new file viz. UNTITLED opens.
Type all the commands you need to program the PBX. Now to save the file, press ALT-F. Point to Save
As and press enter. The computer asks you the name you want to give to this file. Give the name say
<sumer>. Again pres ALT-F and point to Exit. Press enter to exit.
Please note that you have saved the file in the root directory.
Use only upper case to enter programming commands in the command file.
The command file must contain only the commands. It is advised not include any other text in the file.
However, comments can be included in the command file but care must be taken that alphabet P and F
are not used anywhere in the comments.
Again Click on Start, Point to Programs, Point to MS-DOS prompt.
You get C:\windows>. Type CD. You get C:\>. Type CD PROCOMM. You get C:\ PROCOMM>. Type
PROCOMM. You get PROCOMM main screen. Press <ESC>. You get status bar at the bottom of the
screen.
Press ALT-P to set the communication port of the computer. Press 9. Press enter.
Now press 20 if you have connected the cable to comm. port 1 (where normally a mouse is connected)
and press enter OR Press 21 if you have connected the cable to comm. port 2 and press enter.
To save the changes made in the settings, press 24.
After some time you get a screen with a status bar at the bottom.
Now press Page Up. Press 7 to select ASCII protocol (Preferred).
Now the computer asks the file name. Give the file name. Type C:\>sumer. Press enter.
The file gets downloaded to the Matrix PBX. The Matrix PBX responds with Y if it accepts the file and
with N if it does not accept the file. Re-try if the programming is not done properly.
To come out of the DOS mode, press ALT-X and then Y.
Manual programming:
Manual programming is suitable if we need to re-program only few parameters.
The procedure is same as in case of batch programming. Since only few commands are to be given, there
is no need to make separate file for it.
Follow all the steps of batch programming up to mark **.
Type a valid programming command in the space. For e.g. P2170015. (This will change the dial tone
timer to 15 seconds).
Click on transfer and then on send.
Wait for the response from the Matrix PBX. It can be Y or N.
This way, you can enter as many commands as you wish.
Manual programming can also be done using ProComm. However Batch programming is always
preferred.
Important Points:
Programming password is not required when the system is to be programmed through the computer. In
other words, there is no need to enter programming mode while programming through the computer. The
commands are to be typed directly.
Each command should be prefixed with letter P or F as the case may be.
If WORDSTAR is being used, non-document mode must be used.
=X=X=
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 171
Team/Focus/Empire
Programming Wizard
The best method to program the system is to program it in two phases:
Basic Programming
Advanced Programming
After Basic programming, most of the general requirements like making an internal call, making an external call, call
transfer, call park, setting alarms, etc. would be fulfilled.
Once basic programming is done, advance programming for special features like DID, DOSA, Fax homing, etc.
should be done.
Steps for Basic Programming
To enter programming mode, dial 19-SE Password (Default SE Password is 1234) from any extension.
Programming an Extension
Flexible Numbering of extension
Command: 37-Hardware port-Flexible number-#
For details, please refer Flexible Numbers.
Class of Service
Command: 32-Extension-Day Level-Night Level
For details, please refer Class of Service.
Feature Access Group
Command: 31-Extension-Day Group-Night Group
For details, please refer Toll Control.
Trunk Access for the day
Command: 331-Extension-Trunk-Trunk--Trunk-#
This command is used to give access of trunks to the extension during daytime.
Example 1:
To program the system so that extension 21 can access trunk 1 and trunk 5 in daytime.
Dial 331-21-1-5-#
Example 2:
To program the system so that extension 21 can access trunk 1, trunk 5 and trunk 12 in daytime,
Dial 331-21-1-5-#
Dial 156-2
Dial 331-21-2-#
Dial 156-1
Trunk Access for the night
Command: 332-Extension-Trunk-Trunk--Trunk-#
This command is used to give access of trunks to the extension during nighttime.
Example:
To program the system so that extension 21 can access trunk 1, trunk2, trunk 5, trunk 11 and trunk 12 in night time.
Dial 332-201-1-2-5-#
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 172
Team/Focus/Empire
Dial 156-2
Dial 332-201-1-2-#
Dial 156-1
Programming the Trunk
Trunk Parameters
Command: 41-Trunk-Enable/Disable-Tone/Pulse
Enable/Disable Meaning
0 To Disable
1 To Enable
Tone/Pulse Meaning
0 Pulse
1 Tone
By default, all trunks are programmed as tone type
This command can be used to program maximum 10 trunks. Now in Focus and Empire, 16 trunks can be
connected. These trunks are divided into two banks: Bank 1 (Trunk 1 to 10) and Bank 2 (Trunk 11-20). Hence to
program trunk 11-20 switch to bank 2 using command 1562 to switch to bank 1 use command 1561.
Commands:
156-1 : Bank 1
156-2: Bank 2
Hence, whatever programming is to be done for trunks in Bank 2, command 156-2 should be used prior to
respective programming commands.
Example:
To disable trunk 1 (Tone type) and Enable trunk 12 (Pulse type),
Dial 41-1-0-1
Dial 156-2
Dial 41-2-1-0
Please note you are in Bank 2, all the commands now given will correspond to Bank 2 only, hence before entering
any other command switch to Bank 1 by giving command 156-1. Any command entered hereafter will correspond
to Bank 1.
SMDR
Command: 42-Trunk-SMDR
For details, please refer SMDR
PEC Count
Command: 54-Trunk-PEC Count
For details, please refer Behind the PBX Applications
Trunk Destination for Day mode
Command: 47-Trunk-Ext.1-Ext.2-Ext.3-Ext.4-Ext.5
Maximum five destinations can be programmed for one trunk. However the time for which an extension rings is
programmable (For more details please refer Trunk Landing). For e.g. central office gives ring for 90 seconds and
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 173
Team/Focus/Empire
if the hunt timer is programmed for 18 seconds, then all the five extensions will get ring for 18 seconds each. If the
central office gives ring for 60 sec only then first three extensions will get ring for 18 sec, fourth extension will ring for
6 sec whereas fifth extension will not ring at all. In such case, the hunt timer should be decreased to 12 seconds so
that all the extensions ring for 12 seconds.
Example:
To program the system so that the calls on trunk 1 lands on extension number 21,22,23,24 and 25 during daytime.
Dial 47-1-21-22-23-24-25
Trunk Destination for night mode
Command: 48-Trunk-Ext.1-Ext.2-Ext.3-Ext.4-Ext.5
Example:
To program the system so that the calls on trunk 1 lands on extension number 21,22,23,24 and 25 during nighttime.
Dial 48-1-21-22-23-24-25
Trunk Landing
Command: 46-Trunk-Day Landing Scheme-Night Landing Scheme
Day Landing Scheme /
Night Landing Scheme
Meaning
0 Hunting Off
1 Round Robin
2 Delayed simultaneous
3 Immediate simultaneous
Hunting Off : The call lands on the programmed extension and only that extension would ring.
Round robin : The call lands on the programmed extension, rings on that extension for time = hunt
timer, then it goes to next defined extension, again rings there for time = hunt timer and so on. Hence
this scheme is called round robin.
Delayed simultaneous : The call lands on programmed extension, the extension rings for time = hunt
timer. Then all the extensions starts ringing till the call is answered. The call can be answered from
any of the ringing extensions.
Immediate simultaneous: The call lands on programmed extensions and all the extensions start
ringing simultaneously till the call is answered. Any extension can answer the call.
Example:
To program the system so that the call on trunk 1 lands in round robin fashion on extensions 21,22,23,24 and 25
during daytime and lands simultaneously on these extensions during nighttime.
Dial 46-1-1-3
By default, hunting scheme is round robin.
Trunk Access
Command: 40-Trunk-Group 9-Group 5
Trunk Meaning
0 Trunk is accessible
1 Trunk is not accessible
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 174
Team/Focus/Empire
By default, all the trunks are in both the groups. Hence on dialing 9 or 5, a trunk can be accessed. However if
it is desired to give selective access to few extensions or it is desired that only few trunks should be made available
on dialing 9 or 5, it could be done using this command.
Example:
Program the system so that trunk 2 can be accessed by dialing 9 and not by dialing 5 and trunk 5 cannot be
accessed either by dialing 9 or 5,
Dial 40-2-1-0
Dial 40-5-0-0
Programming the System Parameters
Current Date
Command: 27-Month-Date-Year-Day
The format is MMDDYY.
Sunday is day 1
The system is Y2K compliant
The system is programmed with current date at the time of shipping.
Example:
To program the system for todays date and day, say 01-09-2000(Friday), (1st September 2000)
Dial 27-09-01-00-6
Current Time
Command: 28-Hour-Minutes
24-hour format is used
The system is programmed with current time at the time of shipping
Example:
To program the system for present time.
Dial 28-1800
Auto/manual day-night switching
Command: 23-0/1
For details, please refer Time Table
To exit program mode, dial 0
Operator Consoles Basic Programming (If Installed)
Main Operator Extension
Command: 391-Extension
Operator console should be activated first from any other extension. For this, enter in the programming mode from
any other extension and then define the extension for the operator console using this command. Doing so will restart
the system. Please note that operator console should not be connected to a power down extension.
Example:
To program extension 203 as main operator extension,
Dial 391-203
Secondary Operator Extension
Command: 392-Extension
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 175
Team/Focus/Empire
When the main operator is absent, all the incoming trunk calls are routed to the extension programmed as
destination extension for that trunk whereas all the internal calls are routed to the secondary extension.
Example:
To program extension 204 as secondary operator extension.
Dial 392-204
Activate/Deactivate Operator console
Command:
611-1: To Activate Operator console
611-0: To Deactivate Operator console
On giving this command the system will restart and will come out of programming mode. Hence you will have to re-
enter into the programming mode. It is advisable to do the programming from the operator console.
Example:
To activate the operator console.
Dial 611-1
Operator Present/Absent
Command:
612-1: Operator Present mode
612-0: Operator Absent mode
When the operator goes out for some work, he/she can set the Operator console in absent mode.
Example:
To set operator in present mode.
Dial 612-1
Enable/Disable dial tone on Operator Console
Command:
618-Code
Code Meaning
0 No dial tone on Operator Console
1 Dial tone on Operator Console
It is recommended to use this feature only with DSS-45.
Routing on Operator console or extension
Command:
51-Trunk-Day routing-Night routing
Day Routing /
Night Routing
Meaning
0 Extension
1 Operator Console
When Operator console is connected it is required that few trunks are diverted to the Operator console and few on
the extensions directly. This gives flexibility in connecting fax, modems, private lines, etc.
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 176
Team/Focus/Empire
Example:
To program the system so that trunk 1 goes to Operator in daytime and to an extension in nighttime,
Dial 51-1-1-0
By default, all the trunks are routed on extension.
Advance Programming
As mentioned earlier when you become familiar with most of the basic features of the system, you can program the
system to use its advance features.
Programming the Extension
Flash Timer: When cordless telephones and few other telephone instruments are connected as extensions, the
flash timer should be increased. For more details, please refer Flash Timer.
Class of Service: A customized group of various features can be allotted to a desired extension. For
more details, please refer Class of Service.
Toll Control: While doing basic programming, you must have simply given access for long distance to a particular
extension. As mentioned earlier, it is possible to restrict or allow only desired local, long distance numbers. For more
details, please refer Allowed and Denied Lists and Toll Control.
Operator: It is possible to make a particular extension to work as an operator. For more details, please refer
Operator and Operator Console
Call Pick up Group: You can program few homogenous extensions in one group so that they are calls can be pick
up from either of them. For more details, please refer Call Pick Up.
Busy Hunting Group: This feature is useful for homogenous extensions. For more details, please refer Busy
Hunting Group.
Group Call: For more details, please refer Department Group.
Call Privacy: Call privacy for Raid/Interrupt Request/Barge-In or DID calls or Incoming calls can be enabled/
disabled on any extension. For more details, please refer Privacy.
Call Budget: This restricts the toll charges for any extension. For more details, please refer Call Budget.
Automatic Call Duration Control: This limits the duration of the call from any extension. For more details, please
refer Call Duration Control.
Programming the Trunk
SMDR: Station Message Detail Recording is possible. For more details, please refer SMDR.
DID: For more details, please refer DID.
DOSA: For more details, please refer DOSA.
Fax Homing: For more details, please refer Fax Homing.
ECF: For more details, please refer External Call Forward.
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 177
Team/Focus/Empire
Programming the Operator Console
Please refer Operator and Operator Console for more details.
Rest of Programming
Virtual Extensions: For more details, please refer Virtual Extensions.
Global Memory: For more details, please refer Abbreviated Dialing.
Voice Message Applications: For more details, please refer Voice Messages.
Relay Port: For more details, please refer Relay Port.
=X=X=
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 178
Team/Focus/Empire
Raid
Whats this?
Without knowledge of the called busy extension, one can enter his conversation by using this feature.
The raided extension does not come to know that it has been raided unless the person who has raided
speaks something.
How to use it?
How to program?
Raid is a programmable features. Please refer class of service(COS) for details on how to allow Raid to a
user.
Important Points:
Raid is a programmable feature. Please refer Class of Service(COS) for details.
If an extension is programmed with privacy against raid, it cannot be raided. Please refer Privacy for
details.
It is not possible to Raid operator console.
Caution
Raid is a sensitive feature. The System Engineer should restrict access to this feature. If a user is allowed
the access to raid, he should use it responsibly.
Relevant Topics:
1. Class of Service (COS)
2. Privacy
=X=X=
1 Lift the handset. Dial tone
2 Dial Station. Busy tone
3 Dial 4. Speech.
4 Start talking.
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 179
Team/Focus/Empire
Real Time Clock
Whats this?
Various features and facilities provided by the system use date and time parameters. Such facilities work
properly only if the system is set with correct date and time values. These features are:
1. Alarms
2. SMDR
3. Day/Night Time
The system is equipped with built in Real Time Clock (RTC) circuit. This circuit is to be set once with
current date, day and time values. It then updates itself regularly to keep track of the parameters. Please note
that the system RTC takes care of the leap year.
How to program?
Use following command to set date parameters:
27-Month-Date-Year-Day
Where,
Month is from 01 to 12 (leading zero must in case of single digit month)
Date is from 01 to 31 (leading zero must in case of single digit date)
Year is from 00 to 99 (leading zero must in case of single digit year)
Day is
Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Use following command to set time:
28-Hour-Minute
Where,
Hour is from 00 to 23 in 24-hours format (leading zero must)
Minute is from 00 to 59 (leading zero must)
Example:
Set the system with July 26
th
2003, Saturday at 9:00 am., dial
27-07-26-03-7
28-09-00
Important Point:
The system is programmed with current date and time of shipping.
=X=X=
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 180
Team/Focus/Empire
Relay Port
Whats this?
The system provides one non-energized relay port, which can be, switched ON/OFF manually or
automatically.
The relay port can be operated locally as well as remotely.
The external device that can be operated by this relay port should confirm to the specification of this port.
In practical use, a load of 80-100W like a fluorescent-light, incandescent lamp, etc. can be operated
directly through this port without the need of a contactor.
Even a door lock can be connected to this port.
If heavy duty devices like a 3-phase water pump, Air-conditioner, neon lamps, etc. is to be operated
through this port then a contactor of adequate rating should be used.
The system remembers the state of relay during power failure. Suppose, a water pump is being controlled
using this feature and if while it is running, power failure occurs then the operator need not turn the water
pump again on power restoration. The system will remain the last state and will switch ON the water
pump.
Relay port can be used to control a office bell, a siren in a factory, a porch light of a building, school bell,
Glow sign boards, plant machinery, Air conditioners, factory lights, water supply pumps, etc.
How to connect external devices to the relay port?
AC M a ins
Fluo re sc e nt
Tub e Lig ht
PBX
Re la y Po rt
AC M a ins
Sire n/W a te r
Pum p /C o m p o und
Lig hts/ A irc o nd itio n e r
Re la y Po rt
C o ntro l Port C o nta ct
Term ina ls
PBX
C o nta c to r
If light load like a tube light is to be connected then connections should be made as shown below:
A heavy load should be connected through a heavy rating contactor. The connection should be made
as shown below:
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 181
Team/Focus/Empire
Specifications of the relay port:
Contact arrangement : 1 Normally Open
Maximum Operating Current : 3 A
Maximum Operating Voltage : 240V AC / 60V DC
Maximum Operating Power : 240VA / 90 W
Rated Load : 1.5A, 240V AC
Operate Time : 5 ms
Release Time : 5 ms
Expected Electrical Life : 100,000 operations
Expected Mechanical Life : 10,000,000 operations
How to program the relay port?
Relay port can be used in Manual or Automatic mode. When it is to be used in automatic mode, the timings
at which it should be turned on and off should be entered.
Step 1: Program Relay port in manual/automatic mode using command 2051.
Step 2: Program Relay port time table, if it is to be used in automatic mode using command 2052.
Step 3: Clear Relay port time table using command 2053.
Step 4: Clear entire Relay port time table using command 2054.
Step 1
Use following command to program Relay port in manual/automatic mode:
2051-Code
Where,
Code Meaning
0 Relay port work in manual mode
1 Relay port work in automatic mode
It is also possible to control this relay port remotely, which means you can turn ON/OFF any device from
any where in the world. For e.g. You can turn ON an A.C. in your office before you leave your residence for
office so that when you reach your office, the office is conditioned for you. To use this feature, you should
enable DOSA on one of the trunks. (Please refer Direct Outward System Access to know about DOSA). No
different programming command is required to use Relay port in DOSA mode.
Example:
To program Relay port to work in automatic mode, dial
2051-1
Rela y Po rt
12V / 24V
3-Pha se P. S.
R B Y N
W a ter
Pum p
R
B
Y
N
PBX
A 3-Phase load can be connected to the relay port as shown below:
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 182
Team/Focus/Empire
Step 2
Use following command to program Relay port time table, if it is to be used in automatic mode:
2052-Switch ON Time-Switch OFF Time
Where,
Switch ON Time is in 24 hour format (i.e. HH-MM-SS is used)
Switch OFF Time is in 24 hour format (i.e. HH-MM-SS is used)
Once program the relay port time table inside the system would look like:
Example:
Program Relay port to work in automatic mode for a factory where it is required to operate a siren for 30
seconds during change of shifts at 0700 hrs., 1500 hrs. and 2300 hrs., dial
2051-1
2052-070000-070030
2052-150000-150030
2052-230000-230030
Step 3
Use following command to clear the particular time table:
2053-Switch ON Time-Switch OFF Time
Where,
Switch ON Time is in 24 hour format (i.e. HH-MM-SS is used)
Switch OFF Time is in 24 hour format (i.e. HH-MM-SS is used)
The system searches for matching entry pair and clears it if it is found in relay port time table.
Example:
To clear an entry for 0700 hrs. in above example, dial
2053-070000-070030
Step 4
Use following command to clear entire relay port time table:
2054
Table Entry ON Time OFF Time
1 HH-MM-SS HH-MM-SS
2 HH-MM-SS HH-MM-SS
3 HH-MM-SS HH-MM-SS
4 HH-MM-SS HH-MM-SS
5 HH-MM-SS HH-MM-SS
6 HH-MM-SS HH-MM-SS
7 HH-MM-SS HH-MM-SS
8 HH-MM-SS HH-MM-SS
9 HH-MM-SS HH-MM-SS
. HH-MM-SS HH-MM-SS
. HH-MM-SS HH-MM-SS
24 HH-MM-SS HH-MM-SS
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 183
Team/Focus/Empire
How to operate Relay port?
The Relay port can be program to operate in manual mode, automatic mode and DOSA mode.
Manual Mode
If Relay port is programmed in manual mode then it can be turned OFF and ON from SE/SA mode.
Use following command to program Relay port ON/OFF from manual mode:
155-Code
Where,
Code Meaning
0 Switch OFF the relay
1 Switch On the relay
Automatic mode
No commands are required to operate Relay port in this mode since the timings are already programmed in the
system.
DOSA mode
If Relay port is programmed in manual mode then it can be turned OFF and ON from anywhere in the
world using DOSA feature.
To operate the Relay port in DOSA mode, dial DOSA enabled trunk.
Log in the system with your extension number and password.
After getting DOSA beeps, dial the commands to operate the Relay port. These commands are same as
those in manual mode
Use following command to program Relay port ON/OFF in DOSA mode :
155-Code
Where,
Code Meaning
0 Switch OFF the relay
1 Switch On the relay
Important Points:
In no circumstances the load should exceed the specifications. Excessive load can damage the relay
contact and also the PBX system. Matrix warranty does not cover damages occurring to the system due to
excessive load on the relay port.
While programming the relay port time table a new entry is automatically inserted in the right slot in
ascending order. The relay port time table accommodates 24 time entries. If fewer entries are made
remaining entries in the table remain unused.
The print out of the relay port is printed in system parameters in Focus and Empire system. However this
print out is not available in Team model. Hence, while entering the timings in Team model, it is advisable
to note them on paper for future reference.
The entire relay port time table can be deleted with a single command.
Please note that once the relay port has been activated for door lock, it does not mean that you cannot
operate the Relay port thereafter. If you want to operate your Relay port in door lock mode then you
have to just pull out the connections of contactor/any load connector and connect the door lock to the
relay port contacts.
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 184
Team/Focus/Empire
Then you give the commands of door lock to operate your Relay port.
399-0 : To make door lock relay off.
399-1 : To make door lock relay on.
Please refer to System Parameter Report for the ON/OFF time details of the Relay Port.
Relevant Topics:
1. Door Lock
2. System Parameters
=X=X=
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 185
Team/Focus/Empire
Remote Display Units
Whats this?
Remote display unit (It is an optional device provided by Matrix) is very useful in monitoring status of
trunks and extensions.
It has one LED for each extension and each trunk. The LEDs on the remote display unit effectively
displays different status of extensions and trunks like idle, busy, dialing and ringing.
Three more LEDs labelled POWER indicating that power is available at the remote display unit, NIGHT
indicating system is in night mode and BUF indicating that the SMDR buffer is full are provided.
Blinking BUF LED indicates that the SMDR buffer is about to get full.
Remote display is based on a micro-controller and gets its power from the main unit. Communication is
half duplex from the system to the display. Status bytes are sent serially.
How to connect it?
Remote display unit can be connected with Team, Focus and Empire system.
In all the systems, RDU should be connected to the thin cable of the splitter cable. However in case of
Team system, it can also be directly connected to the communication port.
Remote display unit has a cable with three wires, one for power supply (pin no.1 of D-type female
connector) one for ground (pin no.5 of D-type female connector) and one for Data (pin no.3 of D-type
female connector).
How to program?
Use following command to enable the communication port for remote display:
131-1
Important Points:
The display shows the status of all the extensions and trunks irrespective of the configuration. A group of
five LEDs have been made. If two cards are used then two such groups are formed automatically. Each
group corresponds to the respective card. The display shows the status of extension and trunk in following
order:
If EL-104 card is used then first four LEDs show extension status and the last one shows trunk status.
If EL-203 card is used then first three LEDs show extension status and the last two show trunk status.
If EXT-005 card is used then all LEDs show extension status.
It is recommended to paste coloured stickers below the LEDs showing the extension number and the trunk
number.
The cable of remote display unit can be extended to 30 meters. Please take care while making connections,
else the unit and also the CPU card may get damaged.
Relevant Topic:
1. Communication Ports
=X=X=
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 186
Team/Focus/Empire
Remote Programming
Whats this?
One can program the Matrix PBX from any remote location. The remote user can program the system using
the same commands as used by a normal local extension to program the system.
How it works?
Often customers do not have time to read the users guide and program the system at their own, they can
ask the dealer to program the system from his office as per your needs. Dealer is the remote end.
Customer should make a call to dealer. Alternatively, dealer can also call the customer.
Once in speech, customer should dial Flash-3999. Dialing Flash puts the remote end on hold. Dialing
3999 again establishes the speech between the customer and the remote end.
The customer or the dealer may dial the password. Dialing correct password gives programming beeps.
Both the parties can hear programming beeps.
Now the dealer can start programming from his office. Alternatively, the customer can also dial the codes
on request from the dealer.
Dealer or the customer should dial 0 to come out of programming mode.
The customer may disconnect when programming is over.
Important Points:
All the steps and codes are same as in local programming.
User can dial his own secret password. Remote end need not know the password.
It is mandatory to establish speech and remain connected with one extension throughout the programming
session. They can continue talking while entering programming codes. This makes the whole process
interactive.
Remote end must dial in tone (DTMF) mode.
Relevant Topic:
1. Programming the System
=X=X=
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 187
Team/Focus/Empire
Restart the System
Whats this?
The system supports a command from the SE mode to restart the system. This command gives same effect as
switching off the system and switching it on again. Many times if is difficult to physically walk to the
system and restart it. It is convenient if we could do the same from an extension. This command precisely
provides this facility.
How to use it?
Use following command to restart the system:
10
Important Point:
This command does not alter any programming parameters. However, all active conversations get
disconnected and the ports in use are released.
=X=X=
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 188
Team/Focus/Empire
Selective Trunk Access
Whats this?
This feature helps us to access a particular trunk. It is useful in a case in which all the trunks are not
identical in terms of services they offer. It is useful in case you have a hotline connection from the
central office.
How to use it?
Example:
To grab trunk 1, dial 81
To grab trunk 3, dial 83
Important Points:
You would not get the central office dial tone by dialing 81 or 82 and so on if the trunk is not
physically connected to the system.
You cannot access trunks in bank 2 i.e. trunk number 11 to trunk number 20 selectively.
=X=X=
1 Lift the handset. Dial tone
2 Dial 8-Trunk Number. Dial tone of the trunk.
3 Dial desired external number.
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 189
Team/Focus/Empire
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
Whats this?
The Matrix PBX can record the details of outgoing(OG) calls made from all the stations. This is called
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR).
The Matrix PBX can send the details of these calls on either the communication port or the printer port.
These can be printed either immediately on completion of the call or afterwards when desired.
Following diagram shows the logic in which the calls are stored and the reports are generated.
The Matrix PBX offers facility to store the calls as per the requirement and even print the calls as per the
requirement. The SMDR parameters viz. SMDR mode and the storage mode are printed in the system
parameters report. Please refer System Parameters Report in the topic System Parameters.
SMDR Report Format and Types
A unique format is used for all the reports. For each call, following details are stored
Serial Number
Call originating extension number
Call terminating extension number
Telephone Number
Date (Month-Date-Year)
Time (hour-minute)
Duration of the call (second)
Tariff plan applied to the call
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 190
Team/Focus/Empire
Total units for the call
Total amount including service charges
Remark
Remark column can have following symbols.
Symbol Meaning
* Call duration more than timer 1
** Call duration more than timer 2
? Area code doesn't exist in the database
d Call matured by delay timer
C Call matured by CPD
D DOSA call
E External Call Forward Call
R Call matured by Polarity Reversal
K Call matured by 16 KHz /12 KHz
SMDR printing and storage
The system supports both, On-Line printing and Off-Line printing. In hotel applications, it is desirable that all the
calls are stored and printed as and when they are made (On-line printing). Whereas in Offices, generally it is
required that only long distance calls are stored and the print out is taken when desired (Off-line printing).
How to program?
Step 1: Program printing and storage details for SMDR report using command 22.
Step 2: Enable/Disable the header and footer from the SMDR report using the command 2660.
Step 3: Set complete/summary details print in SMDR report using command 2663.
Step 4: Set originating/terminating extension wise report using command 2664.
Step 5: Set charge call cost to the originating/terminating extension using command 2665.
Step 6: Enable/disable form feed using command 2670.
How To Print/download SMDR Reports?
Step 1: Print SMDR report of ALL calls using command 111-0.
Step 2: Print SMDR report of LOCAL calls using command 111-1.
Step 3: Print SMDR report of Long Distance(starting with 0) calls using command 111-2.
Step 4: Print SMDR report of Long Distance(starting with 00) calls 111-3.
Step 5: Print SMDR report of last few calls using command 111-4-Last few Calls
Step 6: Print SMDR report of calls made by an extension using command 112.
Step 7: Print SMDR report of calls made on given trunk using command 113.
Step 8: Print SMDR report of calls made on given date using command 114.
Step 9: Print SMDR summary for all an extensions using command 115.
Step 1
Use following command to program printing and storage details for SMDR report:
22-Printing Code-Storage Code
Where,
Printing Code Meaning
0 Off-line printing
1 On-line printing
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 191
Team/Focus/Empire
Storage Code Meaning
0 Call starting with '0'
1 All calls
Note: Please note that if long distance number doesnt start with 0, this option is not effective and hence should be
program with code 1.
Any suitable combination can be selected from the following table:
Command Printing Code Storage Code
22-00 Off-line Long Distance Calls only
22-01 Off-line Local Calls + Long Distance Calls
22-10 On-line Long Distance Calls only
22-11 On-line Local Calls + Long Distance Calls
Step 2
Use following command to enable/disable the header and footer from the SMDR reports:
2660-Code
Where,
Code Meaning
0 Disable the header
1 Enable the header
Step 3
The Matrix PBX offers a facility to either take a complete report print out or a summarized report print out.
Use following command to set only summary/complete report along with summary print in SMDR report:
2663-Code
Where,
Code Meaning
0 Print only the summary of the report
1 Print complete report along with summary
Example:
To program summarized SMDR report
2663-0
Step 4
The Matrix PBX offers a facility to take a SMDR report that would arrange the SMDR records extensionwise and
too originating and terminating extension wise.
Use following command to set originating/terminating extension wise report print in SMDR report:
2664-Code
Where,
Code Meaning
0 Print originating extension wise report
1 Print terminating extension wise report
Example:
To program terminating extension wise report print in SMDR report, dial
2664-1
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 192
Team/Focus/Empire
Step 5
The Matrix PBX offers a facility to charge the call cost either to the originating extension on the terminating
extension.
Use following command to set charge call cost to originating/terminating extension:
2665-Code
Where,
Code Meaning
0 Charge call cost to the originating extension
1 Charge call cost to the terminating extension
The facility is helpful while using the feature Call Budget and in Hotel applications.
Example:
Set charge call cost to the terminating extension:
2665-1
Step 6
The Matrix PBX offers a facility to enable and disable form feed. If form feed is enabled each report is printed on
new page and if it is disabled all the reports are printed one after the other continuously.
Use following command to set printer skips/not skips paper between two reports (form feed):
2670-Code
Where,
Code Meaning
0 Disable form feed
1 Enable form feed
Example:
To enable Form Feed.
2670-1
How to Print/download SMDR Reports?
Enter SE/SA mode and use any of the following commands for desired reports.
Step 1
Use following command to print SMDR report of All calls:
111-0
Step 2
Use following command to print SMDR report of Local calls:
111-1
Step 3
Use following command to print SMDR report of long distance calls (for numbers starting with 0):
111-2
Step 4
Use following command to print SMDR report of long distance calls (for numbers starting with 00):
111-3
Step 5
Use following command to print SMDR report of last few calls:
111-4-Last few Calls
Where,
Last few Calls is from 0001 to 9999.
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 193
Team/Focus/Empire
Example:
To take printout of last 5 calls, dial
111-4-0005
Step 6
Use following command to print SMDR report of calls made by an extension:
112-Extension
Where,
Extension is the flexible number assigned to the extension.
The SMDR report of calls made by a Virtual Extension can also be printed (112-Virtual Extension).
Use following command to print SMDR report of calls made by all extensions:
112-*
Example:
To print SMDR report of calls made by extension 202, dial
112-202
Step 7
Use following command to print SMDR report of all calls made on given trunk:
113-Trunk
Where,
Trunk is from 0 to 9.
Use following command to print SMDR report of calls made on all trunks:
113-*
Example:
To print SMDR report of calls made on trunk 2, dial
113-2
Step 8
Use following command to print SMDR report of all calls made on given date:
114-Month-Date-Year
Where,
Month = 01 to 12 (leading zero must in case of single digit month)
Date = 01 to 31 (leading zero must in case of single digit date)
Year = Year in two digits from 01 to 99 (leading zero is must in case of single digit year)
Example:
To print SMDR report of calls made on 01st December 2002, dial
114-12-01-02
Step 9
Use following command to print SMDR summary report of all extensions:
115-4
This command is applicable only for checked in extensions.
Important Points:
SMDR Buffer(memory space) does not get erased on downloading/printing a report.
SMDR memory can be cleared using command 110-SE Password.
System remembers the date and time when SMDR buffer last cleared. This is printed in the systems parameters
report.
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 194
Team/Focus/Empire
SMDR Buffer
Matrix has a dedicated memory space (commonly called buffer) to store details of each call. These calls
are retained in the buffer even during power failure.
Various reports can be routed either on the printer or on the computer from this buffer. To route the calls
on the computer, please refer Computer Connectivity.
Once the memory is filled above the warning level, the buffer LED starts flashing. The Empire
system have a buzzer that will give one beep after each call. This is to warn that the buffer is about to
spill over . You can clear the buffer after printing all necessary reports. Once the memory is 100% full,
buffer LED remains continuously on and the buzzer will start giving three beeps (In Empire only) for
each call made.
Once the buffer is 100% full, the new call overwrites the oldest one. It follows First In First Out (FIFO)
scheme. It is recommended that printing of various SMDR reports should be regularized on fixed dates;
let us say on 1st of every month. This should be done regardless of whether the buffer is full or not. This
will prevent spilling and subsequent loss of data. Selective deletion of calls may be used.
You can enable or disable call logging for individual trunk. This gives flexibility of monitoring only
important trunks. For e.g. Trunks which are used to make Long Distance Calls. This also prevents
frequent spilling over of the buffer, as now local calls will not be recorded.
Following table gives details on the capacity of each model to store call records:
Model Team Focus Empire
Total Buffer 850 2150 1050
Warning Level 650 1950 850
Important Point:
Your Central Office may calculate the bill on the basis of capacity of exchange, distance, number of calls and
other parameters. Due to this complicated method of calculation, TELCO bill and Matrixs SMDR report may not
match exactly. Matrix assumes no responsibility for such mismatches.
Selective Deletion of SMDR Records
In a hotel installation, it is not possible to delete the whole SMDR buffer at any point of time. As there are always
some active checked-in guests, deleting the whole buffer can disturb check-in/check-out mechanism.
On the other hand, if a guest stays for very long duration, there is a possibility of the system overwriting his calls in
the buffer. This happens when the SMDR buffer is full and the oldest call must be removed to make room for the
fresh call. Once an active checked-in call is overwritten, there is no information about this call with the system.
Subsequently, when the guest checks out, the SMDR report does not contain the deleted call. This is not acceptable
in a hotel environment.
The Matrix PBX provides a facility of deleting calls selectively. By using this facility as and when required, we can
eliminate the possibility of buffer full condition and overwriting of active guest calls.
How to use it?
Three types of calls are to be deleted:
1. Calls made from service extensions
2.Checked-out calls
3. Calls made from virtual extensions
Deleting calls made from service extensions
In a hotel environment, the hotel management such as manager, accounts, reception etc. uses many extensions.
Further, there are some service extensions like kitchen, room service, laundry etc. The calls made from these
extensions must be monitored and accounted for. They can be printed daily or weekly depending on the traffic.
Once they are printed, they can be deleted.
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 195
Team/Focus/Empire
Use following command to clear calls made from particular extension:
1491-Extension
Where,
Extension is the flexible number assigned to the extension.
Example:
To delete calls made by extension 110, dial
1491-110
Deleting checked-out calls
Once a guest has checked-out and his reports are printed, you can remove his calls from the buffer to create
space for the fresh calls. This routine cleaning activity can be scheduled as per convenience and traffic.
Use following command to clean checked-out calls made by particular extension:
1492-Extension
Where,
Extension is the flexible number assigned to the extension.
Example:
To delete calls made by extension 101, dial
1492-101
Deleting calls made from virtual extensions
Calls made from virtual extensions can also be deleted.
Use following command to clear calls made by virtual extensions:
1493- Virtual Extension
Where,
Virtual Extension is the flexible number assigned to the extension.
Example:
To delete calls made by extension 3979, dial
1493-3979
Important Point:
Please refer the System Parameters Report to know the programmed values for SMDR parameters.
Relevant Topics:
1. Call Cost Calculation (CCC)
2. Maturity
3. Call Budget
4. Hotel Applications
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 196
Team/Focus/Empire
SMDR CALLS REPORT : ALL AS ON 06-10-04(Wed) AT 14:47

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
SR EXT1-EXT2 T NUMBER DATE TIME DUR RATE UNITS AMOUNT REM
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------






















--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
MATRIX TEAM Ver: 7R9 (US) Page: 01
SMDR CALLS REPORT : LOCAL AS ON 06-10-04(Wed) AT 14:48

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
SR EXT1-EXT2 T NUMBER DATE TIME DUR RATE UNITS AMOUNT REM
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------




















--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
MATRIX TEAM Ver: 7R9 (US) Page: 01
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 197
Team/Focus/Empire
SMDR CALLS REPORT : LONG DISTANCE '0' AS ON 01-23-01(Mon) AT 04:58

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
SR EXT1-EXT2 T NUMBER DATE TIME DUR RATE UNITS AMOUNT REM
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------















--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Local Calls : 0 Time : 0 Units : 0 Amt. : 0.00
Long 0 Calls : 0 Time : 0 Units : 0 Amt. : 0.00
Long 00 Calls : 0 Time : 0 Units : 0 Amt. : 0.00
Total Calls : 0 Time : 0 Units : 0 Amt. : 0.00
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
MATRIX TEAM Ver: 7R10 (US) Page: 01




SMDR CALLS REPORT : LONG DISTANCE '00' AS ON 01-23-01(Mon) AT 04:59

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
SR EXT1-EXT2 T NUMBER DATE TIME DUR RATE UNITS AMOUNT REM
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------














--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Local Calls : 0 Time : 0 Units : 0 Amt. : 0.00
Long 0 Calls : 0 Time : 0 Units : 0 Amt. : 0.00
Long 00 Calls : 0 Time : 0 Units : 0 Amt. : 0.00
Total Calls : 0 Time : 0 Units : 0 Amt. : 0.00
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
MATRIX TEAM Ver: 7R10 (US) Page: 01
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 198
Team/Focus/Empire
SMDR CALLS REPORT : EXTENSION - 22 AS ON 01-23-01(Mon) AT 05:00

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
SR EXT1-EXT2 T NUMBER DATE TIME DUR RATE UNITS AMOUNT REM
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------


















--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Local Calls : 0 Time : 0 Units : 0 Amt. : 0.00
Long 0 Calls : 0 Time : 0 Units : 0 Amt. : 0.00
Long 00 Calls : 0 Time : 0 Units : 0 Amt. : 0.00
Total Calls : 0 Time : 0 Units : 0 Amt. : 0.00
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
MATRIX TEAM Ver: 7R10 (US) Page: 01

=X=X=
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 199
Team/Focus/Empire
System Parameters
Whats this?
Following options are desirable:
Printout of all the system parameters
Know software version and revision of the system
Commands
Use following command to take printout of the system parameters:
115-1
On giving this command, following parameters are printed:
All timers
SA password
Time when the SE mode was last exited
Number of records in the buffer, etc.
System Parameters report is attached herewith for ready reference.
Use following command to know the software version of the system:
1500-Version Number
Where,
Version Number is the digit to be dialed.
From telephone instrument:
If the digit dialed is same as the version number of the system, the system gives confirmation tone else
issues error tone. If the SE gets error tone, he needs to find out the correct version number by trial and error
method.
From Operator Console:
If the digit dialed is same as the version number of the system, the Console shows OK! on its LCD else
shows Error and issues error tone. If the SE gets Error on the LCD, he needs to find out the correct
version number by trial and error method.
Use following command to know the software revision of the system:
1501-Revision Number
Where,
Revision Number is the digit to be dialed.
From telephone instrument:
If the digit dialed is same as the revision number of the system, the system gives confirmation tone else
shows Error on the LCD and issues error tone. If the SE gets error tone, he needs to find out the correct
revision number by trial and error method.
From Operator Console:
If the digit dialed is same as the revision number of the system, the Console shows OK! on its LCD else
shows Error on the LCD and issues error tone. If the SE gets Error on the LCD, he needs to find out the
correct revision number by trial and error method.
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 200
Team/Focus/Empire
SYSTEM PARAMETERS AS ON 01-23-01(Mon) AT 05:04
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Dial Tone Timer 07 Seconds
Ring Back Tone Timer 45 Seconds
Busy Tone Timer 05 Seconds
Error Tone Timer 99 Seconds
Confirmation Tone Timer 05 Seconds
Programming Tone Timer 15 Seconds
Pgm Error Tone Timer 03 Seconds
Pgm Confirm Tone Timer 02 Seconds
Internal Inter Digit Timer 06 Seconds
Trunk 1st Dig Wait Timer 25 Seconds
Auto Call Back Ring Timer 45 Seconds
Interrupt Request Timer 45 Seconds
Barge-In Timer 05 Seconds
DISA Ring Timer 30 Seconds
Fax Detection Wait Timer 06 Seconds
Call Park Timer 30 Seconds
Hunt Timer 18 Seconds
Maturity Timer 40 Seconds
Pre RBT Wait Timer 10 Seconds
Auto Redial RBT Wait Timer 30 Seconds
Pause Timer 03 Seconds
DOSA Inactivity Timer 30 Seconds
Tone Demo Timer Timer 20 Seconds
ECF RBT Timer 03 Seconds
Call Forward - No Reply RBT Timer 20 Seconds
Trunk Inter Digit Timer 06 Seconds
Door Lock Timer 05 Seconds
PAS Initial Music Timer 03 Seconds
Last Number Redial Wait Timer 02 Seconds
Trunk Reservation Timer 03 Minutes
Alarm : Timer1 90 Seconds Timer2 60 Seconds
Message Wait : Timer1 30 Minutes Timer2 15 Seconds Count 20
ACD Timers : Local 04Min, Long 04Min, Incoming 04Min, Good-Bye 20Sec
DISA-DOSA Music Timer : 05 Seconds DISA-DOSA Beeps Timer : 05 Seconds
Long Duration Call : Timer1 03 Minutes Timer2 06 Minutes
SMDR Mode : OFF-LINE Printing, With Local Storage : OFF
Holiday Rate Status OFF Multiple Service Charge OFF
Percentage Service Charge OFF With 00% For Long Distance Calls
Unit Increment Long Distance Calls OFF Form Feed For ASMDR Reports ON
Relay Port(InTele-Switch) Mode : MANUAL Trunk Call Transfer Ring : Single
Auto Day/Night Switching : OFF, Check-Out Report Option : ON
Auto Day/Night Timings Day Time Night Time
Sunday 09:00 18:00
Monday 09:00 18:00
Tuesday 09:00 18:00
Wednesday 09:00 18:00
Thursday 09:00 18:00
Friday 09:00 18:00
Saturday 09:00 18:00
Auto Redial Type1 : 01 Trials With a Gap Of 40 Seconds In Between
Auto Redial Type2 : 01 Trials With a Gap Of 20 Seconds In Between
Day-Night SMDR Password Is "1111"
SMDR Buffer Last Cleared On 00-00-00 At 00:00
0 Records Stored In The Buffer
850 Records Free In The Buffer
Programming Mode Last Exited On 01-23-01 At 04:56
Manually Default Settings Last Loaded On 01-23-01 At 04:53
Power-On Default Settings Last Loaded On 01-23-01 At 04:32
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Page: 01
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 201
Team/Focus/Empire
SYSTEM PARAMETERS AS ON 01-23-01(Mon) AT 05:04

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
FLOOR SERVICE EXTENSION NUMBERS
FLOOR NO. 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09
EXT. NO. 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
System Pilot Groups
Pilot Group Ext#1 Ext#2 Ext#3 Ext#4 Ext#5 Ext#6 Ext#7 Ext#8
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
FEATURE FEATURES
ACCESS
GROUP 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
0 N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N
1 Y N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N
2 Y Y Y N Y N N N N N Y N N N Y N
3 Y Y Y N Y Y Y N N N Y N N N Y N
4 Y Y Y N Y Y Y Y N N Y N N N Y N
5 Y Y Y N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N Y N
6 Y Y Y N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N Y N
7 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N Y Y Y
8 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
9 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
00 : Internal Dial 04 : Call Pick Up 08 : Call Forward 12 : Raid
01 : Hold+Park 05 : HOD/HL 09 : Follow Me 13 : Trk Reserv+Flash
02 : Call Transfer 06 : Dynamic Lock 10 : AutoCallBack 14 : Low Auto Redial
03 : Conference 07 : Alarms 11 : Barge-In+IR 15 : High Auto Redial
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Emergency Number : 911

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
RELAY PORT (INTELE-SWITCH) TIME TABLE
SR ON TIME OFF TIME SR ON TIME OFF TIME
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Page: 02
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 202
Team/Focus/Empire
SYSTEM PARAMETERS AS ON 01-23-01(Mon) AT 05:04

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Class Of Service # 0 Class Of Service # 1
Index Allowed list Denied list Index Allowed list Denied list
0 1 0
1 2 1
2 3 2
3 4 3
4 5 4
5 6 5
6 7 6
7 8 7
8 9 8
9 0 9
* * *
# # #
Class Of Service # 2 Class Of Service # 3
Index Allowed list Denied list Index Allowed list Denied list
0 0
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
8 8
9 9
* *
# #
Class Of Service # 4 Class Of Service # 5
Index Allowed list Denied list Index Allowed list Denied list
0 0 1
1 1 2
2 2 3
3 3 4
4 4 5
5 5 6
6 6 7
7 7 8
8 8 9
9 9 0
* * *
# # #
Class Of Service # 6 Class Of Service # 7
Index Allowed list Denied list Index Allowed list Denied list
0 1 0 1
1 2 1 2
2 3 2 3
3 4 3 4
4 5 4 5
5 6 5 6
6 7 6 7
7 8 7 8
8 9 8 9
9 0 9 0
* * * *
# # # #
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Page: 03
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 203
Team/Focus/Empire
=X=X=
SYSTEM PARAMETERS AS ON 01-23-01(Mon) AT 05:05

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Class Of Service # 8 Class Of Service # 9
Index Allowed list Denied list Index Allowed list Denied list
0 1 0 1
1 2 1 2
2 3 2 3
3 4 3 4
4 5 4 5
5 6 5 6
6 7 6 7
7 8 7 8
8 9 8 9
9 0 9 0
* * * *
# # # #
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Caller Displays Based Extensions:
Dsp# Ext# Dsp# Ext# Dsp# Ext# Dsp# Ext#
00 - 04 - 08 - 12 -
01 - 05 - 09 - 13 -
02 - 06 - 10 - 14 -
03 - 07 - 11 - 15 -
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
MATRIX TEAM Ver: 7R10 (US) Page: 04
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 204
Team/Focus/Empire
System Security (Passwords)
Whats this?
Programming/usage of the system is secured at three levels:
System Engineer level. This level is protected by SE password
System Administrator level. This level is protected by SA password.
User level. This level is protected by user password.
System Engineer Password
This password is the main password of the system and should be kept by the system engineer. SE
password is needed to enter the system engineer mode of the system to change any setting of the system.
SE password is a 4-digits password. It cannot have either less than or more than 4 digits. Digits 09 are
valid.
Please note that the system engineer cannot know SA password or user password. However, he can clear
these passwords to their default values.
How to program?
Use following command to change SE Password:
291-New SE Password
New SE password is a number string of 4-digits.
By default, SE password is 1234.
System Administrator Password
The System Administrator uses this password.
SA password is a 4-digits password. It cannot have either less than or more than 4 digits. Digits 0-9 are
valid.
How to program?
Use following command to change SA Password:
292-New SA Password
New SA password is a number string of 4-digits.
By default, SA password is 1111.
User Password (User Security)
The User can secure his extension from unauthorized use by way of using User Password. For operational
details on this topic, please refer User Security(Password).
Relevant Topic:
1. Programming the System
=X=X=
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 205
Team/Focus/Empire
System Timers
Whats this?
Various timers used in the system are configurable to provide total flexibility. As such there is no need to
change the timers. Default values are so selected that the system works normally.
Following table gives details on each timer. Feature or facility associated with each timer is also mentioned.
Code Name Description Range Default Unit
211-Timer Call Park Timer See Call Park 01-99 30 Sec.
212-Timer Hunt Timer See Call Routing 01-99 18 Sec.
213-Timer Maturity Delay Timer See Maturity 01-99 40 Sec.
2142-Timer Auto Redial RBT Wait Timer See Auto Redial 01-99 30 Sec.
2143-Timer-Count
Auto Redial Low Priority Inter-
trial Timer and retry Count
See Auto Redial 01-99
40
01
Sec.
--
2144-Timer-Count
Auto Redial High Priority Inter-
trial Timer and retry Count
See Auto Redial 01-99
30
01
Sec.
--
215-Timer Pause Timer See Abbreviate Dialing 01-99 03 Sec.
216-Timer Inactivity Timer See DOSA 01-99 30 Sec.
217-00-Timer Dial Tone Timer
Defines how long dial tone should
continue after lifting the handset.
After this timer expires, dial tone
changes to error tone.
01-99 07 Sec.
217-01-Timer Ring Back Tone Timer
Defines how long ring should continue
on extension is case of internal
dialing. After this timer expires, ring is
stopped and ring back tone changes
to error tone
01-99 45 Sec.
217-02-Timer Busy Tone Timer
Defines how long busy tone should
continue before it changes to error
tone
01-99 05 Sec.
217-03-Timer Error Tone Timer Not Used 01-99 07 Sec.
217-04-Timer Confirmation Tone
Defines how long confirmation tone
should continue before it changes to
dial tone
01-99 05 Sec.
217-05-Timer Programming Tone Timer
During programming the system waits
for this timer before progra-mming
tone changes to error tone.
01-99 15 Sec.
217-06-Timer
Error Tone Timer during
programming
During programming, the system
gives error tone for the time specified
here. Thereafter it changes to
programming tone automatically
01-99 03 Sec.
217-07-Timer
Confirmation Tone Timer during
programming
During programming, the system
gives confirmation tone for the time
specified here. Thereafter it changes
to programming tone.
01-99 02 Sec.
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 206
Team/Focus/Empire
217-08-Timer
Internal Digit-Digit (Inter Digit)
Timer
The system waits for the time
specified here for the next digit during
dialing internal numbers and features.
01-99 06 Sec.
217-09-Timer Trunk First Digit Wait Timer
The system waits for the first digit
after grabbing the trunk before going
to speech state.
01-99 15 Sec.
217-10-Timer Auto Call Back Ring Timer See Auto Call Back 01-99 45 Sec.
217-11-Timer Interrupt Request Timer See Interrupt Request 01-99 45 Sec.
217-12-Timer Barge-In Timer See Barge-In 01-99 05 Sec.
217-13-Timer Alarm Ring Timer See Alarms 01-99 90 Sec.
217-14-Timer Return Alarm Ring Timer See Remote Alarm 01-99 60 Sec.
217-15-Timer Message Wait Ring Count See Hotel Application 01-99 20 --
217-16-Timer
Message Wait Ring Interval
Timer
See Hotel Application 01-99 30 Min.
217-17-Timer Message Wait Ring Timer See Hotel Application 01-99 15 Sec.
217-18-Timer Demonstration Tone Timer See Demonstration of Tones 01-99 20 Sec.
217-19-Timer
Ring Back Timer when transfer
on no-reply
See Transfer-While Ringing 01-99 20 Sec.
217-20-Timer DID/DOSA Music Timer See DID and DOSA 01-99 05 Sec.
217-21-Timer DID/DOSA Beeps Timer See DID and DOSA 01-99 05 Sec.
217-22-Timer DID Ring Timer See DID 01-99 30 Sec.
217-23-Timer Fax Homing Wait Timer See Fax Homing 01-99 06 Sec.
217-24-Timer Long Calls Timer1
If the call exceeds this time then the
SMDR report shows a '*' in the
remark column. This makes easy to
find how many calls are made for
extremely long duration at a glance.
01-99 03 Min.
217-25-Timer Long Calls Timer2
Same as above. Here the report
shows '#' in the report
01-99 06 Min.
217-26-Timer CDC Local Call Warn Timer See Call Duration Control 001-255 04 Min.
217-27-Timer
CDC Long Distance Call Warn
Timer
See Call Duration Control 001-255 04 Min.
217-28-Timer
CDC Incoming Calls Warn
Timer
See Call Duration Control 001-255 04 Min.
217-29-Timer CDC Good-Bye Timer See Call Duration Control 01-99 20 Sec.
217-30-Timer Pre Ring Back Tone Wait Timer See Off-line CPD 01-99 10 Sec.
217-31-Timer Trunk Reservation Timer See Trunk Reservation 1-9 03 Min.
217-32-Timer ECF Ring Back Tone Timer See External Call Forward 01-99 03 Sec.
217-33-Timer
Trunk Last Digit to Speech (inter
digit) Wait Timer
The system waits for this timer after
the last digit before going to speech
mode
01-99 06 Sec.
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 207
Team/Focus/Empire
217-34-Timer
Door Lock Relay (mono-stable)
Timer
See Door Phone and Door Lock 01-99 10 Sec.
217-35-Timer PAS Initial Music Timer See PAS 01-99 03 Sec.
217-36-Timer
Last Number Redial (digit) Wait
Timer
Waits for next digit during redial
command
01-99 02 Sec.
531-Trunk-Timer
Speech Connection (COS) Delay
Timer
See Trunk Programming 1-9 1 Sec.
Important Points:
Correct timer value are crucial for proper functioning of the system. Wrong timers may lead to malfunction
or one of many features. It can also lead to some strange and bizarre system behavior including total
crash. Please do NOT change any of the timers unless you are absolutely sure.
The programmed values for all the timers is available in the system parameters report.
=X=X=
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 208
Team/Focus/Empire
Time Table
Whats this?
The system can be programmed to work differently during different times of the day i.e. during daytime
(working hours) and nighttime (non-working hours). This makes management of trunk calls efficient and
avoid misuse of features and facilities. Generally following features/facilities can be programmed differently
for day and night times.
Class of Service
Toll Control
Trunk Access
Trunk Landing Destination
Trunk Hunting Scheme
DID/DOSA/Fax Homing/ECF etc.
This feature is very helpful in offices. The Matrix PBX can be set to night mode (non-working hours) at the
close of the day. The next morning it can be set to day mode (working hours). The Matrix PBX supports
Manual and Automatic day/night mode.
How to program?
Use following command to set the system in manual/automatic mode:
23-Code
Where,
Example:
To set the system in manual mode:
Dial 23-0
Use following command to switch day/night mode, if manual mode is set:
151 : System goes in day mode
152 : System goes in night mode
By default, the system is in Day mode.
Use following command to set day/night time, if automatic mode set:
24-Day-Start Time-End Time
Where,
Start Time is HH:MM in 24 hour format
End Time is HH:MM in 24 hour format
Example:
To program a system for a week in automatic mode, the office timings being 0830 hrs. to 1700 hrs.
(Sunday is a holiday), dial
23-1
24-1-0830-0830
24-2-0830-1700
Code Meaning
0 Manual mode
1 Automatic mode
Day 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Code Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 209
Team/Focus/Empire
24-3-0830-1700
24-4-0830-1700
24-5-0830-1700
24-6-0830-1700
24-7-0830-1700
Use following command to override current day and night time, if automatic mode is set:
153-HH-MM : For todays new daytime
154-HH-MM : For todays new nighttime
This facility can be used if for some urgent work you had to work on Sunday. Now since you must have
programmed your system on Sunday for Holiday, all the calls will go to the gatekeeper. If you wish that for
some time the system works as it works on other working days, then this facility can be used.
Important Points:
Automatic day/night mode is not available in Team-208S model
If the system is programmed for manual mode then at the end of the day, the operator will have to program
the system to night mode. (it is also allowed from Administration mode)
Suppose I went to my office on Sunday and changed the system to day mode using the command 153-
1030, but while leaving the office, I forgot to change it back to night time then on Monday as per the
programmed timings the system will go to night mode at 1700 hrs on Monday .However on Sunday, for
the remaining time the system will be in day mode only.
The system will not take care of any holiday coming on the working days. On these days, the system
should be programmed to manual mode and should be changed to night mode before leaving the office on
the day before the holiday. On coming back to the office, you can change it to daytime and then to
automatic mode.
Please refer the System Parameters Report to know the programmed values for Time Table parameters.
=X=X=
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 210
Team/Focus/Empire
Toll Control
Whats this?
Toll Control can be used to:
Restrict dialing all local telephone numbers.
Restrict dialing certain local telephone numbers.
Restrict dialing telephone nos. starting with 95
Restrict dialing certain areas (area codes 03 and 04)
Allow dialing only certain telephone number. (100,101,102,etc)
Allow dialing only certain area code.
Allow dialing only those telephone numbers which start with particular digit. (1)
How it works?
The system uses Allowed and Denied Lists to support this feature.
When a call is made, the system compares each digit of the dialed number string with the number
strings in allowed and denied list.
If the dialed number string matches with any of the number strings available in allowed list, the Matrix
PBX dials the number on the trunk, else compares with the number strings in the denied list.
If the dialed number string matches with any of the number strings available in denied list, the Matrix PBX
restricts dialing the number and gives error tone to the extension user.
If the dialed number matches with a number string that is available in both allowed and denied lists then
allowed list is given priority and the dialed number is dialed on the trunk.
How to use it?
By default, few number strings are available in the allowed and denied lists. If these number strings satisfy
the requirement then these should be assigned to the extension line for day time and night time.
If the requirement is not met by default allowed and denied list then customized allowed and denied lists
should be programmed.
The number strings which are to be allowed should be programmed as allowed strings.
The number strings which are to be denied should be programmed as denied strings.
One such allowed-denied list (level) should be assigned to each extension line for day time and night time
individually.
If customized toll control is to be provided then customized numbers should be programmed as allowed
strings and denied strings. For example, the requirement is that extension line 21 can make a call to City A
but should not make any other long distance call. In this case, the area code of the city A should be
programmed in one of the locations of the allowed strings and number string 1( the number prefixed for a long
distance call) should be programmed in
one of the location of the denied string. Such a allowed-denied list should be assigned to extension line 21.
One such allowed-denied list (level) should also be assigned to the extension line for the locked condition.
Once the extension has been locked, the extension user can make calls as per the allowed-denied lists
(level) assigned to the extension line for the locked condition. This is called Dynamic Toll Control.
Allowed-Denied list 0 (level 0) is assigned in locked condition by default.
How to program?
Step 1: Decide the toll control to be programmed extension wise.
Step 2: Assign appropriate allowed/denied list(level) as per the requirement to an extension line using command
32.
Step 3: Assign appropriate allowed/denied list(level) as per the requirement to the operator (DSS-70/DSS-45/
DSS-PC) using command 632.
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 211
Team/Focus/Empire
Commands
Step 1
Take a pen and a paper. Write down the toll control to be assigned to each extension line .
Step 2
Use following command to assign toll control to an extens line:
32-Extension-Daytime Level-Nighttime Level
Where,
Extension is the flexible number assigned to the extension.
Day time Level is from 0 to 9
Night time Level is from 0 to 9
Use following command to assign same toll control to all extensions:
32-*-Daytime Level-Nighttime Level
Step 3
Use following command to assign toll control to the Operator Console:
632-Daytime Level-Nighttime Level
Where,
Day time Level is from 0 to 9
Night time Level is from 0 to 9
Few examples:
1. Extension line 28 is to be restricted from dialing all long distance numbers except to office branches at Alaska and
Georgia. Alaska branch number is 907-273-6037 and Georgia branch number is 404-635-6800. Use
level 3 for this Toll Control.
Relevant Topics:
1. Allowed and Denied Lists
2. Dynamic Lock
3. Behind the PBX Applications
=X=X=
Command Meaning
252-3-0-9072736037-Flash Level 3, allowed string location 0=Alaska number
252-3-1-4046356800-Flash Level 3, allowed string location 1=Georgia number
253-3-0-Flash Level 3, denied string location 0=Long distance call
32-28-3-3 Extension 28 assigned level 3 for day and night
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 212
Team/Focus/Empire
Trunk Access
Whats this?
An extension can be allowed/denied access to a trunk/s separately during day time and night time.
An extension can access the trunk/s by dialing 9 or 5 or 8-trunk.
An extension can be given access to trunks selectively. Extension 21 can be given access to L1 and L2.
Whereas extension 22 can given access to L2 and L3. Extension 21 can access L1 and L2 either by dialing
81 and 82 or 9 and 5. Whereas extension 22 can access L2 and L3 either by dialing 82 and 83 or
9 and 5.
A trunk can be programmed in group 9 and/or group 5. If a trunk is programmed in group 9 it can be
accessed by dialing 9 and if a trunk is programmed in group 5 it can be accessed by dialing 5.
How to program?
Use following command to program trunk access during daytime for an extension:
331-Extension-Trunk....Trunk-#
Where,
Extension is the flexible number assigned to the extension.
Trunk....Trunk are from 0 to 9.
Terminate the command with # if less than ten trunks are to be given access to an extension.
Example:
Program the system so that extension 21 can access trunk 1 and 2 in day time.
331-21-1-2-#
Use following command to program trunk access during night time:
332-Extension-Trunk....Trunk-#
Where,
Extension is the flexible number assigned to the extension.
Trunk....Trunk are from 0 to 9.
Terminate the command with # if less than ten trunks are to be given access to an extension.
Example:
To program the system so that extension 23 can access trunk 1 and trunk 3 during nighttime.
332-23-1-3-#
Use following command to assign trunk access code 9 and/or 5 to a trunk:
40-Trunk-Trunk Access Code 9-Trunk Access Code 5
Where,
Trunk is from 0 to 9.
Trunk Access Code '5' Meaning
0 Trunk cannot be accessed by dialing '5'
1 Trunk can be accessed by dialing '5'
By default, all trunks can be accessed by dialing 9 or 5.
Trunk Access Code '9' Meaning
0 Trunk cannot be accessed by dialing '9'
1 Trunk can be accessed by dialing '9'
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 213
Team/Focus/Empire
Important Points:
By default, all extensions are given access to all the trunks during daytime as well as during night time.
To give access to trunks 11 to 20 (in Bank2) , Please issue command 156-2 then issue commands 331 and 332.
To use Emergency Dialing from a station, trunk access on that station is mandatory.
Relevant Topics:
1. Trunk Parameters
2. Emergency Detection and Reporting
3. Emergency Dialing
=X=X=
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 214
Team/Focus/Empire
Trunk Landing
Whats this?
An incoming call on a trunk can be made to land on desired extensions. It is possible to direct different
trunks on different extensions during day time and night time.
The Matrix PBX offers four different hunting schemes:
Hunting Off: Only one destination on which trunk is programmed to land will ring. The trunk ring will
not be diverted to any other extension. It will continue to ring as long as there is ring on the trunk.
Round Robin: In this scheme ,the system tries one extension after the other if programmed destination
does not answer the call in 15 seconds (hunt timer). All five extensions are tried starting from the
programmed extension. Each extension gets ring for 15 seconds.
Delayed Simultaneous: If the programmed destination (one destination) does not respond to the trunk
ring within 15 seconds, all five extensions start ringing. Any of the ringing or interrupted extensions can
answer the call. Ring on other extensions will be stopped when the call is answered.
Immediate Simultaneous: All five extensions ring immediately on receipt of a fresh call.
Please note that the hunting scheme is applicable from the first extension among the five extensions
programmed. Following diagram shows round robin hunting scheme for trunk 1 with extension 23 as first
destination .
How to program?
Use following command to program the trunk-landing destination for daytime:
47-Trunk-Extension1-Extension2-Extension3-Extension4-Extension5
Where,
Trunk is from 0 to 9.
Extension1.....Extension5 are the flexible number assigned to the extension.
For trunks in bank2 i.e trunk11 to trunk15. First issue command 156-2 and then issue above command.
Use following command to program the trunk-landing destination for nighttime:
48-Trunk-Extension1-Extension2-Extension3-Extension4-Extension5
21
22
23
24
25
(0
-1
5
)
(
1
6
-
3
0
)
(
3
1
-
4
5
)
(4
6 -6 0)
(6 1 -7 5 )
Trunk 1
Trunk 2
PBX
* N um be r in b ra ckets sho w hunt tim ing s
Trunk 3
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 215
Team/Focus/Empire
Where,
Trunk is from 0 to 9.
Extension1....Extension5 are the flexible number assigned to the extension.
By default, Extension 21 to extension 25 are programmed as destination for all the trunks both during
daytime and nighttime.
For trunks in bank2 i.e trunk11 to trunk15. First issue command 156-2 and then issue above command.
Use following command to assign hunting scheme for daytime and nighttime:
46-Trunk-Day Hunting Scheme-Night Hunting Scheme
Where,
Trunk is from 0 to 9.
By default, Hunting scheme for both daytime and nighttime is Round Robin.
For trunks in bank2 i.e trunk11 to trunk15. First issue command 156-2 and then issue above command.
Timer of Relevance:
Hunt Timer-Time for which the extension rings when an incoming call lands on it. It is relevant in case of
Round Robin and delayed simultaneously type of hunting scheme.
Command : 212-Timer
Range : 01 to 99 seconds.
Default : 18 seconds
Example:
Program the system so that the call on trunk 1 lands in round robin fashion on extensions 21, 22, 23, 24 and
25 during daytime and simultaneously on these extensions during nighttime.
47-1-21-22-23-24-25
48-1-21-22-23-24-25
46-1-1-3
Relevant Topics:
1. Time Table
2. Programming the System
3. Trunk Parameters
4. Distinctive Rings
=X=X=
Day hunting
scheme
Meaning
0 Hunting off
1 Round-Robin
2 Delayed Simultaneous
3 Immediate Simultaneous
Night hunting
scheme
Meaning
0 Hunting off
1 Round-Robin
2 Delayed Simultaneous
3 Immediate Simultaneous
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 216
Team/Focus/Empire
Trunk Parameters
Whats this?
A trunk can individually be enabled or disabled. If a trunk line is not connected to the trunk port then it
should be disabled. This can be useful when a particular trunk goes out of order and should be stopped
from being allocated to a user when he dials common trunk access code 9 or 5.
A trunk can be programmed as Tone type and Pulse type.
How to program?
Use following command to Enable/Disable the trunk and set Dial type:
41-Trunk-Enable/Disable-Pulse/Tone
Where,
Trunk is from 0 to 9.
By default, all trunks are enabled and programmed as tone type.
Use following command to Enable/Disable and set same Dial type same on all trunks:
41-*-Enable/Disable-Pulse/Tone
Above command can be used to program maximum 10 trunks. Now in Focus and Empire, maximum 16
trunks can be connected. Hence to program trunk 11-20, trunks are divided in two banks: Bank 1 (1-10)
and Bank 2 (11-20).
Use following command to select trunk bank:
156-Code
Where,
Example:
To disable trunk 1 (Tone type) and Enable trunk 12 (Pulse type)
Dial 41-1-1-1
Dial 156-2
Dial 41-2-1-0
Dial 156-1
Important Point:
On issuing command 156-2, the system takes the SE to Bank2. hence all the commands given here after
correspond to bank2. Hence now to program anything related to Bank1, the SE should enter command
156-1. On issuing command 156-1 the system takes the Se to trunk1 and all commands given hence forth
will be taken up for Bank1.
Enable/Disable Meaning
0 Trunk is disabled
1 Trunk is enabled
Pulse/Tone Meaning
0 Trunk is programmed as Pulse type
1 Trunk is programmed as Tone type
Code Meaning
1 Trunk Bank 1
2 Trunk Bank 2
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 217
Team/Focus/Empire
Timers of Relevance:
Speech Connection Delay Timer-It is the time after which the system gives dial tone to the station user on
dialing 9 or 5 or 8-trunk. To understand the significance of this timer, let us consider a situation. A
telephone line coming from an old telephone exchange is interfaced with the Matrix PBX. Now when the
user extension, grabs a trunk line and dials a number 1-334-242-4378. The PBX allows this number to be dialed
out but since the actual dial tone from the central office comes after some time, the number can be interpreted as
334-242-4378. To avoid this situation, the system offers this timer. This timer can be set for individual trunks.
Command: 531-Trunk-Timer
Range: Trunk - 0 to 9
Timer - 1 to 9
Default: 01 second
Pause Timer-It is the time for which the system wait before dialing the outside number after grabbing the
trunk. Sometimes it is observed that after grabbing the trunk lines the user does not get the dial tone
immediately. When the user himself is dialing the number he inadvertently waits for the dial tone and then
dials the number but this is not so when the PBX dials out the number. When Redial or Auto Redial or
Abbreviated Dialing feature is used the PBX grabs the trunk line and dials the number at its own. Now if
there is no pause time and if the PSTN is of old type then it is possible that the PBX dial out the number
before getting the dial tone. This may result in dialing wrong number. To avoid this situation the system
offers pause timer. Pause Timer is used during Redial, Auto Redial and Abbreviated dialing.
Command: 215-Timer
Range: 01 to 99 seconds
Default: 03 seconds
Trunk First Digit Wait Timer-It is time before which the extension should dial the digits on the trunk line
after grabbing the trunk. If the outside telephone number is not dialed during this time, the system gives error
tone. This is a global timer and is applicable to the First Digit Wait Timer of all the trunks.
Command: 217-09-Timer
Range: 01 to 99 seconds
Default: 15 seconds
Trunk Last Digit to Speech Wait Timer-The system waits for this timer to elapse after the last digit is
dialed before going to speech mode.
Command: 217-33-Timer
Range: 01 to 99 seconds
Default: 06 seconds
Trunk Parameter Report
Use following command to print/download trunk parameter report:
115-3
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 218
Team/Focus/Empire
=X=X=
TRUNK PARAMETERS AS ON 06-10-04(Wed) AT 14:55

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TRK ON/ TONE/ PDD MATURITY DISA FAX DOSA VOICE GROUP
NO. OFF PULSE DAY NIGHT DAY NIGHT DAY NIGHT DAY NIGHT 9 5
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 ON TONE 0 DEL OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF Y Y
2 ON TONE 0 DEL OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF Y Y
3 ON TONE 0 DEL OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF Y Y
4 ON TONE 0 DEL OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF Y Y
5 ON TONE 0 DEL OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF Y Y
6 ON TONE 0 DEL OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF Y Y
7 ON TONE 0 DEL OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF Y Y
8 ON TONE 0 DEL OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF Y Y
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------


--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TRK ECF ECF ECF
NO. DAY NIGHT DEST. TRUNK NUMBER
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 OFF OFF 2
2 OFF OFF 3
3 OFF OFF 4
4 OFF OFF 5
5 OFF OFF 6
6 OFF OFF 7
7 OFF OFF 8
8 OFF OFF 1
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------


--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TRK H.SCHEME HUNT DESTINATIONS HUNT DESTINATIONS FAX
NO. DAY NIGHT DAY NIGHT DEST
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 RR RR 21,22,23,24,26 21,22,23,24,26 21
2 RR RR 21,22,23,24,26 21,22,23,24,26 25
3 RR RR 21,22,23,24,26 21,22,23,24,26 29
4 RR RR 21,22,23,24,26 21,22,23,24,26 33
5 RR RR 21,22,23,24,26 21,22,23,24,26 22
6 RR RR 21,22,23,24,26 21,22,23,24,26 26
7 RR RR 21,22,23,24,26 21,22,23,24,26 30
8 RR RR 21,22,23,24,26 21,22,23,24,26 34
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
MATRIX TEAM Ver: 7R9 (US)

Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 219
Team/Focus/Empire
Trunk Reservation
Whats this?
An extension user can reserve a particular trunk for sometime.
In big offices, the number of users is more but the trunk lines are less. In such cases, at any given time
most of the trunks are busy and an extension user might not get his turn to make a call. This feature helps
an extension user in such case. He can reserve a trunk for time = trunk reservation timer. During this
period, no one else can access this trunk except the extension that has reserved this trunk.
How to use it?
To reserve a trunk:
Example:
To reserve a trunk 2, dial 112-2
To cancel Trunk Reservation
How to program?
Please refer Class of service(COS) for details on how to allow Trunk Reservation to an extension user.
Timer of Relevance:
Trunk Reservation Timer-It specifies the time for which the trunk remains reserved. On expiry of this
timer, the trunk is freed and other extensions can use this trunk.
Command : 217-31-Timer
Range : 1 to 9 minutes
Default : 3 minutes
Important Points:
Once your call is over, do not forget to cancel the reservation. This will enable other extension users to
use the trunk.
An extension can reserve a trunk only if it is given access to that trunk.
Relevant Topic:
1. Class of Service (COS)
=X=X=
1 Lift the handset. Dial tone
2 Dial 112-Trunk. Confirmation tone
1 Lift the handset. Dial tone
2 Dial 1120. Confirmation tone
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 220
Team/Focus/Empire
User Security (User Password)
Whats this?
The system provides security to the user by way of a Password. This helps to avoid any unauthorised use.
Each extension of the system has a password. This password helps the user in using following
features
Call follow me
Dynamic lock
DOSA.
Walk in class of service
Please refer respective features for better understanding.
User password is a 4-digits password. It cannot have either less than or more than 4 digits.
User password can be changed only from the extension.
The default User password is 1111 for all the extension users. (However, in case the user has forgotten his
password, the system engineer (SE) can clear the password for any user).
How to program?
Use following command to change the User password from the extension(simply after lifting the handset):
144-Old User Password-New User Password.
New password is a number string of 4-digits.
By default, User password is 1111 for all the extensions.
Use following command to clear User password of a extension (from SE/SA mode):
341-Extension
Where,
Extension is the flexible number assigned to the extension, whose user password has to be cleared.
Relevant Topic:
1. Dynamic Lock
=X=X=
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 221
Team/Focus/Empire
Virtual Extensions
Whats this?
An extension is a real (physical) port on the system. Compared to this, virtual extension is not a real
physical port whereby a telephone instrument is connected. It is an extension virtually connected to the
system. Any person given this facility becomes a virtual extension.
The system can be used as an unmanned PCO booth. The owner of the booth should give an
extension number and a secret password to the customer and, should explain the procedure of making a
call from the customers residence. The customer becomes the virtual extension.
In fact, it is same as a DOSA call except that the extension number is pre-defined.
Only few dedicated extension numbers i.e. 3900 to 3979 are allowed for this facility to be used. Since
these numbers are used for this purpose, no extension can have any of these numbers as their extension
numbers.
Maximum 80 virtual extensions can be defined.
How to use it?
Make a list of customers to whom you have to give this facility. Allot an extension number and a unique
password to each customer. This will avoid unauthorized use of this facility.
Give the unique extension number and the corresponding password to unique customer.
Explain the steps to use this facility to each customer.
All the steps are same as in DOSA except that here virtual extension number and the virtual password is
used instead of the extension number and the user password.
How to program?
DOSA should be enabled on the trunk/s. For more details, please refer section DOSA.
No other special command is required to use this facility.
However it is advisable to change the password for all the virtual extensions to avoid any unauthorized
use.
Use following command to change virtual extension password:
306-Virtual Extension-Virtual Extension Password
Where,
Virtual Extension is the flexible number for virtual extension from 3900 to 3979.
Virtual Extension Password is maximum upto 4-digits.
Example:
To change the password of virtual extension 3900 to 8085.
306-3900-8085
Use following command to print/download virtual extension reports:
115-8
Relevant Topic:
1. Direct Outward System Access (DOSA)
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 222
Team/Focus/Empire
=X=X=
VIRTUAL EXTENSION - PASSWORD AS ON 06-10-04(Wed) AT 14:59
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
VIRTUAL EXTENSION PASSWORD VIRTUAL EXTENSION PASSWORD
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3900 1111 3901 1111
3902 1111 3903 1111
3904 1111 3905 1111
3906 1111 3907 1111
3908 1111 3909 1111
3910 1111 3911 1111
3912 1111 3913 1111
3914 1111 3915 1111
3916 1111 3917 1111
3918 1111 3919 1111
3920 1111 3921 1111
3922 1111 3923 1111
3924 1111 3925 1111
3926 1111 3927 1111
3928 1111 3929 1111
3930 1111 3931 1111
3932 1111 3933 1111
3934 1111 3935 1111
3936 1111 3937 1111
3938 1111 3939 1111
3940 1111 3941 1111
3942 1111 3943 1111
3944 1111 3945 1111
3946 1111 3947 1111
3948 1111 3949 1111
3950 1111 3951 1111
3952 1111 3953 1111
3954 1111 3955 1111
3956 1111 3957 1111
3958 1111 3959 1111
3960 1111 3961 1111
3962 1111 3963 1111
3964 1111 3965 1111
3966 1111 3967 1111
3968 1111 3969 1111
3970 1111 3971 1111
3972 1111 3973 1111
3974 1111 3975 1111
3976 1111 3977 1111
3978 1111 3979 1111
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
MATRIX TEAM Ver: 7R9 (US)

Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 223
Team/Focus/Empire
Voice Help
Whats this?
You may record few important codes in the voice module. These can be played back by anybody whenever
required by dialing 110. It is entirely user dependant. Few important telephone numbers like that of railways,
roadways, airports, hospital, etc. can be recorded for easy accessibility.
How to use it?
Example:
To playback the recorded message, dial
110
Important Points:
You can use this feature provided voice help is recorded. For more details, please refer Voice Message.
To use this feature, a voice module must be used.
This feature is available only in Premium system with Voice module.
=X=X=
1 Lift the handset. Dial tone
2 Dial 110. Voice help.
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 224
Team/Focus/Empire
Voice Mail Integration
Whats this?
Any VMS/Auto-Attendant can be integrated with the system. However this integration works well if the
exchange of information between the two is perfect. Generally, this integration works on two protocols:
Tone Sensing and gateway. Tone Sensing relies on sensing of various Call Progress tones. Gateway uses
DTMF digits to signify various Call Progress events. Gateway is the system feature that is used by VMS/
Auto-Attendant for a firm integration. Version 7 system provides this Gateway.
How to connect a VMS/Auto-Attendant to the system?
The port of VMS/Auto-Attendant should be connected to the extension port of the system using a single pair
telephone cable. The figure given below shows connection of a VMS with the system where only two VMS
ports are interfaced with the system.
How it works?
As shown in the figure, VMS is connected on few of the extensions. If all the calls are to be routed through
VMS, the system should be programmed such that all the incoming calls land on VMS. Alternatively,
the system should be programmed such that incoming calls land on other extensions.
When an incoming call lands on the VMS, the VMS processes the call and guides the caller to reach the
desired extension.
As stated earlier, integration of the system with VMS or an Auto-Attendant works on two protocols
viz. Tone Sensing and Gateway.
Tone Sensing relies on sensing of various Call Progress tones. For example, when a VMS is interfaced
with the system, it senses the incoming ring and answers the call. It prompts the caller to dial an
extension number, subsequently senses the dialed extension number, keeps the caller on hold and dials the
extension number of the system where the call is to be diverted. Then the VMS waits for the ring
back tone. It first senses the ring back tone and then waits for it to stop. As soon as the ring back tone stops
the VMS transfers the call to the dialed extension number. All this process involves sensing of various
tones like ring back tone, old tone, etc. and hence is commonly called tone sensing. However this method
is not accurate.
To overcome this problem, the system offers Gateway feature. However, for latest knowledge on which
model provides this feature, please call our channel partner or the Matrix Support desk (Please refer to
Matrix Support Card for telephone number and other details).
Gateway uses DTMF digits to signify various Call Progress events. With Gateway mode, in the above
example when the VMS receives an incoming call, it answers the call. Then it prompts the caller to dial an
extension number. It senses the dialed extension number, keeps the caller on hold and dials the extension
number of the system where the call is to be diverted. On successful receipt of the dialed extension
number, the system sends a defined code (signifying ring back tone) to the VMS. Depending upon the
transfer type set for the VMS, it either transfers the call or waits for the called party to respond. In the latter
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 225
Team/Focus/Empire
case, when the called party answers the call, the system again sends a defined code (signifying successful
speech connection). The VMS detects this code and transfers the call to the dialed extension.
Since codes (defined string of characters) are used for the transfer of information, this method is very
much reliable and near to perfect.
Table given below shows various call progress events:
A special feature: Version 7 supports a special feature call Message Wait-VMS if Matrix VMS is interfaced. In
this case if there are voice messages in the voice mail box of the extension user then the dial tone on the extension
changes to shuttered tone. This intimates the extension user about the pending voice messages in his voice mail
box.
How to program?
Step 1: Define an extension port as VMS port using command 393.
Step 2: Group all the VMS ports in one group using command 251.
Step 3: Group all the VMS ports in one extension group using command 304.
Step 1
Use following command to define extension port as VMS port:
393-Extension-Code
Where,
Extension is the flexible number assigned to the extension.
Code Meaning
0 Extension port defined as normal station port
1 Extension port defined as VMS port
Step 2
Use following command to group all the VMS ports in one group (Pilot Group 9):
251-9-Extension1-Extension2-..-Extension8
Where,
Extension1, Extension2, , Extension8 is the flexible number to which the VMS is connected.
Use # to terminate the command if less than 8 extensions are to be programmed in the group.
Step 3
Use following coomand to group all the VMS ports in one extension group:
304-VMS Port Group-Busy Hunting Group
Where,
VMS Port Group is from 0 to 3
Busy Hunting Group is from 0 to 9
Example:
Program the system for following constraints:
Two ports of VMS are connected to extension 27 and 28 of the Team-208P.
Type Of Event Occurrence of Event Type of Tone
Call Placed Event Extension ringing Ring back tone
Call Blocked Event Extension busy, Extensions
handset not placed properly,
Busy tone, Error tone
Call Matured Event Call answered Speech
Call Disconnect Event Extension disconnects Error tone after speech
Call Forward Event Extension forwards the call Feature tone
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 226
Team/Focus/Empire
Use following command to define extension 27 and 28 as VMS port:
393-27-1
393-28-1
251-9-27-28-#
304-27-1
304-28-1
Important Point:
Please refer to System Parameter Report for the programmed voice mail events assigned.
Relevant Topics:
1. Busy Hunting Group
2. Department Group
3. Call Forward
=X=X=
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 227
Team/Focus/Empire
Voice Messages
Whats this?
Few messages can be recorded and later played back at a suitable time. This could be done without any
external record/playback system. All the Premium systems can provide this feature just by inserting an IC
called Voice Module (VM), recording the desired message and programming the system to playback the
message for desired feature. Voice guidance can be used for six different features as enumerated below:
Day message for DID / DOSA / Fax Homing
Night message for DID / DOSA / Fax Homing
Alarm greeting
Hold on music (recorded)
Auto Redial
Help menu
Application of voice guidance:
Voice guidance for DID (Day Time)
Any greeting or welcome message can be recorded in the chip. The system will greet and guide the caller
by playing back the recorded message.
Typical DID messages could be:
Thanks for calling Progressive bearings. Dial 202 for marketing or dial 203 for technical support or dial
205 for purchase or dial 9 for the assistance. Welcome to Progressive bearings. Please dial 203 for
technical support or dial 209 for fax tone or dial 9 for assistance.
Voice guidance for Fax homing. (Day time)
Any message guiding the caller to send his/her fax message can be recorded in the chip. The system will
play back the recorded message when the caller calls you.
Typical Fax homing message could be:
Thanks for calling Progressive bearings. If you wish to send a fax message then please press the start
button of your fax machine now or wait for assistance.
Voice guidance for DID/DOSA/Fax homing. (Day time)
If DID, DOSA and Fax homing, all are programmed on one trunk then you can record a combined
message. The system will play back the recorded message to the caller.
Typical message could be:
Thanks for calling Progressive bearings. Dial 202 for marketing or dial 203 for technical support or dial
209 for fax tone or dial 9 for assistance. To use DOSA facility, dial 1-extension-password.
Please remember, three different messages, one for DOSA, one for DID and one for Fax homing cannot
be programmed for day time. The same is true for night time also. However, as explain above same can be
clubbed into one.
Voice guidance for DID. (Night time)
Your system will greet the caller even in your absence and will also guide him. It is only required to record
the message and program the system to playback it in night mode.
Typical DID message for night time could be:
Thanks for calling Progressive bearings. Right now we are closed. Please call tomorrow after nine
clock!
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 228
Team/Focus/Empire
Welcome to progressive bearings. Sorry, we are closed for the day! If it is very urgent then please dial the
residence number.
Similarly, appropriate message for fax homing during night time can be recorded.
Voice guidance for Alarm.
This feature is very useful in hotels where it is required to wake up guests at odd time. At the same time it
is also required to greet them. Any greeting message can be recorded in the chip. When the guest picks up
the handset on getting ring, he is greeted with this recorded message.
Typical alarm message in hotels could be:
Good morning, Sir. This is a wake up call. You may please call room service for any assistance. Thanks.
Have a nice day
Voice guidance for Music on hold.
Normally, when a caller is kept on hold, he gets internal 16-tone hold on music. This internal music can be
replaced with the external music (Please refer section External Music). But to feed external music, a
separate music source is required which may not be feasible all the time. However, this same requirement
can be fulfilled using this feature. Any message like advertisement of your company or any message
related to your new plans can be recorded in the voice chip and can be played back to the caller when he
is on hold. This way, two jobs are done at a time; the operator can attend to other call and the message,
which otherwise you had to give to the caller, has reached him in a much better manner.
Typical message for Music on hold could be:
Welcome to Progressive bearings. We are glad to announce that we are now an ISO 9001:2000 company.
Best and continued efforts of our employees to deliver optimum quality products have made this
possible.
Voice guidance for Auto redial.
During auto redial, if the call goes through and the system detects ring back tone, the system gives ring to
the extension, which has requested auto redial. At this point of time both, the extension as well as the
destination are ringing. Now if the destination answers the before the extension, he gets internal hold on
music. It could be surprising for him, why should he get music while answering a fresh call. This event can
be avoided by replacing music with a voice message. An appropriate voice message can be recorded and
can be played back in such situation.
Typical message for Auto redial could be:
This is a call from progressive bearings. Please wait!.
Progressive bearings calling. Please hold for a moment.
Voice guidance for Help menu.
Many people believe that features provided by the system are good. But they cannot use the features
because when they need features, they dont remember the codes. To help them, Matrix has designed this
help menu facility. Codes of the frequently used features can be recorded in the voice module. Whenever
the user needs to access a feature, he just presses a master code (110) after lifting the handset. The system
plays help menu of the codes. The user need not remember or refer system manual for frequently used feature
codes.
Typical help menu messages could be:
131-For call forward.
140-To lock your extension.
141-dynamic lock password- To open the locked extension.
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 229
Team/Focus/Empire
162-hour-minute for morning alarm.
If more features are used, a message can be recorded with all required codes. However, limitation of the
capacity of the voice module must be kept in mind.
How to program?
Voice module programming must be done in following steps in the given sequence. If the steps are not
followed in the same sequence, the programming might not work.
Step 1: Divide the VM in required number of parts using command 202.
Step 2: Record voice message in VM using command 121.
Step 3: Playback the recorded partition using command 122.
Step 4: Assign voice message to corresponding application using command 203.
Step 5: Enable/disable voice guidance on trunk using command 532.
Step 1
Use following command to divide VM in required number of parts:
202-Code
Where,
Step 2
Use following command to record voice message in VM:
121-Message Number
Where,
Step 3
Use following command to playback the recorded message:
122-Message Number
Where,
Step 4
Use following command to assign voice message corresponding to its application:
203-Feature Number-Message Number
Where,
Code Meaning
0 If one message is to be stored
1 If two messages are to be stored
Message Number Meaning
1 If message is to be stored for part 1 of the voice module
2 If message is to be stored for part 2 of the voice module
Message Number Meaning
1 If message is to be stored for part 1 of the voice module to be played back
2 If message is to be stored for part 2 of the voice module to be played back
Feature Number Feature Name
1 DID / DOSA / Fax Homing during Day time
2 DID / DOSA / Fax Homing During Night time
3 Alarm greeting
4 Music on Hold (recorded)
5 Auto Redial
6 Help menu
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 230
Team/Focus/Empire
Use following command to de-assign voice message:
203-Feature Number-0
Step 5
Use following command to enable/disable voice guidance on DID trunk:
532-Trunk-Day Time-Night Time
Where,
Trunk is from 0 to 9.
Examples
Example 1:
Program a Team system for music on hold (of 20 seconds). The voice module is VM-60, dial
202-1 (This command will divide voice module in 1 part)
121-1 (This command will record the music in part 1 of voice module)
122-1 (This command will verifies the recorded music)
203-4-1 (This command assigns the recorded music with the feature music on hold)
On giving this command the system will restart, the music of 20 seconds will be repeated if the call is kept
on hold for more than 20 seconds.
Example 2:
Program an Empire system for DID message of 20 seconds during daytime and DID message of 30 seconds
during nighttime. The voice modules VM-60. Here the total voice time is of 120 seconds, hence this time
will be divided into two equal parts of 90 seconds each. Hence a message of 60 seconds or less duration can
be recorded in 2 parts.
Insert the voice modules(VM-60) in the CPU card (Team/Focus) and Tone card Empire as shown in figure.
202-2 (This command will divide voice module in 2 parts each of 16 seconds)
121-1 (This command will record the message in part 1 of voice module)
122-1 (This command will verifies the recorded message)
203-1-1 (This command assign the recorded message in part 1 of the voice module with the feature
DID/DOSA/Fax Homing message during day time)
532-1-1-1 (This command enables voice guidance on trunk 1 during day time and night time)
121-2 (This command will record the message in part 2 of voice module)
122-1 (This command will verifies the recorded message)
203-2-2 (This command assign the recorded message in part 2 of the voice module with the feature
DID/DOSA/Fax Homing message during night time)
Message Number Meaning
1 Corresponding to message stored in part 1 of the voice module
2 Corresponding to message stored in part 2 of the voice module
Day Time Feature Name
0 Disabled voice guidance on trunk
1 Enabled voice guidance on trunk
Night Time Feature Name
0 Disabled voice guidance on trunk
1 Enabled voice guidance on trunk
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 231
Team/Focus/Empire
Important Topics:
Maximum two message can be stored in VM.
If a voice module of 60 seconds (VM-60) is used and if only one message is required then message of
maximum 60 seconds can be recorded. If two message are required then one message can maximum be of
30 seconds.
If is not possible to have one message of 40 seconds and other message of 20 seconds.
Recording of message should be started after the beeps. Press the hook switch on completion of the
message to be stored.
DID/DOSA/Fax Homing features are related with the trunk, hence trunk should be enabled for this
feature. It is possible to enable voice guidance only on few trunks.
In Team system, if voice module is used for music on hold then no other feature can be used
simultaneously.
In Focus and Empire system if one voice module is used for MOH then any other feature can be played
back simultaneously. However, the command 203 should be used first to assign MOH and then for any
other feature.
If the feature music on hold is used then system restarts on giving the command 203-4-Message Number.
This facility may not work if voice module is inserted in opposite direction. In such cases warranty shall
be void.
This facility may not work if the recording is done in noise environment.
It may not work if the programming is done slots not corresponding to the command. Suppose you are
programming the system for slot 1 whereas the voice module is in slot 2, this facility will not work.
Voice message recording:
There are two methods of recording a voice message in the voice module:
Recording from a telephone
Recording from an external music source.
Recording from a telephone:
This method is very simple. Whatever we speak on the phone is recorded. It is done as follows:
Select a good quality extension with good telephone.
Request a person with clear voice to record the message in his or her voice.
Select a peaceful place. Switch Off fans and other sources of noise.
Avoid room noise to maintain clarity of the message.
Enter in the programming mode form this extension.
Issue command 121-Message Number.
You will get beeps for 2-3 seconds.
Start your message as son as the beeps stops.
The recording is now going on. Whatever you speak on the phone is being recorded
Replace the handset as soon as the message is over. You may use your hand to press the hook switch to
reduce the delay.
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 232
Team/Focus/Empire
You will ring because you are in programming mode.
To verify the recording, issue command: 122-M, where M is the same message number you gave earlier.
Listen to the whole message.
Repeat above procedure if you are not satisfied with the message.
Recording from an external source:
The simple method described above is good enough for most of the applications. But if a better quality of
voice message is required, we need to eliminate all the room noise picked up by the phone while recording.
A better option is supported by the system to record high quality message. We need a cassette or CD player
with pre-amplified output port. This port is generally marked AUX on the players. This can be done as
follows:
Select the piece of music or message you want to record.
Get this message recorded with the proper media.
Select the track or the position on the media so that when you press PLAY, the desired message should
start without delay.
Connect the player with the system using an audio jack provided by MATRIX. This jack is an optional
item supplied by MATRIX. You might also need the jack for the player you are using.
The external music source can be connected to either the external music port or the public address system
(PAS) port.
Enter in the programming mode from an extension.
Issue command: 123-Message Number. (If source is connected to the external music port)
Issue command: 124-Message Number (If the source is connected to the PAS port.).
You will hear beeps for 2-3 seconds.
Start the player as soon as the beeps stops on the phone.
The recording has started.
Replace the handset as soon as the message is over. You may use your hand to press the hook switch to
reduce the delay.
You will get ring because you are in the programming mode.
To verify the recording, issue the command: 122-Message Number.
Listen to the whole message.
Repeat the above procedure if you are not satisfied with the message.
Timer of Relevance:
Voice message timer - During voice message recording, the user records the message from a telephone.
When the message is recorded, he replaces the handset. The noise of disconnection is also recorded in the
voice message. The listeners do not appreciate this blurt sound when the message is played back. To avoid
this noise, the system reduces the voice message timer by one second. For example, if you recorded a
message of 20 seconds, the total message time should have been 21 seconds. This is because normally a
telephone takes one second to disconnect. But, the system will reduce the timer by one second and the
message length stored is 20 seconds (21-1 = 20). Thus, the last one-second of message that contains the
unpleasant sound gets removed.
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 233
Team/Focus/Empire
The following table would clear remaining doubts.
Team Focus Empire
Maximum Voice Modules 1 2 2
Built-In Voice Module -- -- 1
Maximum segments allowed in system 2 2 2
Maximum segments possible per voice module 2 1 1
Maximum message length with message number 1 60 120 120
Maximum message length with message number 2 30 60 60
Segments accessible simultaneously 1 2 2
=X=X=
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 234
Team/Focus/Empire
Walk-In Class of Service
Whats this?
An extension user can use his Toll Control from any extension.
This feature is very useful for managers when they move away from their seat. Normally they have
highest-level toll control. Now when they go on the shop-floor (where the Toll Control is normally of low
level) and if they wish to use their Toll Control, this feature comes to their help. Using this feature, they
can make calls as per their Toll Control from any extension. This facility is password protected hence its
misuse can be avoided.
How to use it?
Example:
Extension user 23 who is allowed long distance calls is at extension 25 who is denied long distance calls.
Extension user 23 wants to make long distance calls from extension 25. To accomplish this extension user
23 should use Walk in Class of Service from extension 25.
Important Points:
Only one call is allowed at a time using this feature. i.e. to make two calls one after the other, you will
have to dial the code to make first call and then again to make second call.
Walk-In Class of Service is allowed to all the extensions.
Walk-In Class of Service is not allowed with default dynamic lock password.
=X=X=
1 Lift the handset. Dial tone
2 Dial 111-Extension-User Password. Confirmation tone
3 Disconnect and lift the handset again. Dial tone
4 Dial '9 ' or '5 ' or '8-trunk '. Trunk dial tone
Section 3: Appendices
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 237
Team/Focus/Empire
Appendix A: Features at a Glance
01 Alarms
Duration Alarm
Time Alarm (Wake Up)
Daily Alarm
Remote Alarm
Cancel Remote Alarm
Cancel All Alarms

161-Minute
162-Hour-Minute
163-Hour-Minute
164-Extension-Alarm-Hour-Minute
164-Extension-0
160
02 Auto Call Back-On Busy
Cancel Auto Call Back
2
102
03 Auto Call Back-On No Reply
Cancel Auto Call Back
Flash-2
102
04 Auto Redial-Low Priority
Cancel L.P Auto Redial
77
70
05 Auto Redial-High Priority
Cancel H.P Auto Redial
777
70
06 Barge-In 33
07 Call Follow Me
Cancel Follow Me
132-Extension-Dynamic Lock P/w
130
08 Call Forward-All Calls
Cancel Forward
131-Extension
130
09 Call Forward-If Busy
Cancel C.F.-If Busy
134-Extension
130
10 Call Forward-If No Reply
Cancel C.F.-If No Reply
133-Extension
130
11 Call Hold Flash
12 Call Park
Retrieve Parked Call
Flash-7
17
13 Call Pick Up-Group 4
14 Call Pick Up-Selective 12-Extension
15 Call Splitting Flash-1
16 Conference Flash-9
17 Do Not Disturb 131-Extension
18 Dynamic Lock
Close Lock
Open Lock
Set Lock Level
Set Auto-Shut Time
Change Password

140
141- Password
142-Password-Level
143-Password-Minute
144-Old Password-New Password
19 Executive / Secretary 131-Extension
20 Flashing On The Trunk Flash-#-Code
21 Hot Line
Hot Line Delay
Hot Outward Dialing
Hot Outward Dialing - With Number
Hot Outward Dialing Delay
Cancel Hot Line And HOD
153-Extension
154-Seconds
151-Trunk
152-Trunk-Number-#/Flash
154-Seconds
150
22 Interrupt Request 3
23 Last Number Redial 7
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 238
Team/Focus/Empire
24 Use Memory Dialing 6-Location
25 Program Personal Memory 18-Location-Trunk-Number-#/Flash
25 Raid 4
26 Selective Trunk Access 8-Trunk
27 Trunk Call On Group-9 Trunks 9
28 Trunk Call On Group-5 Trunks 5
29 Trunk Reservation
Cancel Trunk Reservation
112-Trunk
112- 0
30 Walk-In Class Of Service 111-Extension-Dynamic Lock P/w
31 Voice Help 110
32 Pilot Group Calling 398-Group
33 Paging Or PAS Access 3998
34 Door Lock Relay Off/On 399-0/1
35 Change room status to clean 3997
36 Door Phone Access 3996
37 Conversation Recording 109
38 Enter SE mode 19-SE Password
39 Enter SA mode 19-SA Password
40 Exit SE/SA Mode 0 on Programming Tone
41 Identify Flexible Number of an Extension from Hardware
Port*

FUN-70-Hardware Port
42 Identify Hardware Port from Extensions Flexible Number*

FUN-71-Extensions Flexible
Number
*
This command is allowed from Operator Console only.
Appendix B: System Commands
1. Enter SE Mode 19-SE Password
2. SMDR Report Of ALL Calls 111-0
3. SMDR Report Of LOCAL Calls 111-1
4. SMDR Report Of Long Distance Calls (Starting with 0) 111-2
5. SMDR Report Of Long distance Calls (Starting with 00) 111-3
6. SMDR Report Of Last Few Calls 111-4 - Count
7. SMDR Report Of Calls Made By An Extension. 112-Extension
8. SMDR Report For All Extensions 112-*
9. SMDR Report Of All Calls Made On Given Trunk. 113-Trunk
10. SMDR Report Of All Trunks 113-*
11. SMDR Report Of All Calls Made On Given Date. 114-Month-Date-Year
12. Print System Parameters 115-1
13. Print Extension Parameters #1 115-2-1
14. Print Extension Parameters #2 115-2-2
15. Print Trunk Parameters. 115-3
16. Print SMDR Summary For All Extensions 115-4
17. Print Operator Console Parameters 115-5
18. Print Feature Help Report 115-6
19. Print Programming Help Report 115-7
20. Print Virtual Extension Detail 115-8
21. Print Global Directory Report. 116
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 239
Team/Focus/Empire
22. Print Pulse Rate Table 117-1
23. Print Area Code Table 117-2
24. Resume Printing. 118
25. Halt Printing 119
26. Clear SMDR Buffer. 110-SE Password
27. Start Recording Voice Message 121-Message
28. Playback Recorded Message 122-Message
29. Record Voice Message From External Music Port 123-Message
30. Record Voice Message From PAS Port 124-Message
31. Disable Communication Port 131-0
32. Select Communication Port For Remote Display 131-1
33. Select Communication Port For Computer 131-2
34. Select Communication Port For Operator Console/CLI
Display
?
131-4
35. Check-In /Check-Out Report 141-Extension
36. Room Shift From Extn#1 To Extn#2 142-Extension1-Extension2
37. Clear Service Extensions Calls 1491-Extension
38. Clear Checkout Extensions Calls 1492-Extension
39. Clear Virtual Extensions Calls 1493-Extension
40. Check version number of the system 1500-Version
41. Check revision number of the system 1501-Revision
42. Set Day Mode (Manual Operation) 151
43. Set Night Mode (Manual Operation) 152
44. Change Day Time (Auto Operation) 153-Hour-Minute
45. Change Night Time (Auto Operation) 154-Hour-Minute
46. Switch OFF System Relay 155-0
47. Switch ON System Relay 155-1
48. Select Trunk Bank 1 (Trunk 01 - 10) 156-1
49. Select Trunk Bank 2 (Trunk 11 - 20) 156-2
50. Single Ring On Trunk Call Transfer 157-1
51. Double Ring On Trunk Call Transfer 157-0
52. Demonstrate Dial Tone 161-1
53. Demonstrate Ring-Back Tone 161-2
54. Demonstrate Busy Tone 161-3
55. Demonstrate Error Tone 161-4
56. Demonstrate Confirmation Tone 161-5
57. Demonstrate Programming Tone 161-6
58. Demonstrate Internal Call Wait Tone
@
161-7
59. Demonstrate Trunk Call Wait Tone
@
161-8
60. Demonstrate Shuttered Tone 161-9
61. Demonstrate Music 161-0
62. Loading Factory Setup 18-SE Password
63. Restart System 10
65. Exit SE Mode 0

?
Applicable in Team only
@
Applicable in Empire only
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 240
Team/Focus/Empire
Appendix C: System Parameters
1. SMDR MODE (off/on line, local/ local + Long Distance) 22-0/1-0/1
2. Day-Night Switching Manual/Auto 23-0/1
3. Day & Night Time For Whole Week 24-Day-Hour-Minute-Hour-Minute
4. COS Group
*
250-Group-a-b-c......p
5. Department Group 251-Group-e1-e2-e3-.-e8
6. Allowed List 252-Level-Location-dd-#
7. Denied List 253-Level-Location-dd#
8. Charge For 1 Unit 2611-RR.PP
9. Local Call Service Charge 2612-RR.PP
10. Long Distance Call Service Charge 2613-RR.PP
11. Long Distance Service Charge Percentage 2614-PP
12. Pulse Rate for First Unit and Cost of First Unit 2631-PRT-Duration-Cost
13. Pulse Rate for Additional Unit and Cost per Additional Unit 2632-PRT-Duration-Cost
14. Area Code Table Entry 264-Area Code-Pulse Rate code-
#/Flash
15. Delete Area Code Table Entry 265-Area Code- #/Flash
16. Disable/Enable Header from SMDR Report 2660-0/1
17. Multiple Service Charge For Local Calls 2662-0/1
18 Set SMDR Reports For Summary/Detail 2663-0/1
19. Reports Sorted On Originating/Terminating Extensions 2664-0/1
20. Charge Call To Originating/Terminating Ext. 2665-0/1
21. Fixed Or Variable Service Charge For Long Distance Calls 2666-0/1
22. Unit Increment At The End Of Each Long Distance Calls 2667-0/1
23. Print SMDR Reports Online on Printer/Computer 2668-0/1
24. Print Configuration Reports on Printer/Computer 2669-0/1
25. Enable/Disable Paper Feed 2670-0/1
26. Deleting Entire Area Code Table 260-SE P/w-Reverse SE P/w
27. To enable/disable the transfer of call details to comm. port 2671-Code
28. Set Current Date 27-Month-Date-Year-Day
29. Set Current Time 28-Hour-Minutes
30. Set New SE Password 291-New SE Password
31. Set New SA Password 292-New SA Password
32. Customer Name Programming 201-Customer Name
33. Program Number of Voice Messages 202-Count
34. Set Feature-Message Relation 203-Feature-Message
35. Floor Service Code 2041-Code
36. Floor Service Destination 2042-Group-Extension
37. Relay In Manual/Auto Mode 2051-0/1
38. Relay Control Timing 2052-HH-MM-SS-HH-MM-SS
39. Delete Relay Port Time Table Entry 2053-HH-MM-SS-HH-MM-SS
40. Delete Relay Port Time Table 2054
41. Off-Line CPD Silence/Music 206-0/1
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 241
Team/Focus/Empire
41. Dosa Timer In Seconds/Minutes 207-0/1
42. Relay Port as Relay Port/Door Lock 2091-0/1
43. Door Lock Relay Bi-Stable 20921
44. Door Lock Relay Mono-Stable 20920-1/0 (Active High/Active Low)
45. Programming Security display for a particular extension 2095-CLI Display Number-Extension
46. Emergency Detection and Reporting 2096-Emergency Number-#
Appendix D: Extension Parameters
1. Call Pick-Up Group 301-Extension-Group
2. Call Budget Disable/Enable 3021-Extension-0/1
3. Call Budget Amount Limit 3022-Extension-RRPP
4. Call Budget Lock Level 3023-Extension-Level
5. Call Privacy For IR/Raid/BI-Trunk Call Routing Beeps-DID
Call
303-Extension-Code-Code-Code
6. Busy Hunting Group 304-Extension-Group
7. Floor Service Extension Group 305-Extension-Group
8. Virtual Extension Password 306-Extension-New Password
9. COS Group 31-Ext-Day Group-Night Group
10. COS For All Extensions 31-*-Day Group-Night Group
11. Toll Control 32-Ext-Day Level-Night Level
12. Toll Control For All Extensions 32-*-Day Level-Night Level
13. Trunk Access For Day 331-Ext-Trunk-Trunk- Trunk-#
14. Trunk Access For Day For All Extensions 331-*-Trunk-Trunk- Trunk-#
15. Trunk Access For Night 332-Ext-Trunk-Trunk-. Trunk-#
16. Trunk Access For Night For All Extensions 332-*-Trunk-Trunk...... Trunk-#
17. CDC On/Off For Local Calls 3331-Ext-Day Code-Night Code
18. CDC On/Off For Local Calls All Extensions 3331-*-Day Code-Night Code
19. CDC On/Off For Long Distance Calls 3332-Ext-Day Code-Night Code
20. CDC On/Off For Long Distance Calls All Extensions 3332-*-Day Code-Night Code
21. CDC On/Off For Incoming Calls 3333-Ext-Day Code-Night Code
22. CDC On/Off For Incoming Calls All Extensions 3333-*-Day Code-Night Code
23. CDC On/Off For Warning Beeps Without Disconnection 3334-Ext-Day Code-Night Code
24. CDC On/Off For Warning Beeps Without Disconnection
All Extensions
3334-*-Day Code-Night Code
25. PAS Access On/Off 334-Extension-Day Code-Night Code
26. PAS Access-All Extns 334-*-Day Code-Night Code
27. Global Dir-1 Access On/Off 335-Extension-Day Code-Night Code
28. Global Dir-1 Access All Extns 335-*-Day Code-Night Code
29. Global Dir-2 Access On/Off 336-Extension-Day Code-Night Code
30. Global Dir-2 Access-All Extns 336-*-Day Code-Night Code
31. Clear Dynamic Lock Password 341-Extension
32. Clear Dynamic Lock Settings 342-Extension
33. Clear All The Features 343-Extension
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 242
Team/Focus/Empire
34. DOSA Access Off/On 35-Extension-0/1
35. Flash Timer For Extension 36-Extension-Count
36. Flash Timer For All Extensions 36-*-Count
37. Flexible Number 37-Hardware Port-Number-#
38. Load Default Flexible Numbers 37-*-0
39. Clear All Flexible Numbers 37-*-Flash/#
40. Service/Guest Group Assignment 38-Extension-Group
41. Service/Guest Group All Extns 38-*-Group
42. Main Operator Extension 391- Extension
43. Secondary Operator Extension 392- Extension
44. Assign a VMS port to an extension 393-Extension-Code
45. Check In/Check Out 3*1-Extension-1/0
46. Guest Name Programming 3*2-Guest Name
47. Temporary Check In/Check Out 3*3-Extension-1/0
48. Private Trunk 3*4-Extension-Trunk
49. Cancel Private Trunk 3*4-Extension-0
Appendix E: Trunk Parameters
1 Enable/Disable And Dial Type 41-Trunk-Ena/Dis-Dial Type
2 Enable/Disable, Dial For All Trunks 41-*-Ena/Dis - Dial Type
3 Set Maturity Type for a trunk 42-Trunk-Maturity Code
4 Set Maturity Type for all the trunks 42-*-Maturity Code
5 DID On/Off 43-Trunk-Day Code-Night Code
6 Fax Homing On/Off 44-Trunk-Day Code-Night Code
7 DOSA On/Off 45-Trunk-Day Code-Night Code
8 Hunting Scheme 46-Trunk-Day Scheme-Night
Scheme
9 Hunting Scheme For All Trunks 46-*-Day Scheme-Night Scheme
10 Destinations For Day Mode 47-Trunk-Ext1-Ext2-Ext3-Ext4-Ext5
11 Destinations For Day Mode For All Trunks 47-*-Ext1-Ext2-Ext3-Ext4-Ext5
12 Destinations For Night Mode 48-Trunk-Ext1-Ext2-Ext3-Ext4-Ext5
13 Destinations For Night Mode For All Trunks 48-*-Ext1-Ext2-Ext3-Ext4-Ext5
14 Fax Homing Destinations 49-Trunk-Extension
15 Trunk Access Groups 40-Trunk-Group9-Group5
16 Routing On Extension Or Operator 51-Trunk-Day Routing-Night
Routing
17 ECF On/Off 521-Trunk-Day Code - Night Code
18 ECF Destination Trunk 522-Trunk-Destination Trunk
19 ECF Destination Number 523-Trunk-Number-#
20 Speech Connection Delay Timer 531-Trunk-Seconds
21 Voice Guidance On/Off 532-Trunk-Day Code-Night Code
22 Set PEC count for a trunk 54-Trunk-PEC
23 Set PEC count for all the trunks 54-*-PEC
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 243
Team/Focus/Empire
Appendix F: Technical Specifications
System Capacity and Resources
Team
208 S
Team
208 P
Focus
416
Empire
1072
Total Ports 20 20 40 96
Trunks (Max.) 8 8 16 16
Extensions (Max.) 20 20 40 96
Relay Port - 1 1 1
PAS Port - 1 1 1
Speech Paths 7 7 15 15
DTMF Decoders 2 4 6 8
DTMF Encoders 2 4 6 8
Type of Switching : Space Diversion 7 (CMOS cross point)
Type of Control : CMOS Micro-Controller with SPC
Extension Dialing
A. Pulse Dialing : 10 PPS 10%, Make/Break ratio = 1:2
B. DTMF Dialing : As per CCITT recommendation Q.23
Trunk Dialing
A. Pulse Dialing : 10 PPS 5%, Make/Break ratio=1:2 (break period between 66 to 68ms), IDP=667ms.
B. DTMF Dialing : As per CCITT recommendation Q.23
Tones
Tone Frequency Sound Cadence
Dial tone 400 Hz Toooooooooooooo Continuous
Ring back tone 400 Hz @ 30Hz Turroo...Turroo 500ms-250ms-500ms-2750ms
Busy tone 400 Hz Toooooooo..Tooooooooo 500ms-500ms
Error tone 400 Hz Too.Too.Too.Too 250ms-250ms
Internal call wait 400 Hz BeepBeep 67ms-3933ms
Trunk call wait 400 Hz Beep.BeepBeep.Beep 67ms-67ms-67ms-3799ms
Programming tone 400 Hz BeepBeep 100ms-900ms
Confirmation tone 400 Hz Beep.Beep 33ms-33ms
Shuttered tone 400 Hz Beep.Beep 16ms-16ms
Rings
Voltage 75V AC, 30Hz TO 50Hz
Internal call (slow ring), double 500ms ON, 250ms OFF, 500ms ON, 3750ms OFF
Trunk call (single ring) 1250ms ON, 3750ms OFF
Alarms, Message Wait, Programming
ring, Door phone (triple ring)
250ms ON, 250ms OFF, 250ms ON, 250ms OFF,
250ms ON, 3750ms OFF
Boss Ring (fast ring) 500ms ON, 250ms OFF, 500ms ON, 1250ms OFF
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 244
Team/Focus/Empire
Transmission Parameters
Return Loss More than 10 dB
Insertion Loss Less than 1 dB
Inter-channel cross-talk Less than -65 dBm
Idle channel noise Less than -60 dBm
Extension loop resistance 250 ohms maximum (excluding telephone)
Dimensions and Mounting
Model
Length
in cms.
Breadth
in cms.
Height
in cms.
Mounting Pitch
in cms.
Team 34.7 28.0 8.0 15.0
Team-PS 19.5 15.1 8.0 16.0
Team SMPS 22.7 15.0 6.2 16.3
Team-DSP (RDU) 18.5 8.0 2.1 15.4
Focus 43.5 32.5 11.2 20.5
Focus-PS 19.5 15.1 8.0 16.0
Focus-SMPS 22.7 15.0 6.2 16.3
Focus-DSP (RDU) 18.5 9.0 2.1 15.8
Empire 52.8 27.5 18.1 Table top
Empire-MDF 42.2 27.4 7.9 20.2
Empire-PS 13.0 22.8 9.5 19.1
Empire-SMPS 22.7 15.0 6.2 Table top
Empire-DSP (RDU) 34.0 10.1 2.2 31.8
DSS-70 28.6 22.5 10.0 Table top
DSS-45 17.5 22 8 Table top
DSS-PC (speech module) 9.0 7.5 3.5
Mounting hole
head = 0.95
DSS-PC (communication module) 8.8 6.5 2.5 --
Indoor CLI display 12 7.0 3.0 9.5
Outdoor CLI display 17 9.0 3.5 14.5
Cabling : 0.5 mm single twisted pair
Linear Power Supply : 230 V 5% AC, 50/60 Hz
Switch Mode Power Supply : 90-260V AC, 47-65 Hz
Environment : Temperature - 0-45
o
C (32-113 Fahrenheit)
Humidity - 95% RH, non-condensing
=X=X=
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 245
Team/Focus/Empire
Appendix G: Troubleshooting
The Matrix PBX is not turning ON
Please check the Mains Power
Please check the Switch
Please check the Main Fuse
Please check the MOV
The Matrix PBX does not work in power down mode
Check the power down relay of the trunk port.
One extension is not working
Please change the telephone instrument and check
Please check wiring of that extension
When I call 21 extension the call goes to 22
Dial 130 from 21 (your call might have been forwarded)
Extension not ringing
Check ringer volume of the telephone instrument
Try replacing the telephone instrument
Dial 130 to disable call forward / call follow me feature
Extension found busy
Check whether hook-set is properly kept on the cradle
Try replacing telephone instrument
Check wiring
Extension cannot dial
Try replacing telephone instrument
Ensure dialling is not disabled through programming
Incoming Call does not land correctly
Ensure proper programming of trunk landing group for the trunk
Check for Call Privacy from incoming calls
Check the Time programmed in the Matrix PBX. This is a time sensitive feature.
If your question still remain unanswered, please contact our authorised channel dealer.
=X=X=
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 246
Team/Focus/Empire
Glossary
=X=X=
CO : Central Office
DESTINATION EXT. : The extension where the trunk is programmed to land (generally referred as operator).
DID : Direct Inward Dialing. A facility to access a desired extension directly from outside,
without operator assistance.
DOSA : Direct Outward System Access. This facility allows a remote user to access outward
dialing through the EPABX system.
DTMF : Dual Tone Multi Frequency. When a code (digit) is dialed, two different specific
frequencies are transmitted.
EXTENSION : Internal station to which a telephone is connected.
FLASH : A code required to use various system features. Technically, Flash is breaking the
loop current for 200 milli seconds to 900 milli seconds. This code can be dialed either
by tapping the hook switch of the telephone momentarily or by pressing the Flash
key of the telephone, if provided. Please remember that dialing 1 can also dial this
code if the telephone is in pulse mode.
LCD : Liquid Crystal Display
LED : Light Emitting Diode
MDF : Main Distribution Frame. All extensions and P & T lines are terminated on the MDF.
In fact, it is a bridge between the system & the field wiring. All Matrix systems
except Empire have built-in MDF.
OFF-HOOK : A condition in which the handset of the telephone instrument is lifted from the cradle.
ON-HOOK : A condition in which the handset of the telephone instrument rests on the cradle. (Idle
condition of the phone)
PAS : Public Address System
PPM-4 : Primary Protection Module (for 4 trunks/extensions)
PSTN : Public Switch Telephone Network
PULSE : A waveform generated by making and breaking of loop current.
PULSE DIALING : A type of signaling in which codes (digits) are dialed in pulses.
RTC : Real Time Clock. Date and time keeping circuit.
SA MODE : System Administration Mode. General housekeeping functions are allowed from
admin mode.
SE MODE : System Engineer Mode. The entire programming of the system can be done from this
mode.
SMDR : Station Message Detail Recording. Cost calculation of the calls made by a station (We
call extension).
SWG : Standard Wire Gauge
TONE : Different frequencies used for signaling
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 247
Team/Focus/Empire
Index
A
Abbreviated Dialing
Alarms
Allowed and Denied Lists
Answering Calls-Please refer Getting Started
Auto Call Back
Auto Redial
B BB BB
Barge-In
Behind the PBX Applications
Boss Ring
Busy Hunting Group
C CC CC
Call Budget
Call Cost Calculation(CCC)
Call Duration Control (CDC)
Call Follow-Me
Call Forward
Call Hold-Please refer Hold
Call Park
Call Pick Up
Call Privacy-Please refer Privacy
Call Progress Tones
Call Splitting
Call Toggle-Please refer Call Splitting
Call Transfer
Calling an Extension-Please refer Getting Started
Cancel Extension Features
CDC
Check-In and Check-Out-Please refer Hotel Applications
Class of Service (COS)
CLI Display
Communication Ports
Computer Connectivity
Conference
Conference-Unsupervised-Please refer Conference
Consultation Hold-Please refer Call Splitting
Configuration Reports
Continued Dialing
Conversation Recording
D DD DD
Day and Night Modes-Please refer Time Table
Day Service - Please refer Time Table
Department Group
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 248
Team/Focus/Empire
Default the Configuration
Default Programming PasswordPlease refer System Security
Demonstration of Tones-Please refer Call Progress Tones
Dialing Ratio-Please refer Technical Specifications
Different types of Tones-Please refer Call Progress Tones
Different types of Rings-Please refer Distinctive Rings
Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
Dialing (DID)
Direct Outward System Access (DOSA)
Direct Trunk Access-Please refer Selective Trunk Access
Distinctive Rings
Do Not Disturb (DND)-Please refer Call Forward
DND-Please refer Call Forward
Door Lock
Dynamic Lock
E EE EE
Emergency Dialing
Emergency Detection and Reporting
Enter SE Mode-Please refer Programming the System
Executive/Secretary-Please refer Call Forward
Exit SE mode-Please refer Programming the System
Extension Name Programming - Please refer Hotel Applications
Extension Numbers - Please refer Flexible Numbers
Extension Parameters
External Call-Please refer Getting Started
External Call Forward (ECF)
Extension Group-Please refer Department Group
External Music
F FF FF
Fax Homing
Flash Timer
Flashing on Trunk-Please refer Continued Dialing
Flexible Numbers
Floor Service Destination-Please refer Hotel Applications
Feature Access-Please refer Class of Service (COS)
G GG GG
Getting Started-Please refer Installing the System
Group Call-Please refer Department Group
Guest/Service Group Programming-Please refer Hotel Applications
H HH HH
Help Reports
Hold
Hotel Name Programming-Please refer Hotel Applications
Hotel Applications
Hotline
Hot Outward Dialing (HOD)-Please refer Hotline
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 249
Team/Focus/Empire
I II II
Incoming Call Landing-Please refer Trunk Landing
Installing the System
Intercom-Please refer Getting Started
Internal Call-Please refer Getting Started
Internal Digit-Digit Timer-Please refer Extension Parameters
Interrupt Request
Introducing the System
J JJ JJ
K KK KK
L LL LL
Last Number Redial
M MM MM
Making External Calls-Please refer Getting Started
Maturity
Memory Dialing-Please refer Abbreviated Dialing
Message Wait-Please refer Hotel Applications
MOH
Music on Hold (MOH)
N
Night Service-Please refer Time Table
O OO OO
Operator
Operator Console
P PP PP
Paging
Pilot Number-Please refer Department Group
Port Number Identification
Power Down Mode
Printer Port
Privacy
Private Trunk-Please refer Hotel Applications
Programming the System
Programming Using a Computer
Programming Wizard
Programmable Feature Access-Please refer Class of Service (COS)
Protecting the System
Q
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 250
Team/Focus/Empire
R RR RR
Raid
Redial-Please refer Last Number Redial
Relay Port
Remote Alarm-Please refer Hotel Applications
Remote Alarm Status-Please refer Hotel Applications
Remote Display Units
Remote Programming
Restart the System
Restricted Dialing-Please refer Toll Control
Ring Destinations-Please refer Trunk Landing
Rings-Please refer Distinctive Rings
Room Status Display-Please refer Hotel Applications
S SS SS
Secretary-Please refer Call Forward
Selective Trunk Access
Speed Dialing-Please refer Abbreviated Dialing
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
System Parameters
System Security(Passwords)
System Timers
System Timings-Please refer Time Table
T TT TT
Technical specification
Temporary Check-In/Check-Out-Please refer Hotel Applications
Time Table
Toll Control
Toggle-Please refer Call Splitting
Tone-Please refer Call Progress Tones
Tone Specifications-Please refer Call Progress Tones
Troubleshooting
Trunk Access
Trunk Answer from any extension-Please refer Call Pick Up
Trunk Landing
Trunk Parameters
Trunk Reservation
U UU UU
Unsupervised Conference-Please refer Conference
User Security (Password)
V VV VV
Virtual Extensions
Voice Help
Voice Mail Integration
Voice Messages
Matrix
Version-7 (USA) System Manual 251
Team/Focus/Empire
W WW WW
Walk-In Class of Service
X XX XX
Y YY YY
Z ZZ ZZ
=X=X=
Notes and Programming Register
Requirement:
Extensions to be given flexible numbers from 201 to 209, 301 to 309
COS group for 201, 202, 301 and 302 is 8.
..

Notes
R
e
g
i
s
t
e
r

o
f

C
h
a
n
g
e
s
Programming Register

S.N. Date Major Programming Changes made









































R
e
g
i
s
t
e
r

o
f

C
h
a
n
g
e
s
Programming Register

S.N. Date Major Programming Changes made









































Thanks!!